k £ a fi q eee erento ac ALBERT R. MANN LIBRARY NEW York STATE COLLEGES OF AGRICULTURE AND HoME EcoNomIcs AT CORNELL UNIVERSITY THE GIFT OF WILLARD A. KIGGINS, JR. in memory of his father Cornell University Library SH 441.N85 1865 The American angler’s book; embracing the W000 mann AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. GRAND FALLS ON THE NIPSSSIGUIT. THE AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK: EMBRACING Che Natural Pistory of Sporting fish, AND THE ART OF TAKING THEM. WITH INSTRUCTIONS IN FLY-FISHING, FLY-MAKING, AND ROD-MAKING; AND DIRECTIONS FOR FISH-BREEDING. T0 WHICH IS ADDED. DIES PISCATORI A; DESCRIBING NOTED FISHING-PLACES, AND THE PLEASURE OF SOLITARY FLY-FISHING. NEW EDITION, WITH A SUPPLEMENT, CONTAINING DESCRIPTIONS OF SALMON RIVERS, INLAND TROUT FISHING, ETC., ETC. By THADDEUS NORRIS. EWlustrated with Hightn Lngrabings on Wood. PHILADELPHIA: PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO. LONDON: SAMPSON LOW, SON & OO. 1865. (VAUKT as — A4 | NGS ices: d603 70 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1864, by E. H. BUTLER & 00. in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States, in and for the Eastern District . of Pennsylvania. 1 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1865, by E. H. Butter & Co., in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States, in and for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. MEARS & DUSENBERY, SHERMAN & CO., bTEREOTYPERS AND ELECTROTYPERS. PRINTERS, THE FOLLOWING PAGES ARE DEDICATED TO Dhe Hittle Club OF “HOUSELESS ANGLERS;” AND TO “ALL THAT ARE LOVERS OF VIRTUE, AND DARE TRUST IN PROVIDENCE, AND BE QUIET, AND GO A-ANGLING.” In offering this book for the perusal of those who may feel suffi- ciently interested in the subject to read works on Angling, I deem it an act of courtesy to say a few words in explanation of the motives which prompted me to commence, and then drew me on in the prose- cution of a work involving, as it has proved, no small amount of time and labor. Every true lover of angling knows that the pleasure it brings with it, does not end with the day’s sport; that besides being ‘“‘a calmer of unquiet thoughts,” for the time, it impresses happy memories on the mind; and he looks back to many a day, and many a scene, as an oasis by the wayside in the rough journey of life; and like Dog- berry’s friend Verges, ‘ he will be talking’’ when he finds an interest- ed hearer, and may be tempted, as the author of these pages has been, to write of it. Notwithstanding the many books on angling by British authors, but few American works on the subject have yet been offered to the (7) vill TO THE READER. reading public; and this in the face of the fact that we are ap angling people, and that our thousands of brooks, creeks, rivers, lakes, bays, and inlets abound in game-fish. The best informed of those who have written on American fishes, have omitted many important species, and treated slightingly of others which are worthy of a more extended notice. Since the pub- lication of Dr. Bethune’s “ Walton,” and subsequently Frank For- ester’s “ Fish and Fishing,” sporting-fish have decreased in some parts of the country where they were once abundant. In the mean while, the opening of new lines of travel has brought within reach of the angler many teeming waters that were then almost inaccessible. With a view of filling up the blank left by my predecessors, of correcting some erroneous ideas that have been imparted, not only concerning fish, but the adaptation of English rules and theories, without qualification, to our waters; and with the object of making the angler self-reliant, and to encourage him as much as possible to make the best of such resources as may be within his reach, espe- cially as regards his tackle, I have devoted many spare hours to the following pages; in writing which, to use the words of Isaac Walton, ” and as reminiscences of ‘“‘T have made a recreation of a recreation ;’ my boyhood or maturer years have come back to me, and the mood was on me, I have at times indulged my sense of the ludicrous or the ridiculous ; and, again adopting the words of Walton in his address to his readers, “I have in several places mixed not any scurrility, but some innocent harmless mirth, of which, if thou be a severe sour- complexioned man, then I here disallow thee to be a competent judge, for divines say there are offences given and offences not given, but offences taken.” But I am sanguine enough to hope that my simple narrations or allusions to such incidents will touch a chord of sym- pathy in the breasts of good-natured readers “who love to be quiet and go a-angling.” I had collected most of the matter contained in this book—much of it as the reader finds it, but a greater portion in rough notes— when the present unhappy rebellion broke out. I then thought it doubtful whether the following pages would ever be printed, but TO THE READER. ix some of my angling friends, one or two of whom had read parts of my manuscript, urged me to publish, and overcame my scruples as to my short-comings as a writer, for I profess to be only an angler. One of these, who regards the author and his project perhaps in too favorable a light, addressed me a letter on the subject. I conceive it to be so strong an argument in favor of angling, and so much more to the point than I could express it myself, that I insert it here. My Dear Frisnp: Several times you have told me that you entertained the idea of writing a treatise on angling. Let me beg of you not to suffer this ‘‘ good intention” to be turned into a paving-stone for that locality into which all unfulfilled good intentions are dumped for cobble. I feel great confidence that if you can impart to beginners but a share of the practical knowledge and insight of the gentle craft which you have obtained by years of patient, observant, and appreciative practice, or can imbue them with a part of that genuine love for the sport which has grown into and with you, then you will be doing the youth of our country a real service. Perhaps few people claiming to be civilized have greater need than we ¢ Americans to be taught the necessity of innocent out-door recreations, for the healthy development of mind, body, and spirit. To the struggle for wealth, and place, and fame, we devote such unremitting ardor, that we are too apt to overlook the simple and innocent joys which a kind Father has so bountifully placed within our easy reach; by neglecting which, we miss the natural means for renewing the spring of life, and keeping fresh and green in our memories the happy days of boyhood. I have ever felt grateful that asa boy I imbibed a love for angling, for in my maturer years it continues to afford me a keener enjoyment than any other recreation. Nothing has survived to me of my boyish days which has the peculiar abandon and charm of boyish joy like this. At each returning season, when the warm breath of spring flushes the maples with the ruddy glow of budding leaves, what can equal tfle angler’s de- light, as, rigged out in sober woollen suit and hob-nailed wading shoes, with creel o’er his shoulder and pliant rod in his grasp, he is permitted to revisit the bright familiar stream (scene of his former triumphs), to listen to the music of its flow, and to try once more if his right hand has lost its cunning, or his flies their attraction. Though I have always loved angling, I think if I had known you earlier I should have loved it even better. I realize how much I have learned’ x TO THE READER. from you in the few years we have fished together, and I look back with a kind of regret that I did not have the benefit of your kindly teaching ear- lier. Many a one who has the true love of angling in him, comes 80 far short of the enjoyment he could have, for want of willing and faithful teaching at the commencement, from those whose experience and skill are above his own. Some anglers do not think enough of their duties to their juniors in this respect. I reckon among the chiefest of your qualities as an angler, the sincere sympathy you have always manifested towards any novice who showed that he had a love for the art, and your willingness to teach to such what you knew. Why not manifest this on a more ex- panded field, and speak through a book to all who are seeking knowledge upon angling, and are disposed to avail themselves of your experience ? There is one department of the school for anglers in which I think you are qualified to speak ex cathedra. I mean the mechanical; if you will undertake to teach what you know upon this branch, you can enable an angler, who has any aptitude for mechanism and a reasonable facility of manipulation, to manufacture for himself, his own rod, flies, and tackle, of a quality for service and effectiveness, which will not suffer in comparison with those to be procured in any good tackle-store in the country. Noone has a better right than I to bear this testimony to your handicraft, for my, favorite fly-rod and book of flies are the product of your skill. We have a good many fishermen in this country, and too few anglers ; we are apt to value more a glut than a quiet day’s sport, where skill and painstaking will reward us with a moderate sufficiency. Catching fish is not necessarily angling, any more than daubing canvas with paint is paint- ing. If you write, you could not help giving aid to the attainment of a truer and juster perception of the delights and uses of angling; and aid your reader, if he has a sympathetic soul, in the attainment of that “sweet content” which can be drawn from all the accessories of the art, and the beauties of nature amid which it is practised. I say, therefore, write. The labor will not only pleasantly recall many scenes of your*piscatorial experience, and memories of the choice spirits with whom you have taken your diversion, but will make you to be re- membered with gratitude by those to whom your labor of love will bring an innocent pleasure. Truly your friend and fellow-angler, J. Most of the engravings of fish in this book are from nature. The marine species, found in the chapter on salt-water fishing, are reduced TO THE READER. xi copies of those found in Dr. Holbrook’s work. The vignettes are the production of the pencil of a good brother of the angle, an amateur, drawn mostly for his own amusement and occasionally for mine, as the subjects have been presented to his appreciative eye during the last ten or twelve years. Many of them are his earlier sketches. He has expressed an unwillingness that I should reproduce them, after finding that I was in earnest in doing so in this work ; but I have, in most cases, so intimately associated them with the subjects or topics to which they serve as vignettes, that I cannot oblige him by relin- quishing my purpose. Most of the tackle and diagrams, and a few of the fish, were drawn by the writer; I confess with some labor, for they are purely mechanical productions. All of the drawings on wood, with the exception of the plate of hooks and Salmon-flies by Mr. Wilhelm, are by D. Gordon Yates, of this city, and were cut by himself or under his supervision. I have received so many useful hints from Dr. Bethune’s notes to his edition of Walton, and from English works on angling during the last fifteen or twenty years, that I am at a loss to whom to accredit any particular item of information; having so entirely appropriated such knowledge, and stored and mingled it with whatever necessity and some aptness of my own has taught me, as to consider all alike my own property. Tackle-making I have learned as a pleasant recreation. My tactics and rules are based on my own experience and upon that of brethren of the rod with whom I have angled. So also is my knowledge of fishing-grounds. Anglers are all more or less conceited, or, to say the least, self- opinioned, and I may at times have given directions or laid down rules contrary to the views or practice of the reader, or may not have expressed myself as plainly as I endeavored to do; but “What is writ is writ; Would it were worthier.” And I only ask the same indulgence of opinion I am willing to extend to those who hold opposite notions. xii TO THE READER. To the living, with whom I have enjoyed long days of unalloyed pleasure in boyhood, by the dear old mill-pond, and in manhood by the mountain stream, on the sylvan lake, or within sound of “ the warning off the lee shore, speaking in breakers,’’ I send these pages as a reminder of the past. In reference to those who are no more op earth, I quote as applicable those simply beautiful lines of Walton, and say that my allusion to some of the incidents herein contained, ‘Cis, or rather was, a picture of my own disposition, especially in such days as I have laid aside business, and gone a-fishing with honest Nat and R. Roe; but they are gone, and with them most of my pleasapt. hours, even as a shadow that passeth away and returneth not.”’ CONTENTS. AppREss TO THE READER é - « « « « Page d CHAPTER I. ANGLING. Its harmonizing influences.—Recollections of Angling in boyhood, its after influence on manhood.—Its social tendency.—What and' Who is an Angler ?—Different kinds of Anglers.—The Snob Angler.— The Greedy Angler.—The Spick-and-Span Angler.—The Rough- and-Ready Angler.—The Literary Angler.—The Shad-roe Fisher- man.—The English Admiral, an Angler.—The True Angler . 27 CHAPTER II. GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. Definition.—Origin and order in creation.—Natural mode of propaga- tion.—Habits as regards maternity.—Migration.—Vitality.—Ex- ternal organs.—Internal organization.—Ichthyology _.. ; . 39 CHAPTER III. TACKLE IN GENERAL. Hooks, — Sinkers. — Swivels. — Gut. — Leaders.— Snoods.— Lines.— Reels,—Rods.—Bow Dipsys_ . eke ces ek eS (18) xiv CONTENTS. CHAPTER IV. THE PERCH FAMILY—-PERCIDA. General Remarks on the Percide.—Great number of American genera and species.—Paucity of European species. —Distinguish- ing marks.—Their abundance and variety in the Valley of the Mississippi—Migratory habits—The Rockfish or Striped Bass, Labrax lineatus. Rockfish Tackle. Rock-fishing on the lower Rappahannock.—The White Perch, Labrax pallidus. Perch-fish- ing.—The White Bass of the Lakes, Labrax albidus. White Bass taken with the artificial fly—Fresh water Bass of the South and West, Grystes salmoides. Bass-fishing. Bass Fly-fishing.—Black Bass of the Lakes, Grystes nigricans. Trolling for Black Bass with spoon, and with artificial flies——The Striped Bass of the Ohio, Labraxz chrysops—The Short Striped Bass.—Oswego Bass.—The Crappie or Sac-a-lai, Pomozxis hexacanthus.—-The Yellow Barred Perch, Perca flavescens.—The Sunfish or Sunny, Pomotis vulgaris.— Bream, Ichthylis rubricunda. Bream-fishing on Bayou La Branch.— The Pike Perch or Ohio Salmon, Lucioperca Americana.—The Buffalo Perch, Ablodon grunniens CHAPTER V. THE PIKE FAMILY—ESOCIDA. Remarks on the Pike Family.—Mascalonge pictured by Cuvier.— European species.—American species.—The Garfish ; manner of taking it.—Dr. Bethune’s remarks on Pikes.—Their introduction into England.—Pliny’s Pike.—Gesner’s Pike.—The Great Lake Pickerel, Esox luctoides. Trolling from a boat for Pickerel.—The Mascalonge, Hsox estor. Angling for Mascalonge.—The Pond Pike, Esox reticulatus. Pike-fishing. Trolling for Pike with the gorge-hook. Pike-fishing in Eastern Virginia—The Great Blue Pike.—The Little Pike of Long Island.—The Streaked Pike of the Ohio. Story told about a Pike taken in the Kanawha . CHAPTER VI. THE CARP FAMILY—CYPRINIDA. Remarks on the Cyprinide:.—The Sucker, Catostomus communis.— Buffalo Fish, Catostomus bubalus. Buffalo Fish as an article of TT - 127 CONTENTS. diet.—The Chub or Fallfish, Lewcosomus rhotheus. Errors of Ameri- can writers in regard to the size of the Chub. Chub an annoyance to fly-fishers. Chub-fishing on the Brandywine. Umbrella invented by a Chub Fisherman.—Roach, and Roach-fishing CHAPTER VII. THE HERRING FAMILY—CLUPEIDA. Remarks on the Herring Family, from the “Iconographic Encyclo- pedia.” Their abundance in the waters of the United States. Great numbers of them taken in the Potomac. Herring-fishing with the artificial fly—The Shad, Alosa prestabilis. Its delicacy and value as food. Migratory habits. Shad taken with the min- now. Shad-roe as bait . CHAPTER VIII. CATFISH AND EELS. Catfish, Siluride. Extract from Iconographic Encyclopedia. Cat- fish of the Atlantic States and Western waters.—Eels. Observations on the Petromyzontide (Lamprey Eels), on the Murenide (Common Eels), and on the Gymnotide (Electric Eels)—The Common Eel, Anguilla vulgaris. Fishing for Eels. Migratory habits. Young Eels as bait. Eels not hermaphrodites . ’ CHAPTER IX. THE SALMON FAMILY.—SALMONIDA. Remarks on the Salmonide.—The Brook Trout. Scientific descrip- tion, Habits and manner of breeding. Growth. Difference in size between Trout of still waters and those of brisk streams. Effect of light and shade, and bright or dark water, on the color of Trout. Errors as regards new species. Food of the Trout. Its greediness. Its geographical range. Former abundance and causes of decrease. Size of Trout in the regions of Lake Superior and State of Maine. Size in the preserved waters of England, and size the angler is restricted to in rented waters.—The Salmon. Former abundance in the rivers of New York and the Eastern States. Great numbers in California, Oregon, and British Possessions. &V . 153 _ 177 xvi CONTENTS. Decline of the Salmon-fisheries in British Provinces. Scientific description. Natural process of propagation. Their growth. Parr, Smolt, and Grilse. Mature Salmon. Size of Salmon. Instinct. Restocking depleted rivers, and introducing Salmon into new waters. Their migration from sea to fresh rivers, and gradual preparation for their change of habitat. Salmon-leaps. Food of Salmon at sea.— The Canadian Trout, or Sea Trout, Salmo Canadensis. Error in referring it to the species Salmo trutia of Europe; their dissimilar- ity. Its affinity to Salmo fontinalis (Brook Trout). Sea-Trout fishing in the Tabbisintac. Mr. Perley’s and Dr. Adamson’s account of Sea-Trout fishing. Their abundance in the rivers falling into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and annoyance to Salmon-fishers.—The Schoodic Trout, or Dwarf Salmon of the St) Croix, Salmo Gloveri. Account of three summers’ fishing in the Schoodic Lakes.—The Great Lake Trout, Salmo namaycush. Manner of taking them.— The Lesser Lake Trout, Salmo Adirondacus. Trolling for Lake Trout.—-Back’s Grayling, Thymallus signifer. Dr. Richardson’s remarks on the Grayling.—The Smelt, Osmerus viridiscens. Their great numbers along the northern part of our coast. Smelt in the Schuylkill. Quantity sent south from Boston. Smelt used as a fertilizer--The Capelin, Mallotus villosus——The Whitefish, Co- regonus albus.—Trout Bait-fishing . CHAPTER X. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. Introductory Remarks.—The Sheepshead.—The Weakfish, or Salt- Water Trout.—The Barb, or Kingfish —The Spot, Pigfish, or Goody.—The Croaker.—The Redfish of the Gulf of Mexico.—The Bluefish, or Snapping Mackerel.—The Spanish Mackerel.—The Pompano (Southern).—The Drumfish—-The Flounder.—The Sea- Bass.—The Blackfish.—The Mullet.—The Tom Cod, or Frostfish.— The Porgy CHAPTER XI. TROUT FLY-FISHING.—OUTFIT AND TACKLE. Wading-Jacket.—Trousers.—Boots.—Creel or Basket.—Landing-Net, ——-Rods.—Reels.— Lines.—Leaders.—Flies.—The Whip : ‘ . 191 ac eo ald 305 CONTENTS. Xvi ¢ s CHAPTER XIL TROUT FLY-FISHING.—THE STREAM. Casting the Fly.—Theory of strict imitation —Striking and killing a Fish.—Likely places, how to fish them . : ‘ ; 4 . 827 CHAPTER XIII. SALMON-FISHING. Tackle used in Salmon-Fishing.—Rods.—Reels.—Reel-lines.—Cast- ing-lines.—Salmon-fliies.—Materials required for Salmon-flies for American rivers.—Salmon-flies for the rivers of New Brunswick and Canada.—Theory and practice of Salmon-fishing.—Salmon- fishing compared with Trout-fishing.—Casting the fly.—The straight- forward cast, casting over the left shoulder, casting in difficult places, explained by diagrams.—Casting in an unfavorable wind.— Striking.— Playing a Salmon.—What a Salmon will do or may do.— Gaffng.—Camping on the river.—Camp equipage.—Protection against mosquitoes, black-flies, and midges.—Clothing, &c.—Cook- ing utensils.—Stores.—Cooking Salmon on the river.—To boil a Salmon.—To broil a Salmon.—Cold Salmon.—Soused Salmon.— To bake or steam a Grilse under the coals and ashes.—Kippered Salmon.—Smoked Salmon.—Law and Custom on the river . . 345 CHAPTER XTV. SALMON-RIVERS OF THE BRITISH PROVINCES, Salmon-rivers of Lower Canada.—Salmon-rivers emptying into or tributary to rivers flowing into the Gulf of St. Lawrence and Bay of Chaleurs.—Salmon-rivers of New Brunswick, and those of Canada adjacent.— Mirimichi.— Ristigouche.— Metapediac.— Cas- capediaes.—Bonaventure.—Tittigouche.—Nipissiguit . . . 379 CHAPTER XV. REPAIRS, KNOTS, LOOPS, AND RECEIPTS. Repairs.—To wax silk, thread, or twine.—Tying on hooks and making loops, illustrated.—Splicing a line and splicing a rod, illustrated.— Knots.—The angler’s single and double knot, and knot used in 2 XVill CONTENTS. tying on drop-flies, illustrated—A gang of hooks, illustrated.— Receipts.—For making wax.—For dyeing gut.—For dyeing feathers and dubbing , - . 405 CHAPTER XVI. FLY-MAKING. Implements.—Hand-Vice, Spring-Pliers, &c.—Book for holding mate- rials—Materials.—Hooks.—Gut.—Tinsel._Dubbing.—Hackles.— Wings.—To tie a plain Hackle.—To tie a Palmer.—To make a fly with wings ‘ : ‘ ; . 419 CHAPTER XVII. ROD-MAKING. Woods used in making rods.—Wood and Malacca cane for fly-rods.— Materials used by amateur rod-makers.—To make a fly-rod of three: pieces.—To make a tip.—To stain a rod.—Oiling and varnishing. — Wrapping splices and putting on rings——To make a “rent and glued,” or quarter-sectioned tip.—Draw-plate and V tool illustrated and explained.—Manner of splitting cane and joining the pieces of a quarter-sectioned tip described by diagram.—Making middle pieces and tips without splices—Manner of making a fly-rod to be adjusted to light or heavy fishing.—Ferule-making ‘ : . 441 CHAPTER XVIII. FISH-BREEDING. Causes of the decrease of Salmon and Trout.—Remarks on fish-ponds and the manner of stocking them.—Artificial Fish-Breeding—with illustrations, showing the manner of expressing the ova and milt, the arrangement of hatching-troughs, and the growth of the fish; from ‘ A Complete Treatise on Artificial Fish-Breeding,” by W. H. Fry, Esq., with some remarks of the author of this work.—The Aquarium—its appropriate size and form, and manner of stocking it with fish and introducing suitable aquatic plants i a . 459 CONTENTS. XIX DIES PISCATORIA. Tue ‘“‘ Housetess ANGLERS” ; : : ; Page 489 ‘Tae Noonpay Roast . , 3 . 497 First Nooning—Trout-fishing in Hamilton iaaiies New York . 503 Second Nooning—Trout-fishing in New Hampshire . ‘ . 513 Third Nooning—Trout-fishing in the regions of Lake Superior . 531 Fourth Nooning—Trout-fishing in the Adirondacks . . . 547 Fiy-Fisnine ALONE : ‘ é . : . - . 567 Tue Ancier’s SappaTH ‘ ek ‘ : - «589 ConoLusion ; é : : : F ‘ : 509 a he gee SUPPLEMENT. Appress TO READERS . ; s 4 ; ; : . 603 Satmon Rivers . : ‘ : : ; : ; . 607 Geographical position . ‘ . : . 607, 608 Salmon-fishing in Canada.—The Goodbont, Mingan and Mani- tou, Moisie, St. John, Natashquan, St. Margaret, Laval, Jaques Cartier, Trinity, St. Margaret (en bas), Bersimis, Romaine 609, 610 Account of Salmon-fishing in the St. John, Goodbout, Moisie, Nipissiguit, Mingan, and Manitou, in 1863 : . 611, 612 “All about Fishing” . ‘ . 613 Salmon-fishing on the River St. J ohn, 0. E.—J saieal of a a to the St. John in 1863 . , ‘ : . 615 The Moisie —Score of Three Rods in 1362 and 1963 . 626 The Goodbout.—Score of Three Rods in 1864. : ‘ 628 The Great Natashquan.—Journal of Dr. Fiske . ‘ . 629 The Nipissiguit.—Journal of the Author in the years 1863 and 1864 ‘ ; ie 5 : a ee 632 XX CONTENTS. Sea-Trovr FisHine . . 649 Description of the Sea-T'rout.—Frank Forester’s and Mr. Perley’s account of, reviewed - 649 Rivers and stations where found - 653 Inpawp Trout Fisnine «wees . . 654 Journal of an excursion to Lakes Umbagog and Mollychunke- munk, in 1864 ‘ é : : 3 t 3 . . 654 Trout-fishing in the Adirondacks eS ce. J ae, ca O8 The true spirit of Trout-fishing . d F F : : . 669 Srripep Bass Fisnine : F . : . : p . . 671 The “ mode peculiar.”—Where to fish, and the tackle to be used 71, 672 Fisu BREEDING . : ‘ i : 4 F : ; . 677 Natural and artificial breeding of Trout. ; . 677 Observations on the manner of fecundation . : . 683 Stocking Trout-ponds on Long Island . 7 4 . 686 Stocking ponds and lakelets with Black Bass 688 Prof. Agnel’s experiment . . i . . 689 CoNCLUSION ‘ 2 5 : ‘ : ‘ j . 692 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. FRONTISPIECE—VIEW OF THE GRAND FALLS ON THE NIPISSI- GUIT, From A Puorograra sy Russet, or St. Joun, N.B. RIVER SCENE . . . . . . é Page 5 MALACOPTERYGII AND ACANTHOPTERYGII—POSITION OF FINS IN THE TWO ORDERS ‘ ‘ é : . 7 POSITION OF TEETH AND GILL-COVERS Fi 58 HOOKS AND SWIVELS 4 i é - 65 ROCKFISH, OR STRIPED BASS f ds ‘ 81 UNCLE ROLLY i ; - 89 WHITE PERCH.—GRAY PERCH . i . fi 90 FRESH-WATER BASS OF THE SOUTH AND WEST . 7 - 99 BLACK BASS OF THE NORTHERN LAKES Ci i : 103 CRAPPIE, OR SAC-A-LAI . ‘ 5 . » ii YELLOW-BARRED PERCH . : ‘ p . 114 SUNFISH, OR SUNNY é . : , ° « 115 FISHING FOR SUNNIES . . " . . 117 GREAT NORTHERN LAKE PICKEREL . : 131 CANADIAN BOATMAN . . ¥ Fi a fi 134 MASCALONGE . < ‘ . . . 5 - 135 POND PIKE ‘ ‘i . . ' . . 138 GORGE-HOOK ‘ . : . : . - 139 THE MAJOR : . . . 146 THE HOSTLER TELLING A FISH STORY . r 7 . 150 THE CHUB-FISHER’S IMPROVED UMBRELLA . . . 160 GIRL FISHING FOR ROACH . . : . . 162 . (xxi) xxii LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. ti BROOK TROUT SALMON GROWTH OF THE YOUNG SALMON SALMON-FRY.—PINK AND SMOLT GUIDE . . GREAT LAKE TROUT . . LESSER LAKE TROUT GANG OF HOOKS, BAITED SMELT ‘ . CHILDREN ON A TROUT STREAM SHEEPSHEAD ¥ . . WEAK-FISH BARB OR KINGFISH SPOT, PIGFISH, OR GOODY CROAKER REDFISH OF THE GULF OF MEXICO BLUEFISH OR SNAPPING MACKEREL SPANISH MACKEREL . POMPANO.—CREVALLE BOAT TROUT-FLIES LANDING-NETS FOR FLY-FISHING HEAD OF A TROUT THE OLD SPRING BY THE ROADSIDE REEL FOR SALMON,FISHING SALMON-FLIES RIGHT AND LEFT-SHOULDERED, AND DIFFICULT CASTING BARK-PEELER'S Beek AND STABLE CANOEMAN TYING ON HOOKS AND LOOPS SPLICING LINE AND ROD KNOTS GANG ‘ . SETTLER’S CABIN . PIN-VICE AND SPRING PLIERS . FLY-MAKING FEATHER CUT FOR WINGS “PLEASE, SIR, GIVE ME A FLY-HOOK ?” PAGE 286 307 325 342 348 353 362 376 402 406 408 409 409 416 420 429 434 433 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ROD-MAKING—V TOOL AND DRAW-PLATE MAKING QUARTER-SECTIONED TIPS MALACCA CANE , FISH-BREEDING—HATCHING TROUGHS: EXPRESSING THE SPAWN OVA AND YOUNG SALMON . SCIENTIFIC ANGLING SAW-MILL ON TROUT STREAM AFTER THE ROAST ; “THEE MUSN’T GO THROUGH THAT RYE!” A THIEF’S PORTRAIT UNCLE LOT BLACKSMITH’S BOY DISCUSSING THE DRAFT OFF FOR A DEER DRIVE . 3 : WATCHING FOR DEER STONE THROWER . ; 2 é SAND-PIPERS RIVER SCENE ; THE ST. LAWRENCE, QUEBEC, AND CITADEL ST. JOHN, N. B. THE SAGUENAY THE TROUT POOL ae me xxi PAGE 449 450 451 468 469 477 482 494 500 510 528 544 552 554 556 564 576 586 598 607 649 652 654 CHAPTER I. ANGLING. “QUIVERING fears, heart-tearing cares, Anxious sighs, untimely tears, Fly, fly to courts, Fly to fond worldlings’ sports, Where strained Sardonic smiles are glosing still, And grief is forced to laugh against her will; Where mirth’s but mummery, And sorrows only real be. . “Fly from our country pastimes, fly, Sad troops of human misery :— Come, serene looks, Clear as the crystal brooks, Or the pure azured heaven that smiles to see The rich attendance on our poverty; Peace, and a secure mind, Which all men seek, we only find.” Warton. CHAPTER I. ANGLING. Its harmonizing influences.—Recollections of Angling in boyhood, its after influence on manhood.—Its social tendency.—What and Who is an Angler ?—Different kinds of Anglers.—The Snob Angler.—The Greedy Angler.—The Spick-and-Span Angler.—The Rough-and-Ready Angler. —The Literary Angler—The Shad-roe Fisherman.—The English Ad- miral, an Angler.—The True Angler. Ir is not my intentiop to offer any remarks on the antiquity of Angling, or say much in its defence. Dame Juliana Berners, Isaac Walton, and more recent authors, have discoursed learnedly on its origin, and defended it wisely and valiantly from the aspersions and ridicule of those who cannot appreciate its quiet joys, and who know not the solace and peace it brings to the harassed mind, or how it begets and fosters contentment and a love of nature. I ask any caviller to read Dr. Bethune’s Bibliographical Preface to his edition of Walton; and then Father Izaak’s address to the readers of his discourse, ‘‘but especially to THE HONEST ANGLER,” and accompany him in spirit, as Bethune does, by the quiet Lea, or Cotton by the bright rippling Dove; and if he be not convinced of the blessed influences of the “gentle art,” or if his heart is not warmed, or no recollections of his boyish days come back to him, I give him up without a harsh word, but with a feeling of regret, that a lifetime should be spent without attaining so much of quiet happiness that might have been so easily (27) 98 AMERICLAN ANGLERS BOOK. possessed, and quoting a few sad words from Whittier’s Maud Muller, I only say ‘it might have been.” Many anglers, such as Sir Humphrey Davy and Sir Joshua Reynolds, besides some of my own acquaintance, have sought its cheering influences in advanced life. I know of one whose early manhood and maturer years were spent on the boister- ous deep, and who, though now past eighty, is still an ardent, but quiet angler; and when no better sport can be found, he will even fish through the ice in winter for Roach. No doubt his days have been lengthened out, and the burden of life lightened, by his love of ‘angling. But how sweetly memories of the past come to one who has appreciated and enjoyed it from his boyhood, whose almost first penny, after he wore jacket and trowsers, bought his first fish-hook; whose first fishing-line was twisted by mother or sister; whose float was the cork of a physic vial, and whose sinkers were cut from the sheet-lead of an old tea- chest! Thus rigged, with what glad anticipations of sport, many a boy has started on some bright Saturday morning, his gourd, or old cow’s horn of red worms in one pocket, and a jack-knife in the other, to cut his alder-pole with, and wandered “free and far” by still pool and swift waters, dinnerless—except perhaps a slight: meal at a cherry tree, or a handful of berries that grew along his path—and come home at night weary and footsore, but exulting in his string of chubs, minnows, and sunnies, the largest as broad as his three fingers! He almost falls asleep under his Saturday night scrubbing, but in the morning, does ample justice to his “catch,” which is turned out of the pan, crisp and brown, and matted together like a pan-cake. In my school days, a boy might have been envied, but not loved for proficiency in his studies; but he was most courted, who knew the best fishing-holes; who had plenty of powder ANGLING. 99 and shot; the best squirrel dog, and the use of his father’s long flintlock gun. And I confess, as I write these lines with my spectacles on, that I have still a strong drawing towards this type of a boy, whether I meet him in my lonely rambles, or whether he dwells only in my memory. Sometimes the recollection of our boyish sports comes back to us after manhood, and one who has been “addicted” to fishing relapses into his old “ailment;” then angling becomes a pleasant kind of disease, and one’s friends are apt to become inoculated with the virus, for it is contagious. Or men are informally introduced to each other on the stream, by a good-humored salutation, or an inquiry of “ What luck?” or a display of the catch, or the offer of a segar, or the flask, or a new fly; and with such introduction have become fast friends, from that affinity which draws all true anglers together. But let me ask what is an angler, and who is a érue angler? One who fishes with nets is not, neither is he who spears, snares, or dastardly uses the crazy bait to get fish, or who catches them on set lines; nor is he who is boisterous, noisy, or quarrelsome; nor are those who profess to practise the higher branches of the art, and affect contempt for their more humble brethren, who have not attained to their proficiency, imbued with the feeling that should possess the true angler. Nor is he who brings his ice-chest from town, and fishes all day with worm or fly, that he may return to the city and boastingly distribute his soaked and tasteless trout among his friends, and brag of the numbers he has basketed, from fingerlings upwards. * Anglers may be divided into almost as many genera and species as the fish they catch, and engage in the sport from as many impulses. Let me give, “en passant,” a sketch of a few of the many I have met with. 30 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. There is the Fussy Angler, a great bore; of course you will shun him. The “Snob” Angler, who speaks confidently and knowingly on a slight capital of skill or experience. The Greedy, Pushing Angler, who rushes ahead and half fishes the water, leaving those who follow, in doubt as to whether he has fished a pool or rift carefully, or slurred it ove~ in his haste to reach some well-known place down the stream before his companions. The company of these, the quiet, careful angler will avoid. We also meet sometimes with the “Spick-and-Span” Angler, who has a highly varnished rod, and a superabundance of useless tackle; his outfit is of the most elaborate kind as regards its finish. He is a dapper “well got up” angler in all his appointments, and fishes much in-doors over his claret and poteen, when he has a good listener. He frequently displays bad taste in his tackle, intended for fly-fishing, by having a thirty dollar multiplying reel, filled with one of Conroy’s very best relaid sea-grass lines, strong enough to hold a dolphin, If you meet him on the teeming waters of northern New York, the evening’s display of his catch, depends much on the rough skill of his guide. The Rough-and-Ready Angler, the opposite of the afore- named, disdains all ‘‘tomfoolery,” and carries his tackle in an old shot-bag, and his flies in a tangled mass. We have also the Literary Angler, who reads Walton and admires him hugely; he has been inoculated with the sentiment only; the five-mnile walk up the creek, where it has not been fished much,'is very fatiguing to him; he “did not know he must wade the stream,” and does not until he slips in, and then he has some trouble at night to get his boots off. He is provided with a stout bass rod, good strong leaders of salmon-gut, and a stock of Conroy’s “journal flies,” and ANGLING, 31 wonders if he had not better put on a shot just above his stretcher-fly. The Pretentious Angler, to use a favorite expression of the lamented Dickey Riker, once Recorder of the city of New York, is one “that prevails to a great extent in this com- munity.” This gentleman has many of the qualities attri- buted by Fisher, of the ‘‘ Angler’s Souvenir,” to Sir Humphrey Davy. If he has attained the higher branches of the art, he affects to despise all sport which he considers less scientific; if a salmon fisher, he calls trout “vermin;” if he is a trout fly-fisher, he professes contempt for bait fishing. We have talked with true anglers who were even disposed to censure the eminent Divine, who has so ably, and with such labor of love, edited our American edition of Walton, for affectation, in saying of the red worm, “our hands have long since been washed of the dirty things.” The servant should not be above his master, and certainly ‘Iz. Wa.,” whose disciple the Doctor professed to be, considered it no indignity to use them, nor was he disgusted with his “horn of gentles.” But the Doctor was certainly right in deprecating the use of ground bait in reference to trout, when the angler can with a little faith and less greed soon learn the use of the fly. The Shad-roe Fisherman.—The habitat of this genus (and they are rarely found elsewhere) is Philadelphia. There are many persons of the aforesaid city, who fish only when this bait can be had, and an idea seems to possess them that fish will bite at no other. This fraternity could have been found some years back, singly or in pairs, or little coteries of three or four, on any sun-shiny day from Easter to Whitsuntide, heaving their heavy dipsies and horsehair snoods from the - ends of the piers, or from canal-boats laid up in ordinary—the old floating bridge at Gray’s Ferry was a favorite resort for 32 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. them. Sometimes the party was convivial, and provided with a junk bottle of what they believed to be old rye. Before the gas-works had destroyed the fishing in the Schuylkill, I frequently observed a solitary individual of this species, wending his way to the river on Sunday mornings, with a long reed-pole on his shoulder, and in his hand a tin kettle of shad-roe; and his “ prog,” consisting of hard-boiled eggs and crackers and cheese, tied up in a cotton bandana handkerchief. Towards nightfall “he might have been seen” (as James the novelist says of the horseman), trudging home- ward with a string of Pan Rock and White Perch, or “ Catties” and Eels, his trowsers and coat sleeves well plastered with his unctuous bait, suggesting the idea of what, in vulgar parlance, might be called ‘‘a very nasty man.” But let us not turn up our scientific noses at this humble brother ; nor let the home missionary or tract distributor rate him too severely, if he should meet with him in his Sunday walks; for who can tell what a quiet day of consolation it has been to him; he has found relief from the toils and cares of the week, and perhaps from the ceaseless tongue of his shrewish “old woman.” If his sport has been good, he follows it up the next day, and keeps “blue Monday.” We have seen some very respectable gentlemen in our day engaged in fishing with shad-roe at Fairmount Dam. The bar even had its representative, in one of our first ‘criminal court lawyers. He did not ‘dress the character” with as much discrimination as when he lectured on Shakspeare, for he always wore his blue coat with gilt buttons: he did not appear to be a successful angler. “Per contra” to this was a wealthy retired merchant, who used to astonish us with his knack of keeping this difficult bait on his hooks, and his skill in hooking little White Perch. Many a troller has seen him sitting bolt upright in the bow of his boat on a cool morning ANGLING. 33 in May, with his overcoat buttoned up to his chin, his jolly spouse in the stern, and his servant amidship, baiting the hooks and taking off the lady’s fish. The son also was an adept as well as the sire. Woe to the perch fisher, with his bait of little silvery eels, if these occupied the lower part of the swim, for the fish were all arrested by the stray ova that floated off from the “gobs” of shad-roe. As we love contrasts, let us here make a slight allusion ‘to that sensible “old English gentleman,” the Admiral, who surveyed the north-west coast of America, to see, if in the contingency of the Yankees adhering to their claim of “ fifty- four forty,” the country about Vancouver's Island was worth contending for. He was an ardent angler, and it is reported, that on leaving his ship he provided stores for a week, which comprised of course not a few drinkables, as well as salmon rods and other tackle, and started in his boats to explore the rivers and tributaries, which, so goes the story, were so crammed in many places with salmon, that they could be captured with a boat-hook; and still with all the variety of salmon flies and the piscatory skill of the admiral and his officers, not a fish could be induced to rise at the fly. He returned to his ship disheartened and disgusted, averring that the country was not worth contending for; that the Yankees might have it and be ; but it would be inde- corous to record the admiral’s mild expletive. The True Angler is thoroughly imbued with the spirit of gentle old Izaak. He has no affectation, and when a fly-cast is not to be had, can find amusement in catching Sunfish or Roach, and does not despise the sport of any humbler brother of the angle. With him, fishing is a recreation, and a “calmer of unquiet thoughts.” He never quarrels with his luck, knowing that satiety dulls one’s appreciation of sport as much as want of success, but is ever content when he has 3 5; 84 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. done his best, and looks hopefully forward to a more pro- pitious day. Whether from boat or rocky shore, or along the sedgy bank of the creek, or the stony margin of the mountain brook, he deems it an achievement to take fish when they are difficult to catch, and his satisfaction is in proportion. If he is lazy, or a superannuated angler, he can even endure a few days’ trolling on an inland lake, and smokes his cigar, chats with the boatman, and takes an occasional “nip,” as he is rowed along the wooded shore and amongst the beautiful islands. A true angler is generally a modest man; unobtrusively communicative when he can impart a new idea; and is ever ready to let a pretentious tyro have his say, and good- naturedly (as if merely suggesting how it should be done) repairs his tackle, or gets him out of a scrape. He is moderately provided with all tackle and “fixins” necessary to the fishing he is in pursuit of. Is quietly self-reliant and equal to almost any emergency, from splicing his rod or tying his own flies, to trudging ten miles across a rough country with his luggage on his back. His enjoyment con- sists not only in the taking of fish: he draws much pleasure from the soothing influence and delightful accompaniments of the art. With happy memories of the past summer, he joins to- gether the three pieces of his fly-rod at home, when the scenes of the last season’s sport are wrapped in snow and ice, and renews the glad feelings of long summer days. With what interest he notes the swelling of the buds on the maples, or the advent of the blue-bird and robin, and looks forward to the day when he is to try another cast! and, when it comes at last, with what pleasing anticipations he packs up his “traps,” and leaves his business cares and the noisy city behind, and after a few hours’ or few days’ travel in the cars, ANGLING. 35 and a few miles in a rough wagon, or a vigorous tramp over rugged hills or along the road that leads up the banks of the river, he arrives at his quarters! He is now in the region of fresh butter and mealy potatoes—there are always good potatoes in a mountainous trout country. How pleasingly rough everything looks after leaving the prim city! How pure and wholesome the air! How beautiful the clumps of sugar-maples and the veteran hemlocks jutting out over the stream; the laurel; the ivy; the moss-covered rocks; the lengthening shadows of evening! How musical the old familiar tinkling of the cow-bell and the cry of the whip-poor- will! How sweetly he is lulled to sleep as he hears “The waters leap and gush O’er channelled rock, and broken bush !”’ Next morning, after a hearty breakfast of mashed potatoes, ham and eggs, and butter from the cream of the cow that browses in the woods, he is off, three miles up the creek, a cigar or his pipe in his mouth, his creel at his side, and his rod over his shoulder, chatting with his chum as he goes; , free, joyous, happy; at peace with his Maker, with himself, and all mankind; he should be grateful for this much, even if he catches no fish. How exhilarating the music of the stream! how invigorating its waters, causing a consciousness of manly vigor, as he wades sturdily with the strong current and casts his flies before him! When his zeal abates, and a few of the speckled lie in the bottom of his creel, he is not less interested in the wild flowers on the bank, or the scathed old hemlock on the cliff above, with its hawk’s nest, the lady of the house likely inside, and the male proprietor perched high ahove on its dead top, and he breaks forth lustily—the scene suggesting the song— ‘The bee’s on its wing, and the hawk on its nest, And the river runs merrily by.” 86 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. When moon comes on, and the trout rise lazily or merely nip, he halts ‘sub tegmine fagi,” or under the shadow of the dark sugar-maple to build a fire and roast trout for bis dinner, and wiles away three hours or so. He dines sumptu- ously, straightens and dries his leader and the gut of his dropper, and repairs all breakage. He smokes leisurely, or even takes a nap on the green sward or velvety moss, and resumes his sport when the sun has declined enough to shade at least one side of the stream, and pleasantly anticipates the late evening cast on the still waters far down the creek. God be with you, gentle angler, if actuated with the feéling of our old master! whether you are a top fisher or a bottom fisher; whether your bait be gentles, brandling, grub, or red worm; crab, shrimp, or minnow; caddis, grasshopper, or the feathery counterfeit of the ephemera. May your thoughts be always peaceful, and your heart filled with gratitude to Him who made the country and the rivers; and “may the east wind never blow when you go a fishing !” CHAPTER II. GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. “In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the word was God. * * * All things were made by him; and without him was not any thing made that was made.” CHAPTER IL. GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. Definition.—Origin and order in creation.—Natural mode of propagation.— Habits as regards maternity.—Migration.—Vitality.—Exterral or- gans.—Internal organization.—Ichthyology. A Fisu, according to the definition of naturalists, is a vertebrate animal with red blood, breathing through water by means of branchiz, generally called gills. The term fish is frequently applied by unscientific persons, to animals not of the ichthyic class, as in the case of the Whale, which is a true mammal, but resembling the fish in many respects, although its tail is placed horizontally instead of in an upright position. Crustacea and Molluscs (Crabs, Lobsters, Oysters, Clams, and Muscles), are also erroneously called “ shell-fish.” In the records of Creation, as shown by Paleontologists, the remains of the earliest fishes appear in the upper Silurian system, immediately beneath the Old Red Sandstone. They were the first vertebrate animals, and were cotemporaneous with the earliest terrestrial vegetation. These fish were all of one order, and are termed Placoids by Professor Agassiz. They had internal cartilaginous frames, and an external armature of plates, spines, and shagreen points. This order has representatives at the present day, in the Sharks and Dog- fish of our salt-water bays and inlets. Some of the ancient Sharks had a mouth terminal at the snout, and not under- neath as our man-eater, and instead of sharp incisors, the (89) 40 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. interior of the mouth and throat was thickly studded with hard, crushing teeth. Next to the Placoidal order, and before they had dimin- ished in number, came the Ganoids, whose covering consisted of a nearly continuous armor of hard bone with an enamelled surface. One of the few representatives of this order, known to us, is the ‘ Lepidasteus” (the Gar-fish of the South and West), whose coat of mail appears to be made of diamond- shaped pieces closely joined with sutures between. Hugh Miller says, “with thé Old Red Sandstone, the Ganoids were ushered upon the scene in amazing abundance, and for untold ages, comprising mayhap, millions of years; the entire Ichthyic class consisted, so far as is yet known, of but these two orders (Placoids and Ganoids). During the time of the Old Red Sandstone, of the Carboniferous, of the Permean, of the Triassic, and of the Oolitic systems, all fishes apparently as numerous as they now are, were comprised in the Ganoidal and Placoidal orders. At length during the ages of the Chalk, the Cycloids and Ctenoids were ushered in, and gradually developed in Creation until the human period, in which time they seem to have reached their culminating point, and now many times exceed in number all other fishes.” The “ Ctenoids,” here mentioned by Miller, as the third in order of Creation, is one of the four orders erected by Agassiz, and comprise all of those fishes, the free edges of whose scales are serrated or pectinated like the teeth of a comb. To this order belong the whole family of Perch, and other families which have sharp spinous dorsal fins. Amongst the Cycloids, are contained all those whose scales have smooth continuous margins; these are generally or entirely soft- finned fish, as the salmon, shad, herring, carp, chub, &c. In describing the fishes of the earlier periods, Hugh Miller ; GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 41 continues in his earnest manner: “The dynasty of the Ganoids was at one time co-extensive with every river, lake, and sea; and endured during the unreckoned eons, which extended from the time of the lower Old Red Sandstone until those of the Chalk. I may here mention, that as there are orders of plants, such as the Rosacw, and the grasses, that scarce preceded man in their appearance; so there are families of fishes that seem to belong peculiarly to the human period. * * * * * The delicate Salmonide and Pleuronectide families to which the Salmon and Turbot belong, were ushered into being as early as the times of the Chalk; but the Gadide or Cod Family did not precede man by at least any time appreciable to the geologist.” We might follow Miller further in his remarks, and might show the reptilian and ichthyic characteristics in the same animal; a fish apparently approaching the reptile, and the reptile the fish. We do not intend here to go into a lengthy or scientific description of the roe as it exists in the female; its ejection and impregnation by the milt of the male; its progress in incubation, and the production and growth of the young ; but refer the reader to our article on Pisciculture, for all essential information on so interesting a subject. All observing anglers know that the roe is contained in two sacks; this, as well as the milt of the male, is gradually formed and developed as the fish arrives at the age of puberty, and the same rule of formation, and growth of the roe or milt, is repeated in the same individual after it recu- perates from the exhausting effects of spawning. Fish of the genus Salmo, which includes our Brook Trout, are amongst the few that spawn in autumn. The ova of these require water highly aerated, much oxygen being needed in the incubation. These select the gentle current of the streams, but if this is not accessible, as is the case in 42 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. sluggish trout rivers and lakelets, they find some pool with gravelly bottom where a cool spring enters. They generally spawn in pairs or communities. After preparing the bed, by displacing the gravel with their noses, and excavating an oblong furrow of a few inches in depth, the female deposits her spawn in the trench, and the male ejects his milt over it, when fecundation ensues and the gravel is replaced. Another furrow is then made; the spawn and milt cast; the ova covered over as before; and the process repeated until the roe and milt are exhausted. The time required for hatching out the spawn, is various with the different orders and families. In the same genera, or even in the same species, the time may vary. Much de- pends on climate and the temperature of the water; the warmer streams hatching out the eggs before those of a lower temperature. The spawn of the Trout, which is deposited from the middle of September to the first of November, produces the young from the first of December to the first of March, and in artificial ponds, if protected from the cold winds, the young fish are produced sooner, and grow faster than in streams of the forest. I have seen young Trout taken below an artificial pond, near Philadelphia, two inches long, in the latter part of April. Fish that spawn in still water generally deposit their ova on plants, which give out sufficient oxygen to promote fecun- dation. It is seldom that the young of any fish are taken by the angler during the first summer, as they avoid the waters where he finds his sport, and seek smaller streams, and shallower water, to escape the larger predatory fish; the fact of their being of the same species as the destroyer, is no pro- tection to the small fry. It is unnecessary to go into an account of the mode of pro- GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 43 duction of viviparous fish, the Shark, for instance, and others that produce their young alive, as they are of little interest to the angler, as far as sport is concerned. Naturalists who confine themselves closely to in-door studies, sometimes adopt general rules and construct theories, to which observers of less scientific knowledge, but with more frequent opportunities for observation, find many exceptions. One would conclude from the writings of ichthyologists, that fish always desert their ova after fecundation, and, with slight precaution against enemies or accident, leave them to their fate; never caring for, or protecting their ova. It is true that many families, including the Salmonide, are reck- lessly improvident of their fecundated spawn; male Trout have been found with their stomachs full of the roe of their asso- ciates on the same spawning-bed. But to the rule which in- door naturalists suppose to be general, there are many excep- tions; some of them interesting cases of provident care in the protection of the impregnated spawn, and even of maternal solicitude for their young. We might instance that of the little Sunfish, which spawns in the month of June, around the gravelly shores of mill-ponds, removing the pebbles and twigs to the margin of its bed, which is frequently two or three feet in diameter, piling them up a few inches as a ram- part to its fortress, driving off all intruders, and keeping watch and ward until the young are hatched. The little Red Fin, which spawns in communities, is frequently observed by the trout fisher constructing its mound of pebbles with skill and care. Scores or hundreds of them may be seen work- ing together assiduvusly, piling up alternate layers of gravel and impregnated spawn, until the top of the heap is some- times twelve or fifteen inches high, and its base three or four feet in diameter, leaving it a mass teeming with embryo life. The common Catfish of our mill-nonds and ditches mav fre- 44 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. quently be seen with her family around her, protecting and seeking feeding grounds for her dusky progeny. The Stickle- back builds a nest, mounts guard, and pugnaciously warns off all intruders of like, or even larger size. All fish, in spawning, instinctively seek water containing more or less atmospheric air; Carp, and other Cyprinide requiring less for the vivification of their eggs than other fresh-water species. Griffith, in his Animal Kingdom, says some of the Pelagian genera spawn amongst floating grass and sea-weed, and says that broad bands of fish-spawn have been seen south of the equator, producing mile-long patches of unruffled surface. I doubt whether this can be so; if true, such instances are rare exceptions to the general rule of spawning on the bottom. The family of Gaddide, which includes Codfish, it is sup- posed spawn in deep water, though this cannot be at any con- siderable distance beneath the surface, as the solar light, which is necessary to the hatching of the ova, does not penetrate many fathoms. The knowledge attainable respecting the haunts, habits and breeding of Pelagian fish is necessarily limited. Oviparous animals are the most prolific, and of these, fish excel all others. A full-grown Carp is said to produce from one hundred thousand to two hundred thousand eggs, a Perch thirty thousand, a Pike from thirty to eighty thousand, and a Codfish a half a million. It is said that a single pair of Herrings, if allowed to reproduce undisturbed and multiply for twenty years, would not only supply the whole world with abundance of food, but would become inconveniently numerous, The average number of ova in a Salmon is stated at twelve thousand; if it were possible that all these eggs produced fish, and they arrived at maturity, there would be twelve thousand Salmon, or six thousand pairs, whose produce, at the same GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 45 rate, would be seventy-two millions. At an average of ten pounds, these fish, of the third generation, would weigh seven ‘hundred and twenty million pounds, or enough to load three hundred and twenty-two ships, of a thousand tons each. Some fish produce large ova, covered with horny shells. Some few, including the true shark, are viviparous, producing their young alive; the eggs, of course, being fecundated in the abdomen; but with all fish which contribute to the sport, of the angler, the female casts her roe, which is impregnated by the milt of the male being cast over it. There are no hermaphrodites amongst fish, as has been supposed by some ichthyologists, who cite the Lamprey as one. It has been satisfactorily ascertained, that amongst all the vertebrates, on land or in the water, there are no such ex- ceptions. There are immutable laws in God’s providence, which compel the migration of fish as well as of birds. Some species are anadromous, as the Salmon, Sea Trout, Smelt, Shad, and River Herring; these change their habitation annually from the sea to fresh rivers, which they ascend for the purpose of spawning; most of them with wonderful instinct returning, if there be no obstructions, to their native streams, and in their course supply us with food, when in their greatest physical perfection. After propagation, in meagre, lank condition, they seek the sea again, where, from the abundance and great nutritive quality of their food, they recuperate and grow rapidly. The young fry that go seaward diminutive in size, return the following spring or summer adult fish, perfect in their powers of reproduction. Some of the species common to the long rivers and great lakes of our interior, also change their abodes, traversing perhaps as great an extent of water as the Shad and Salmon, though not for the purpose of spawning. 46 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. That law of nature, though, which impels the migration of some genera to distant waters of the ocean is most wonderful. Many Herring and Codfish come to us from the Arctic seas, the former are the surplus production of that great storehouse thrown off, never to return; furnishing in their distant jour- ney, food to the barbarians of the coast, and wealth and occu- pation to vast numbers of civilized men; and their yearly advent is looked for, and depended upon, with as much confi- dence as the return of summer. The Scombride, embracing the different species of Mack- erel, come to our latitudes from the south; their natal shores and waters unknown; they come all of them adult fish, fur- nishing food and employment to thousands, as well as a great maritime school for seamen; it is most likely that most of these also never return to the regions from which they mi- grated. Many fish which are bred in the Gulf of Mexico, and the bays and inlets of our southern coast, arrive in our waters mature fish, and are found all summer in our markets. Amongst these are the splendid Spanish Mackerel, the Sheepshead, Croaker, Barb, Spot, and Mullet. These we may reasonably set down as the surplus production of the waters where they breed, and probably never return from their long northern journey. They are not known to us before the age of puberty, whil., their young are found in great shoals in the shallows of the Gulf of Mexico and our southern bays. The Sheepshead, in the New Orleans and Mobile markets, are most of them pan-fish, from a half-pound to a pound and a half in weight, while they are seldom found in this latitude below four or five pounds. From any point of the southern coast which approaches the Gulf Stream, fish, by coming up with its current, would be sensible of little or no change of temperature. One cause of the migration of southern fish GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 47 may be attributed to the sea-weed which comes northward with the Gulf Stream; floating on its surface, and amongst, and in it, are found small Crustacea, minute Mollusca, gelati- nous animals, and the small fry, which many species follow to feed upon. It was supposed at one time that Shad and Herring, which enter our rivers for the purpose of spawning, migrated from the south, where it was thought they hibernated. Such sup- position was based upon the fact that these fish are found at an earlier period of the season in the bays and rivers of a more southern latitude on our coast. But it is now thought, with much greater show of reason, that they enter those waters earlier only because the season for spawning there, precedes that of our more northern rivers, and that these fish, as well as Salmon, do not wander any considerable distance from the mouths of rivers and bays from which they migrated the preceding summer or autumn. We should not omit, in these general remarks, to mention the peculiar powers given to some fish of existing for a time out of their natural element, and retaining their vitality when animation is apparently suspended; and also the wonderful vitality of the impregnated spawn. It is well known by many of our city anglers, that the little Roach, which is taken in winter, and thrown upon the ice or snow, even if it is entirely frozen, will become quite lively if placed in hydrant water of ordinary temperature; this is also said to be the case with the Trout, which, if transported in winter when frozen, will swim about, if placed in spring water. It is said, however, that fish once frozen, lose their sight; the delicate organization of the eye being destroyed by its liquids having been congealed; if this be a fact, it may prevent their breeding, on being transferred to other waters, in such condition. 48 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. When the temperature of the air is below sixty-five, it is very easy to wrap a Roach or Chub of six inches long, in a wet handkerchief, and bring it home alive. White Perch, Labraz pallidus, taken towards sundown in cool weather, if placed carefully in a basket, will live more than an hour, and be as lively in a few minutes in a tub of hydrant water as in the river. A. friend assured me that once, when a boy, during a driz- aling rain, he got up into a cherry tree, and in order to keep his string of Catfish, which he had lately caught, from the depredations of some hogs beneath, he took them up also, while he got his fill of cherries, and that he forgot his fish in his hurried departure, but found on going back for them the same afternoon, that they were nearly all alive, and evinced it by flapping their tails. Here was an instance of fish living out of water with a switch thrust through one of their gills. It is stated on good authority, that in Germany, Carp are even kept in a basket or net in a damp cellar, through winter, with the snout protruding through wet moss, and fed with crumbs of bread, and fattened after the manner of cramming poultry. In China, the spawn of fish is a regular article of traffic, and is exported from one part of the country to another, after being impregnated with the milt. It is an established fact, that on draining Carp ponds in Germany, to cultivate the soil, which had been flooded and made a fish-pond of, for the purpose of enriching it, that the spawn of the Carp, left after drawing off the water, does not lose its vitality, though exposed for two or three years to the heat of summer and frost of winter; and that, when the field is-again converted into a pond, there is no necessity for restocking it with Carp, but the ova remaining beneath the GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 49 surface of the ground produces a stock of Carp; thus keeping up an alternation of crops—fish and vegetables. The ability of a fish to retain its vitality out of water, depends in a great degree on keeping the delicate tissue of its gills wet. For this reason, a few of them have a peculiar construction in the head, in which water is retained after leaving a river or lake; the gills being kept wet by percola- tion from this reservoir. Such fish sometimes have also the power of using the lower fins as feet or legs, and are enabled, by these two singular gifts of nature, to pass over land from one body of water to another. Incredible as it may appear, it is even said, that in India, there is a species of fish that by an extraordinary use of its fins can climb trees. A friend, who is curious on such subjects, has handed me the following account of those that travel over land; it was clipped from one of our daily papers. “Sir Emmerson Tennant’s account of fishes walking across the country, has excited much astonishment and no little incredulity in England. The following passage from the Penang Gazette, is singularly corroborative of that gentleman’s statement :— “‘A correspondent in Province Wellesley informs us that while passing along during a shower of rain, the wide sandy plain which bounds the sea-coast in the neighborhood of Panaga, he witnessed a singular overland migration of Ikan Puyu (a fish much resembling the Tench in size, form, and color), from a chain of fresh-water lagoons lying immediately within the sea-beach, toward the second chain of lagoons, about a hundred yards distant inland. The fish were in groups of from three to seven, and were pursuing their way in a direct line towards a second chain of lagoons, at the rate of nearly a mile an hour. When disturbed they turned round and endea- vored to make their way back to the lagoon they had left, and 4 50 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. would very soon have reached it, had they not been secured by the Malays who accompanied our correspondent, and whe looked upon the migration as an ordinary occurrence at this season of the year. Upwards of twenty were thus taken during a walk of about half a mile, and no doubt many more could have been obtained had the Malays been allowed a little delay. The ground these fish were traversing was nearly level, and only scantily clothed with grass and creeping salolaceous plants, which offered very slight obstruction to their progress. This singular habit will account for the rapidity with which the paddy fields in Province Wellesley become stocked with fish when they are flooded by the rains. The lagoons from which they come contain water throughout the year, while those toward which they are going are mere hollows, filled by the late rains.’” Although digestion in fish is rapid, they are capable of living longer without food than land vertebrates, and appa- rently suffer little from an abstinence of many days. Fish of quick growth digest food rapidly. It is said that a Pike will digest a fish of one-fourth its length in forty minutes. If this be so, it sufficiently accounts for the circumstance of this and other predatory species being found so often without food in their stomachs, and little or nothing in their intestines. It is yet a mystery, how Shad fatten and increase in flavor after their appearance in fresh water; no food ever having been detected in their stomachs after leaving salt water. The same emptiness of stomach is also common to the Salmon when taken in fresh water: this peculiarity appears to prevail with anadromous fish. The several species of the genus Coregonus (Whitefish) of our northern lakes, are also said to be found generally with empty stomachs. There is a theory adopted by many, that such fish as the last mentioned, as well as the Shad, live GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 61 on the animalcule retained in the passage of the water through their gills. Shad caught in the salt water of the Chesapeake Bay and brought to this city, have been found with small fish in their stomachs, but they were of species known only in salt water. All fish are more or less omnivorous. I have opened Rock- fish, which are known to be predatory in their habits, and found the tender shoots and stalks of aquatic grasses in the throat and pouch. The fish which furnish sport to the angler, have generally eight fins; two pectorals, two ventrals, one anal, two dorsals, and one caudal. The pectorals, as the term implies, are the breast fins, and project from the humeral bones; they are homologous to the arms in man, or the fore legs of quadrupeds. The ventrals, named from being attached to the belly, in most spine-rayed fish, are immediately or nearly under the pectorals; in soft- finned fish, about midway between the head and tail. The anal is immediately behind the vent; the dorsals on the back; and the caudal, which is generally called the tail, is the hindmost fin. This last fin is the chief motor; it is used as an oar in sculling, and acts also as a rudder: the dorsals and anal preserve the equilibrium, or, in nautical phrase, keep the fish on an “even keel.” The ventrals are used principally in rising, and the pectorals in backing, and keep- ing the fish stationary; when they are used alternately, and not simultaneously, as any other pair of fins. The eye of the fish has no lids, as land animals have, but a very thin transparent membrane drawn over it, which does not give it the power of excluding the light; hence the eyes are always open, whether awake or asleep—if a fish can be said to sleep. By the prominence of its eyes it is able to direct its sight, somewhat backward and downward, as well D2 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. as forward and upward. The iris is capable of no contraction or expansion, and in order to avoid an objectionable degree of light, it seeks greater depths, or the shady banks of the stream. As the fish may be said to have no neck, its head being set immovably on its shoulders and spine, it is neces- sary to change the position of its whole body, in order to obtain much variety in the direction of its vision. The nostrils are situated between the eyes and the snout they are double, and not constructed in such manner as to allow the water to pass through them in breathing, that func- tion being performed entirely by the gills. Notwithstanding this, smell appears to be the most acute of all the senses in fish, and one which contributes much to procuring their food. The gill-covers, in the generality of fish, are divided into four parts: the preopercle, the opercle, or gill-cover proper, the subopercle, and the interopercle. The opercles are in- tended as a protection to the delicate organization of the gills and branchiostegous rays, and open and close as the water passes through them. That brilliant substance which imparts a metallic lustre of so many hues to fish, is secreted in the dermis or skin, beneath the scales; the scales themselves are transparent, and are formed of a horny substance, though, in some families, the outer covering is of a bony substance, and frequently covered with an enamel. The “lateral line,” is a series of perforated scales, which extend in most fish from the gill- cover to the root of the tail. The gills consist of series of leaflets, suspended to certain arches, termed “Os hyodes;” each leaflet is covered with a tissue of innumerable blood-vessels. The water which enters the mouth escapes through the gills posteriorly, and the air contained in the water acts on the blood, which is constantly impelled through the gills from the heart. The venous blood, GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 53 after being changed into arterial, by its contact with the air in its passage through the gills, passes into the arterial trunk, situated under the spine, and is dispersed by diminishing blood-vessels, through the body, whence it returns by the veins to the heart. As Fish breathe through the intervention of water alone, and restore to their blood its arterial qualities, by means of the oxygen which is suspended in the water, their blood is naturally cold, often below the temperature of the water they inhabit. Immediately under the back bone is the air-bladder, divided into two lobes or parts, which, by expansion or compression, enables the fish to change its specific gravity, and maintain any desired elevation in the water. In con- nection with the gills, the air-bladder is homologous to the lungs in land animals. There is no outward" ear in fishes; internally there is a sack representing the vestibule, filled with gelatinous fluid. By frequent experiments, Mr. Ronalds, the author of “The Fly-Fisher’s Entymology,” ascertained that trout are not dis- turbed by frequent and heavy discharges of firearms, if the flash of the gun is concealed, and justly holds in derision, the notion, that fish are frightened by persons talking on a stream. They are more easily startled by the sudden jar of a heavy tramp on an overhanging bank, or a thump on the bottom of a boat; the vibration from either of these causes, acting on the nerves generally, rather than on the ear of the fish, There are instances recorded, however, where fish have been called by the ringing of a bell, or a familiar voice. There are no organs of voice in fish; though some,—as the Weakfish, Croaker, Catfish, and Drum, make a croaking noise when taken from the water, but these sounds are en- tirely guttural. The sense of taste is necessarily deficient, or wholly want- 54 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. ing; the tongues of some species are nothing more than hard cartilage, in others the tongue is armed with teeth. None have the salivary glands to lubricate the parts with the moisture necessary to the sensation of taste. The sense of feeling is confined almost entirely to the nose ; most fish being covered with scales, which are of a horny or bony substance, with as little sensation as a man’s finger-nails. In some, as the southern Garfish, the scales are enamelled, and it is said, resist a bullet if not fired point blank. The Catfish, and also the Barb (a species of Umbrina) have barbels or cirri, by which they appear to detect the nature of substances and whether they be food or not. These organs of touch, as they may be termed, are provided by nature to assist them in their nocturnal search, or groping in deep water for food. Yarrell, in his work on the Fishes of Great Britain, says: “There are external openings to each nostril, surrounded by several orifices, which allow the escape of a mucous secretion. These apertures are larger and more numerous about the heads of fishes generally, than over the other parts; the viscous secretion defending the skin from the action of the water. Whether the fish inhabits stream or lake, the current of the water in one instance, or progression through it in the other, carries this defensive secretion backwards, and diffuses it over the whole body. In fishes with small scaJes, this secretion is in proportion more abundant.” The latter part of the above quotation sufficiently explains the presence of a large supply of this mucous secretion on Trout and Catfish, and the increased quantity of slime on Eels. Teeth, with which fish are generally well supplied, are not not only serviceable in seizing their prey, but by their peculiar position and form assist them in swallowing it, Teeth are found in many genera on the maxillaries, inter- maxillaries, palatine, vomer, and tongue; sometimes also on sb ENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 55 the arches of the gills, as in the Pike; but only on the pha- ryngeal bone of the Chub—apparently backing the assertion of the little boy, who said it had “swallowed its teeth.” Teeth are of some importance to the naturalist, in deter- mining genera and species. The observing angler will know from them, the habits of fish, whether they are predatory, or live on vegetable substances, or by crushing molluscs and crustacea. Fish shed their teeth, the new coming up beneath the old and displacing them, or the new tooth appears at the side, pushing out the old one and occupying its place. The fish being so different in its structure and internal organization from land vertebrates, and inhabiting a cold, dense element, must necessarily differ also in its emotional nature. It is coldly obtuse in its sexual emotions, and in its cares or joys of maternity ; noe feeling of friendship attaches it to a higher being, as with the dog. With blunted sense of hear- ing and voiceless, no call of mate attracts it, or draws forth response, as in the bird. And in the dense medium through which it looks, no object delights its lidless eye. Reproducing its species, or migrating in obedience to a law of its nature, it appears with many families, as if condemned to roam the wastes of ocean, or lie torpidly in silent depths, until storm or hunger or enemy incites it to activity. Yet this class of animals, so cold, so dull in its sensations; is one of the most beautiful and wonderful of the Almighty’s _ creations—nothing exceeds it in its symmetrical propor- tions; no form so well adapted for motion through the element it inhabits; no organs of motion so well contrived -for imparting rapid and easy progress as its fins; no bur- nished or molten silver, or gold, more brilliant than the varied reflections of its sides; no armor so light, or so well adapted to “its wearer, as its lustrous scales. It will always 56 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. remain an object of interest to man, from its beauty, the strangeness of its habits, the mystery of its haunts, and its trackless wanderings. IcHTHYOLOGY.—To the angler, this is the most interesting of the natural sciences. It received little attention until the time of Linnzus. Afterwards Cuvier, by a more natural and judicious classification, divided the Ichthyic class into Orders, Families, Genera, and Species, which has been adopted in the main, by all ichthyologists who have succeeded him. Of the four orders established by Professor Agassiz, already mentioned in reference to paleontology; the two last, Ctenoids and Cycloids only, come properly within the scope of the angler’s ichthyology. The Ctenoids are those whose scales are pectinated on the edges; these comprise all the Acanthoptherygii, which em. brace the Perch family; and a few of the Malacopterygii. The Cycloids have scales with a continuous margin, and include most of the Malacopterygii, or at least those with which the angler has to do. The term “ Acanthopterygii” is derived from the Greek words, acantha, a thorn, and pterrugion, a little feather. “Malacopterygii” has its origin in the Greek word malacos, soft. The wood-cut on the next page is introduced to elucidate the difference between these two divisions, and to explain at the same time the position of the different fins, and their scientific names. The upper figure represents the outline of a Trout, one of the Malacopterygii; the lower, that of our White Perch, one of the Acanthopterygii. The first fin on the back of either figure is the first dorsal; the second back fin is the second dorsal; the fins just behind the gill-covers are the pectorals ; the ventral fins in the Malacopterygii are about midway on GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 57 the belly; in the Acanthopterygii, they are just below the pectorals, or very near them; the anal fin in both is just behind the anus or vent; the caudal, the hindmost fin, is commonly called the tail. Of fish that come under the notice of the angler, the Mala- copterygii embrace those that are called “abdominal,” from having the ventral-fins on the belly. The Acanthopterygii include the “thoracic,” which have the ventrals near the throat. Some families of the former division have only one dorsal fin, others two, and some even three, as the Codfish. The Acanthopterygii have either one or two dorsals; if only one, the anterior rays are spinous, and the posterior soft and flexible; if they have two dorsals, the first is composed of sharp spines, and the second of rays, or one or two spines followed by soft rays: this division has also one or more spines on the pectorals and on the anal fin. With the excep- tion of the Salmonide and Esocidw, nearly all of the game- fish the angler meets with, belong to the Acanthopterygii. The Acanthopterygii belong to the order of Ctenoids, and the Malacopterygii mostly to the Cycloids. 58 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. The reader will observe the peculiar shape of the second dorsal of the first figure; it is one of the characteristic marks of the Salmonide. No other family the angler meets with, has it except the Stluride (Catfish). This fin is adipose, generally opaque, and without rays—being nothing more than a flexible cartilage. The first figure of the annexed wood-cut represents a front view of the open mouth of one of the species of the Salmon family, and shows the position of the teeth. Those along the centre of the roof of the mouth above 1, are on the vomer; those on the sides above 2, are on the palate; those around 3 are the pharyngeal teeth; those on the edge of the upper jaw, are the upper or super maxillaries; and, those on the edge of the lower jaw, the lower or inferior maxillaries. The second figure of the same plate shows the anatomical structure of the head, including a side view of the teeth. 1 is the preopercle or fore gill-cover; 2, the opercle or gill- cover proper; 38, the subopercle or under gill-cover; 4, the interopercle or intermediate gill-cover; and 5, the branchios- tgous rays, or, as they are more generally termed, the branchial rays. By reference to the foregoing wood-cuts, and reading with some care, scientific descriptions of fish, an angler may be able to describe any species, which may be unknown to him, GENERAL REMARKS ON FISH. 59 with sufficient accuracy, for the naturalist to refer it to its family, genus, and species. Any description of a fish, is of course rendered more intelli- gible by an accompanying sketch, even if it is rudely done. And if the angler will describe, as accurately as he can, the general outline and form; the proportions of the length of the head to that of its body (exclusive of the tail); its breadth, as compared with its length; its color, markings, and the course of the lateral line; the gill-cover and fore gill- cover, whether either or both have scales, and on which they are largest—mentioning also, if the gill-cover has spines on its posterior margin; the number of branchial rays, fin rays, and spines, also the color of the fins; the dental arrangement, and then the general local names: he may contribute much that will be interesting to others, while it will be a source of satisfaction to himself. Linnzus received his description of American fishes from Dr. Gordon, of South Carolina. Bloch, and Schoef (who was a surgeon in the British army, during the American Revolution), as well as Catesby, contributed, though meagrely, to our ichthyology. The descriptions of the latter were mostly of the fish of the Caribbean Sea, and our Southern coast. In 1820, Rafinesque, a French naturalist, published at Lexington, Kentucky, an account of the fishes of the Ohio and its tributaries. His nomenclature, as well as his mode of description and classification, differs from that of Cuvier; his descriptions, generally, are not minute, but some of them are interesting. His work is not illustrated by drawings. Bose gave Lacepede descriptions of some species found in our waters. In 1814, Dr. Mitchil, of New York, entered with some zeal into the work; and, in periodicals, described more species than had been before noticed. In 1836, Dr. Richardson produced his “Fauna Boreali,” 60 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. which includes some of our Northern genera. Dr. Storer, in 1839, published an able report of the fishes of Massachusetts. De Witt Clinton, Mr. Wood, of Philadelphia, Redfield and Haldeman, also contributed to this branch of natural science. It was reserved, however, for Dr. De Kay to give the first elaborate description of American fish, which he did by authority of the state of New York in 1842; his work is illustrated by engravings that are badly colored, and some of them are incorrectly drawn. He enumerates thirty-two fami- lies, one hundred and fifty-six genera, and four hundred and forty species. His description includes the Lacustrine genera, as well as those of the coast of New York. Amongst the latter are many that are emigrants from Southern waters, which fact he fails to note. Dr. Holbrook, of Charleston, has recently published an interesting work on the fishes of South Carolina, which is of much interest to the angler, as it con- tains an account of the habits, as well as scientific descrip- tions of many game-fish, common to this latitude and the Western States. His work is beautifully illustrated with colored engravings. Girard, Gill, and Professor Spencer F. Baird, of the Smithsonian Institute, have recently made valuable additions to American ichthyology. In closing these observations on the natural history of fish, it is proper to remark, that they are those of a mere angler, who aspires to no place «mongst the learned doctors, and who has picked up such information, as he has imparted to the general reader, from the books of the Academy of Natural Sciences, and from his own observations noted here and there, as any fish that takes a bait has interested him. He presents what is here written with the hope of inciting other anglers to a study of the fishes that afford so much pleasure in the taking of them. CHAPTER III. TACKLE IN GENERAL. “Ler me tell you, Scholar, that Diogenes walked on a day, with a friend, to see a country fair ; where he saw ribbons, and looking-glasses, and nut-crackers, and fiddles, and hobby-horses, and many other gim- cracks; and having observed them, and all the other finnimbruns that make a complete country fair; he said to his friend, “‘ Lord, how many things are there in this world of which Diogenes hath no need!” WALTON. CHAPTER III. TACKLE IN GENERAL. Hooks.-—Sinkers.—Swivels.—Gut.— Leaders.—Snoods.—Lines.—Reels.— Rods.—Bow Dipsys. In these observations it would be well to have some set- tled plan or order in which Tackle should be mentioned; I have, therefore, thought it better to commence at the bot- tom and go upwards. Hooxs.—Of the various kind of hooks sold in this country, the Kirby is mostly used. The point of this hook is not in the same plane with the shank, but is bent to one side, - and is therefore less apt to draw from the mouth of the fish without hooking, than the Limerick. There are several varieties .of the Kirby; those made with short shanks and of stout wire (some of which have flattened heads), are most appropriate for fishing with dead bait, or where the fish are large, or their mouths hard. The long-shanked Kirby is to be preferred for live-bait fishing, or where much nicety is required in putting on a worm, brandling, or grasshopper: they are made of fine wire, and the barb not so rank as the Limerick. These are some- times called “Weak Trout Hooks” by tackle venders. Limerick hooks, although preferred by many on account (63) 64 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of their superior temper, are better adapted to tying flies on, than for bait-hooks. The O'Shaughnessy differs materially from the common Limerick, in the shape of the bend, and in the direction of its point, which sets out at a slight angle from the shank; it is much surer of hooking than the old Limerick, and is preferred by all anglers who tie their own flies. Salmon hooks of this shape, some of which are hammered after being bent, are highly esteemed by Salmon fishers. Trout hooks of the O’Shaughnessy shape, are sometimes made of very fine wire, lightness being a desideratum in artificial flies, particularly in droppers. The Limerick hook, as its name implies, as well as the O'Shaughnessy, which bears the name of its original maker, were made first in Limerick, Ireland. They have since been imitated and raade at a much lower price in England, where most of the hooks known by these names are now manufactured; they are not as well tempered, though, as the Irish hooks. The “Sneck bend” is much used by fly-fishers in Scotland, though I have failed to discover its merits. The peculiarity of this hook consists in its bend, which assumes more the form of the three sides of a square than a continuous curve. I have never heard or read of any plausible reason for its shape. The “Virginia hook,” it is said, was first made by a black- smith named Rivere, in the lower part of Virginia, and at one time was held in much esteem by bait fishermen, on account of its strength and supposed adaptability to fish of all sizes. Its peculiarity consists in its shape and the tapering of the steel from the top of the shank to the bend. I have reason for doubts as to the person and place of its invention, TACKLE IN GENERAL. 67 as I have found them common at Mackinaw amongst the old habitans, at an early period of my fishing experience. It is said, that Prince Rupert first taught the art of tem- pering hooks, to a fish-hook maker of London by the name of Kirby, who transmitted the art to his descendants, and his name to the hook now so commonly used. Sir Humphrey Davy and other English anglers in later years, have suc- ceeded in making hooks which did them good service. There are other hooks kept by the tackle stores which we think it unnecessary to describe here; as, double-hooks, eel- hooks, snap-hooks, sockdolagers, &., most of which are not worth the notice of the angler. On the plate of hooks on the opposite page,* the top row represents the O’Shaughnessy. Commencing on the right, the first size is No. 2, and then 4, 6, 8, and 10, in succession towards the left. In the second row, No. 1 is a short-shanked Kirby; No. 2 the old style Limerick ; No. 3 a Sneck bend; No. 4 an Aber- deen. The third is a row of Salmon hooks, the sizes according to the standard adopted by the author of “The Book of the Salmon ;” the largest is No. 4, the next No. 6, the next No. 8, and the smallest No. 10. There are intermediate sizes, as well as three sizes larger than No. 4, viz.: 8, 2,1; but they are seldom, if ever, used on this side of the Atlantic. Nos. 7 and 8 being the principal sizes. Of the lower row, 5 is a “Shanghai,” 6 a long-shanked Kirby, 7 a Virginia hook, and 8 a stout short-shanked Kirby. The two remaining figures are Swivels; the one to the *Tam under obligations to Mr. John Krider (Gun and Tackle Store, corner of Second and Walnut Streets, Philadelphia), for this handsome woodcut of Hooks, which he had prepared expressly for this book. 68 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. right is a “hook” Swivel, and that on the left a “ box” Swivel. SinxeRs.—In bottom or bait fishing, sinkers of various sizes and shapes are used; the weight proportioned to the tide or current. Those in general use are split shot. The sliding- sinker is oblong with a hole running longitudinally through the centre. The advantage of this is, that the bait may drift off with the tide while the sinker is comparatively at rest. The swivel sinker is a combination of sinker and swivel, which allows the snood and bait to revolve; it is seldom used. In bottom fishing or trolling deep, where the bottom is rocky, the sinker is apt to be caught foul. To provide against loss of leader and hooks, in such cases, it is better to have the sinker attached, where the leader joins the line, by a piece of weak gut or thread; so that the angler, if he is obliged to pull away at the risk of losing some of his bottom tackle, may only lose his sinker. Swivels are necessary when the bait is required to spin or revolve. The box-swivel is used by looping the leader or bottom through one ring and the line through the other. When it is necessary to disengage the bait and snood from the leader, as in trolling for Pike, the hook-swivel is convenient, and in many cases indispensable. All bottom fishers and trollers should be well supplied with these useful little articles; steel swivels should be used for fresh-water, and brass swivels for salt-water fishing. Fioats are made of cork, holiow wood, or quills, of a great variety of shapes and sizes. The quill is preferred for Roach, Chub, and other fish that bite delicately. The size of the float should always be regulated by the weight of the sinker; the shape is a matter of fancy. I have whittled shapely floats out of the bark of a pine tree. Gor Leavers, Snoops, Traces, &.—Silk-worm gut, which TACKLE IN GENERAL. 69 forms so important a part of the angler’s outfit, is the sub- stance of the worm in an immature state, and is made by steeping the insect in vinegar or some other acid, a short time before it is ready to commence spinning its cocoon, stretching it to the required length, and securing the ends until the strand is dry. It is then divested of any ex- traneous substance by rubbing. It is imported from China, Spain, and Italy, in hanks of a hundred strands, and sold by all the tackle stores, the price varying according to its size, length, and roundness. A scientific friend informed me once, that he had produced the veritable article, by stretching out the worms after steeping them in vinegar, and securing the "heads and tails in notches made in each end of a shingle. Gut is considered a superfluity by most rustic anglers. Though not always essential, in fine angling it is indispensa- ble. Its strength is astonishing, as every angler knows from experience. It is almost transparent in water, when dyed of a neutral tint. This color is to be preferred to any other, a receipt for dyeing which will be found in another part of this book. Leapers.—Although double gut and twisted gut leaders are recommended, I have found the single, when stout, round, and of the best quality, to answer every demand made on it by the strength of the fish. Single gut is certainly neater, and when it is borne in mind that the spring of the rod, and the judicious use of the reel, contribute so much to lessen the strain on line and leader, one must reasonably conclude, that gut which will bear a strain of five pounds would secure a fish of any size he may be lucky enough to hook. For fly-fishing, the gut lengths of a leader should always be joined by a neat knot; the double knot is preferable. The leaders sold at the tackle stores, generally have the ends of the gut secured with silk lashings, which are liable to fray 70 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. out, and being usually of some bright tint, deceive the fish into rising at one of these frayed lashings for a fly, and indis- pose them to take the cheat you intended for them. On a subsequent page, the reader will find directions for making leaders and tying gut, with descriptions of the knots used by anglers and tackle makers. Leaders, bottoms, and snoods, are made also of horsehair and sometimes of “gimp” (the article of which the coarse strings of violins are made). The latter is used for Pike, Bass, Sheepshead, Bluefish, or where gut is liable to be frayed by coming in contact with sharp rocks, or to be bitten off by the fish. Anglers who have not the skill or patience to tie on their own hooks, purchase them already snooded at the tackle stores. A more economical and convenient way for one who can tie them himself, is to cut up a gut length into pieces of two or three inches—short refuse pieces will answer as well— and forming a short loop, seize it on to the shank of the hook. In leaders for fly-fishing, the gut nearest the line should be stout, each length diminishing in size to the finest that can be procured, where it is tied to the stretcher fly. LinEs are made of flax or plaited silk for bottom-fishing ; flax is preferred when it is necessary to make a long cast, as in Bass or Pike-fishing, as it runs more freely through the rings or guides, and the end of the tip. Plaited silk is to be used invariably for trolling from a boat, as it does not kink in passing through the water, as a twisted line is apt to do. The best lines for fly-fishing are made of silk and hair; they taper gradually from the end which you attach to the axle of the reel, to the end which joins the leader. I would here remark, that in fly-fishing, the usual clumsy loop, or a TACKLE IN GENERAL. 71 knot in the end of a reel-hine should be dispensed with, by seizing on a length of stout gut to the end of the line, to re- main there permanently ; the leader should be attached to this piece of gut with a neat knot. By this contrivance, you avoid the contingency of having fish rise at the loop, as they will at a bit of frayed silk, as mentioned on the preceding page. A bait or trolling line should have a gut-loop seized on the end, which loop is fastened to the leader by a similar loop in¢ts end, as described in our article on tackle-making. Oiled-silk plaited lines are frequently used for trolling, but more generally for Salmon-fishing. REELS.—Many innovations have been made on the old English Reel by American anglers and mechanics; some of these, it is contended, are not improvements. The balance-handle, patent-check, and jewelled bearings of the modern multiplier, are certainly desiderata in reels used for Bass, and are now considered indispensable: by crack fishers; but the simple reel with a click, and without the balance-handle, is to be preferred for fly-fishing; it is less liable than the multiplier to get out of order, and the line is not so apt to be caught by the handle or crank. An im- provement in English Salmon-reels has been lately intro- duced, which precludes the possibility of the latter contin- gency: it is the insertion of a short handle or pin in a disk, revolving parallel to, and against the outer plate; this im- provement is applicable only to simple reels for fly-fishing. The reader will find a wood-cut of one, in a subsequent article on Tackle for Salmon-fishing. Some anglers prefer the multiplier even for fly-fishing, on account of its enabling them to shorten line faster, if a trout on being hooked should run towards them. This seldom happens in wading a brook or creek; but in deep, still waters, 72 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. where the angler fishes from a boat, and large trout endanger his tackle, such a necessity sometimes arises. Whether it be a multiplier or simple reel, in fly-fishing for Trout, it should be small; for a greater length than twenty yards of line is seldom if ever required. By the aid of the balance-handle (an American inven- tion which helps to keep up the momentum when the bait is cast), reels have been made to run with so little friction, that the motion imparted by a whirl of the crank, with the hand, causes the spool to revolve for two minutes. The bearings of the more costly reels are made of jewels. I know of one made by an amateur mechanic, without the jewels, which will run for a minute and a half. Reels of this kind are used mostly by Bass-fishers, who make long casts, when it is desirable that the line should run out as freely as possible. In all reelsa short axle is to be preferred, as it enables one to wind up the line quicker and more compactly on the spool. A well-made reel does not jar or clatter, but while the journals fit nicely, they run easily in their bearings, and the inner plates of the spool revolve without friction in the outer. Rops.— Although rods are still imported from England, and those made by her celebrated tackle-makers are thought by many to possess some qualities not found in American rods, the latter as a general rule are equal to the English, and in many respects better adapted to the requirements of our anglers; the metallic tip and guides being preferred by all (in any but fly-rods) to the English mode of having rings for the lie to pass through, and the usual wire loop at the tip. In bass, pike, and trolling rods, they are now con- sidered indispensable, as the line passes through with less friction, and in casting, the line is less apt to get foul. TACKLE IN GENERAL. 73 There is a diversity of opinion as to the weight and length of rods for various kinds of fishing; it is much a matter of fancy. The woods in general use are ash for the butt, hickory for the second and third joints, and lance, iron-wood, or bamboo for the tips; of course they should be well seasoned. The best materials for a fly-rod, are ash for the butt, iron- wood for the middle joint, and bamboo for the tip. Fly-rods in three pieces are to be preferred, as they require fewer ferules, and distribute the spring of the rod more equally through its whole length. It is better for those who have patience and knack, to join the tip to the middle piece with a neat splice, wrapped with coarse, well-waxed silk, making only one ferule necessary. The angler whose park of artillery consists of one piece of ordnance, should possess himself of a general rod with a -hollow butt, in which he may keep his tips of various lengths and sizes; this rod with its variety of pieces, may be put together for trolling, for bait-fishing, and should occasion call for it, may even be used as a fly-rod, although it is a kind of a makeshift. A general rod, if made in pieces of two feet, can be conveniently carried in a travelling trunk; in joints of this length the ferules should be short, fit well, and with- out the usual wooden sockets. By dispensing with the latter and having the ferules short, the elasticity of the rod is less impaired. I shall give my notions of the rods appropriate for differ- ent kinds of fishing, as I deseribe each fish and the manner of angling for it; and advise that the best rod should be bought for any or each kind of fishing; though, let me here say, the most expensive is not always the most suitable. Tu Bow Dipsy.—A friend has lately shown me a Chinese contrivance, which was brought over many years since by an T4 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. old Kast India merchant; it may have caused the introduc tion of the “bow-dipsy” in Philadelphia. This isa piece of whalebone bent at right angles, each side or arm being fifteen to eighteen inches in length, with a snood attached to the ends. It is lowered to the bottom by means of a hand-line, and a conical leaden sinker fastened ten or twelve inches beneath the angle. It is well adapted for taking small fish in any rapid tideway (especially White Perch), where they eollect in schools and bite rapidly. It is braced by lateral pieces of cord, which cause the whalebone to give and resume its position as the fish takes the bait—making it almost sure to hook him. I have heard of forty dozen White Perch being taken in the Delaware by three fishermen, in the last two hours of an ebb-tide, with this strange-looking con- trivance. The tackle used exclusively in fly-fishing, I will mention under its appropriate head, in a subsequent article. There is a great deal of superfluous tackle pictured and described in English books on angling. There is the clearing ring, the angler’s friend (a curved blade sharpened on the inner edge), baiting-needle, disgorger, paternoster, kill-devil, a plummet to get the depth of water, &., &c., which would better grace the window of a tackle shop, or a museum of useless tackle, than an angler’s wallet. It is amusing and even wonderful, what an amount of such stuff an ardent, green angler, with a flush pocket, can collect. As he grows older in the art, of course he throws it away, or imposes it as a present on some one no less verdant than he was himself a few summers before, exclaiming with that ancient philoso- pher: “Lord, how many things there are in this world of which Diogenes hath no need |” CHAPTER IV. THE PERCH FAMILY. * As inward love breeds outward talk, The hound some praise, and some the hawk: Some better pleased with private sport, Use tennis, some a mistress court: But these delights I neither wish, Nor envy, while I freely fish. “Who hunts, doth oft in danger ride; Who hawks, lures oft both far and wide; Who uses games, shall often prove A loser; but who falls in love, Ig fettered in fond Cupid’s snare My angle breeds me no such cara, “Of recreation there 1s none So free as fishing is alone: All other pastimes do no less Than mind and body both possess: My hand alone my work can do, So I can fish and study too.” WALTON. CHAPTER LV. THE PERCH FAMILY—PERCIDA. Generat Remarks on THE Percipa&. Great number of American genera and species.—Paucity of European Species.—Distinguishing marks.— Their abundance and variety in the Valley of the Mississippi —Migra- tory habits. Tue Rockrisn or Srripep Bass. Labrax Lineatus.—Rockfish Tackle.— Rockfishing on the lower Rappahannock. Tue Ware Percu. Labrax pallidus.—Perch Fishing. Taz Waite Bass or tHe Lakes. Labrax albidus.—White Bass taken with the artificial fly. Fresa Warer Bass or tHE Souto anp West. Grrystes salmoides.—Bass Fishing.—Bass Fly Fishing. Buack Bass or THe Lakes. Grystes nigricans.—Trolling for Black Bass with spoon, and with artificial flies. Tue Srripvep Bass or tat Onto. Labrax chrysops. Tue Ssort Stripep Bass. Osweco Bass. Tue Crappie or Sac-a-Lal. Pomozxis hexacanthus. Tar Yevtow Barrep Percu. Ferca flavescens. Tae Sunrisu or Sunny. Pomotis vulgaris. Bream. Ichthylis rubricunda,-—Bream Fishing on Bayou La Branch. Tae Pixe Percu or Onto Satmon. Lucioperca Americana. Tur Burra.o Perca. Ablodon grunniens. Dz Kay, whose work on ichthyology was published in 1846, says, there were more than sixty genera and six hundred species of Percide known at that time. How many new (77) 78 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. species have been added to the number since, it would be difficult to say. It is somewhat remarkable, that in British works on angling, we find only one species of this family described ; it is a barred Yellow Perch, resembling our Perca flavescens, Cuvier describes comparatively few as being found in Europe; while here the Percidz include as many fresh-water species of game-fish, as all the other families combined. And our anglers of the Atlantic States are not generally aware of the great variety found in the Southern and Western States, and the sport they afford to the fishers there. The distinguishing marks of the Percide are, edges of gill- cover or fore gill-cover, and sometimes both, denticulated or pectinated like the teeth of a comb, or armed with spines. Both jaws, the vomer and palatine, armed with teeth. First rays of the dorsal, or entire first dorsal (if there be two), armed with sharp points; the first ray of the anal-fin being always spinous; and the ventrals with one or more spines. The free edges of the scales are pectinated, and the ventral- fins under the pectorals. From this latter peculiarity, the ventral-fins being in close proximity to the throat, earlier ichthyologists termed them Thoracic fishes. The sharp spines of the fins have caused the Percide to be placed amongst the Acanthopterygii. According to Professor Agassiz’s classi- fication in reference to paleontology, they belong to the Ctenoids—the third order of fishes in creation. The Yellow-barred Perch, although the type of the family, is its least worthy representative. The splendid Rockfish, and the Southern Bass belong to other genera. The latter, which is found in all the Southern and Western States, furnishes great sport to the angler. It is taken with minnow, shrimp, spoon-bait, bob, and artificial flies. If by any dis- THE PERCH FAMILY. 79 pensation of Providence the Percoids should become extinct, there would hardly be sport left to the anglers, who fish the numerous creeks, rivers, and lakes where they now abound. I have alluded on another page, to the replenishing of the lakelets, found so abundantly scattered along the margin of the Mississippi, through its alluvial bottom lands, by the occasional overflow of that river. This phenomenon is strongly presented to the notice of observing anglers in the neighborhood of St. Louis, and one is apt to wonder where the great numbers and varieties of the Perch family come from, to stock those sluggish waters. In thinking over the matter I have fallen back on my favorite theory, the instinctive migration of surplus production, as applicable to fresh-water fishes, as well as to salt water or pelagian genera. If the reader will take the trouble to look at a good map, he will see that the states north and west of the confluence of the Mississippi and Ohio, are threaded for thousands of miles by rivers of gentle flow, and dotted with innumerable lakelets, which, to a great extent, are the feeders and sources of the Mississippi. These are the breeding places of Bass, Crappie, and other Percoids; most of them spawn early in the spring, soon after the ice has left the lakelets; and as most fresh-water species instinctively run down stream after spawning, it is easily conjectured how large schools of these fish are hurried along by freshets, and deposited in the ponds that are fed by the overflow of the great river. After a rise in the Mississippi, the lakes and ‘ponds that skirt its course, above the mouth of the Ohio, and down through the regions of cotton and sugar, are filled with fish of this family. In the ponds which have ‘been replenished in this way in the neighborhood of St. Louis, their numbers decrease very little the first summer; the second season they spawn and 80 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. breed, as in their native waters, but if the ponds are not refreshed by an overflow of the river every two or three years, the waters lose the chemical condition necessary to the reproduction of fish, from a continued infusion of de- cayed vegetable matter, and the lakes become barren, until another overflow of the mighty river comes rushing through, clearing them of foul, and filling them with fresh water; and restocking them at the same time with fish, and most nume- rously with Percoids. Below its junction with the Ohio, the Mississippi has made in the course of time, many a “cut off,” forcing its way in times of flood, across the neck of a peninsula or a bend, in seeking a more direct course, and leaving considerable bodies of water, of a horse-shoe shape, as the old channel closes. These are fed by the annual or occasional overflow of the river, and their waters refreshed and restocked with fish, as just described. Bruin Lake, opposite Grand Gulf, Mississippi, is a water of this kind, and is said to contain Bass (or as they are there called Trout) of immense size. I have been told by an angler, that he has taken there, in a day’s fishing, thirty of these fish, whose aggregate length was sixty feet. THE PERCH FAMILY. 81 THE ROCKFISH, OR STRIPED BASS. Labrax Lineatus: Cuvisr. The following description is taken from a fish of stout proportions, weighing four pounds; its length nineteen inches, exclusive of its caudal, breadth five inches. Form elliptical, compressed; length of head compared with body, as 53 to 19; tail slightly forked; head opercle and preopercle scaly ; two flat spines on the posterior margin of the opercle, with a membrane between and extending beyond them—the lower spine the longer. The eye is about one- third of the distance between the tip of the snout and posterior angle of opercle; irides light yellow. Teeth on the maxillaries and palatines, also on the sides of the tongue, which is soft, and on the arches of the gills; the lower jaw is the longer. Color; bluish green on the back, shading gradually lighter to the lateral line, which commences above the superior spine of the opercle, curves slightly upwards for a short distance, and is thence straight to the centre of the caudal; belly white. There are eight dusky stripes, the four above the lateral line extending to the tail. The lower margin of the preopercle and the chin are roseate white; caudal and dorsals dusky lead color; pectorals roseate at the roots and greenish yellow on the rays; ventrals roseate white in front, shading to a light lead color posteriorly. Scales on the roots of the caudal fin. 6 82 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. The first dorsal has nine stout spines; the second one spine and twelve soft rays; pectorals seventeen rays; caudal six- teen; ventrals one spine and five rays; anal three spines and eleven rays. Rockfish are not plentiful in the Gulf of Mexico, but are abundant along the whole coast, from Georgia to the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and are found in larger numbers from the Chesapeake Bay to Nantucket, than in any other part of their geographical range. They have been known to reach the weight of ninety pounds, and have been taken with rod and | line as high as forty or fifty,—though one of six or eight pounds affords the angler sport enough. As far as game qualities are concerned, it is the finest fish the American angler meets with, south of the regions of the Salmon. In the Chesapeake and Delaware bays, they leave the salt water as soon as the ice disappears from the rivers, and have been taken in the Schuylkill, at Fairmount dam, as early as the 20th of March, by trolling with a minnow, or roach, or a small pickled eel, kept from the previous season. The first Rock-fishing of the season, on the Potomac, is at the Falls above Georgetown, where great numbers, and large ones, are sometimes killed; and there is no doubt that they can be taken in this latitude, as early as April or May, on any river communicating with salt water, where the tide is obstructed by a dam or impassable fall. At Newport and Narragansett Bay, they are caught from June to November, by baiting with a small species of herring called Manhaden. Along the sedgy creeks and inlets, from Cape Henlopen to Sandy Hook, they are taken with soft crabs and shrimps, during the months of August and September. Large Rock- fish are frequently caught in nets, when they are following a school of herrings on the fishing grounds, where they cause SSVI ATAIWVIS—HSTAINOON TWH THE PERCH FAMILY. 88 much annoyance to the fishermen by tearing their nets, and allowing the shad and herring to escape. An erroneous opinion prevails, that Rockfish ascend fresh rivers above the head of tide to spawn; but food is their only object. They generally spawn in tidal creeks and rivers, where smaller streams of fresh water enter. When they are taken in the Delaware and Hudson above tide, they are generally of large size, and are caught mostly on set lines and in fish-traps. Rocx-Fisnine.—The first dash of a Rockfish is terrific to a novice. Thirty yards are frequently spun off the reel before a large fish can be checked. At the Falls of the Potomac, or in the rapids of the Susquehanna, his play is not less vigor- ous than a Salmon’s; his runs are much longer, and he frequently escapes by chafing or cutting the’ line or leader against the sharp edges of rocks, being assisted in his desperate struggles by the strong current. Still, though sturdy, he is a fair fighter, and where there are no such obstructions, a gentle hand, a taut line, and a steady pull secures him. You must not be too anxious when playing him, to get a first sight of your prize, or be too familiar by bringing him close to the boat or shore, until he is well tired out. When he gives in at last, and lies exhausted on his broad side, you may, in absence of a gaff or landing-net, put your thumb in his open mouth, and your fingers under his chin, and lift him in—being careful at the same time of the sharp flat spine on his gill-cover. : Rods of various lengths are used in angling for Rockfish. In bottom-fishing in a tideway, one of twelve feet with a stiff tip is necessary. When using a float, one of greater length and more pliability affords better sport; but in casting a minnow over a bold, rocky stream, which is the 84 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. ne plus ultra of Bass fishing, a stout salmon-rod, or a bamboo, or a native reed pole of eighteen feet, fitted with reel and rings, is more appropriate. In all cases a good multiplying reel should be used, with a hundred yards of well-laid hemp line, which should pass through metallic guides, and a metallic tip at the top of the rod. The crack Bass fishers of New York are so fastidious, as even to have the tip (the end-piece through which the line passes) jewelled, in order to lessen the friction as the line runs out, when casting. Many anglers do not feel secure unless the leader be of double gut, which is entirely unnecessary, unless there are sharp rocks on the bottom; fora single strand of the best and stoutest gut, when wet, will bear nearly as much strain, as an ordinary hemp line. Stout-wired Kirby hooks, long or short shanks, from No. 1 to 00, are preferable; they are much more certain of hooking than the Limerick. The weight of the sinker should be proportioned to the depth of the water or force-of the tide. In bottom-fishing, an oblong sliding sinker may be advantageously used. In trolling or casting over rapids, a bullet, from the size of a buckshot to a half ounce, is best; then, also, one or more swivels should be looped on, to insure the spinning of the minnow. The usual mode of using the minnow, when trolling, is to “bridle” it, which is done in several ways. The easiest is, to put the hook in at the mouth, out through the gill, and then, after taking a half hitch around the head, to pass it through the side of the back; so that the bend of the hook may set upwards, with the point towards the head of the bait. Another and a better plan, is to have a small hook (size 2) on the snood, about three inches above the larger ; the smaller hook is passed through the under, and out through the upper THE PEROH FAMILY. 85 lip of the minnow; and the larger hook, as just described, through the back. To increase the spinning or twirling of the bait in its passage through the water, it is better to put on the minnow slightly bent, which is done by passing the larger hook through the back nearer to the tail than you would when you intend the minnow to swim straight, and then doubling it a little. In baiting with shrimps, which are good in some waters, and at certain seasons, a float should be used, if the tide is not too strong; this bait should not touch the bottom, as Rockfish are not in the habit of looking for them there; it should also be kept in motion by occasional short jerks or twitches of the rod. Soft crabs are always found on the bottom by the fish, when feeding on them, and, of course, in using crab-bait, you should fish near the bottom, whether it be with or without a float. I have sometimes found Rock- fish so well on the feed, as to take a slice or oblong piece of fish-bait, readily striking at it, if it is white and well put on; for, like other fish, they have not the delicate sense of taste, that anglers give them credit for. The pearl minnow, or a tuft of raw cotton, or a white rag tied on a hook, will frequently take small Rockfish, where a strong tide sweeps under a bridge, or around the corner of a pier. The fish wait in the eddies on the lee side of the tim- bers of the bridge, or angles of the pier, for minnows or shrimp; and seize any small object having the appearance of life. There is no doubt that at such times, a light colored fly, particularly the white moth, would be taken greedily, though a white rag answers the purpose as well. Half flood is the best time of tide for such fishing. The pearl minnow should be drawn against the current, a few inches below the surface, and near the edge of the eddy; the angler being careful to keep out of sight and not to cast his shadow over the swim. 86 AMERICAN ANGLERS BOOK At the Rancocas bridge, a few miles above Philadelphia, some years ago, a party of three anglers, on a day in the latter part of June, took fifteen dozen Rockfish, from ten to fourteen inches long, with the pearl minnow. In strong tideways, or deep water, the last half of the ebb, and the first half hour of the flood tide is generally consi- dered the best time for taking this fish. In the shallow bays and sounds extending along our coast, there are thoroughfares between the low grassy islands, which are almost dry at low water. Here crabs are found in great numbers, and the Rock- fish come in with the flood tide in search of them. In such places, the last half of the flood and high water are the proper times. The most famous place along the coast for catching these fish, is Narragansett Bay. I have heard stories of the Bass fishing there, that it is not prudent to repeat. The American Angler’s Guide, by J. J. Brown, Esq., of New York, has an excellent article on Striped Bass fishing in the waters around New York. Frank Forester, in speaking of this fish, says, “The fly will take them brilliantly, and at the end of three hundred yards of line, a twelve-pound Bass will be found quite suffi- cient, to keep even the most skilful angler’s hands, as full as he can possibly desire.” The author in question must have delighted in “magnificent distances”; for a line of three hun- dred yards, with a Bass at the end of it, would certainly be “playing at long taw,” and is suggestive of “shooting with a long bow.” Most anglers will kill a Bass of any size, and not give him fifty yards of line. Frank Forester’s idea of trolling for Rockfish, as some anglers fish for Pike, with a leaded gorge hook, from the shore, even if successful, would be dull sport compared with the usual mode of taking them. It would moreover be degrading to the bold Rockfish, to place him iu the same category with a sneaking Pike. THE PERCH FAMILY. 87 Flies are not the natural food of this fish, though they may be of the Southern Bass or the Black Bass of the great lakes; still it is not an uncommon thing to take Rockfish with a large gaudy artificial fly, at the Falls of the Potomac; though a hook wrapped with a piece of yellow, or sometimes with red flannel, will answer the purpose. This fish follows and seizes the fly under rather than on the surface, and does not start from the bottom with a spring, as the Trout or Salmon. Rockfish below twelve inches are not good, the flesh ap- pearing to be wilted and immature, bearing the same relation to that of a four-pounder, as veal does to beef. When of two or three pounds, they should be split and broiled, they are then very good; above this size, they are generally boiled. They are better though, cut into steaks,—that is, in transverse slices—and broiled, and served with melted butter and parsley. The flesh of overgrown Rockfish is said to be coarse, and is not esteemed. Most tidewater anglers have pleasant reminiscences of this fish, but no recollection of Bass fishing comes back to me with greater pleasure, than my first essay amongst the “big ones.” It was many years ago, in the month of June, when on a visit to a relative—an ardent though not a scien- tific angler—who lived on the banks of the broad Rappahan- nock, near its mouth. On the morning after my arrival, my host improvised a bout with the Rockfish; and I saw from my chamber window, a negro boy, with no other implement than a four-pronged stick, capture as many soft crabs as sufficed for bait and breakfast. Our canoes were staked out some distance from the margin of the sandy beach, which made it necessary to be carried to them. This task was speedily accomplished by a sturdy little negro; who with trousers rolled up on his sable drumsticks, dumped the whole cargo—bait, rods and four anglers—into two “dug 88 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. outs.” We were soon staked down on the flats, a half mile from the shore, where the water was six feet deep. Our ob- ject was, to place the boats in such a position, as to fish into the “galls,” or bare places, where there was no grass; these were of various sizes, from three rods square to half an acre. The rods, reels and scientific tackle of the city anglers, ex- cited the wonder, and no doubt the silent contempt of the native fishermen; who were rigged, one with a hand-line, and the other with a stout cedar pole, with a line attached to it, that might have held a Shark. My host, a staunch Democrat and anti-bank man, dubbed my rod, which was not over stout and fifteen feet long, “The Nick Biddle pole,” and assured me it was all well enough for White Perch, but would not hold a Rockfish, such as he could bring with a strong pull, and a “whop,” right into the canoe. It was my good fortune to hook the first fish, a fine fellow of six pounds. There was much laughter, of course; Uncle Rolly declared I would never get him in. “See how your pole bends! Why he’s way off in the middle of the gall already! Why don’t you pull him in?” The old man was here inter- rupted by the disappearance of his pine-bark float, and in less time than it takes to tell it, he had his fish flapping in the bottom of the canoe. “There!” said he, “I can catch ten to your one. I tell you, your Nick Biddle pole will never do here!” By this time I had my fish pretty well in hand, and after a dash or two more Jordan, the negro boy, put a wide crab-net under him, and lifted him in. The next fish Uncle Rolly hooked broke his hold; so did a good many more, and large ones too; while every fish struck by the dandy pole, was killed artistically, though the old man thought with much unnecessary ceremony. At the ebb of the tide scienve had told. We had a good time of it, and the owner of the “Biddle pole” felt great confidence in his fine tackle, and THE PERCH FAMILY, 89 much quiet satisfaction in his first success with it; while Uncle Rolly laughed at his tactics. We went home and ate the stewed head and shoulders of a large Rockfish and soft crabs for dinner. Next day we tried our luck again with equal success; and before leaving for home one of the town. anglers killed a Rockfish of twenty-five pounds, which Uncle Rolly would certainly have lost. Besides the fishing in this part of the Old Dominion, I have vivid recollections of the hat, hair, and hospitality of “UNCLE KuLLy.” 96 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. WHITE PERCH. GRAY PERCH. Labrax pallidus: Dr Kay. Color—back, bluish gray; sides, silvery gray ; belly, white ; body compressed, elliptical; breadth, one-third of its length ; head not quite a third; eye one-third distant from snout; opercle and preopercle scaly, a single flat spine on the opercle, with a membrane extending beyond; preopercle serrated on lower margin. Branchial, and fin rays. B 6; D 9,1,12; C 16; P14; V 15; A 8,10. Compared with Labrax rufus of De Kay, this fish is of a more lustrous silvery hue; its fins longer and more transparent; the rays more delicate; spines longer and sharper, some of the dorsal spines with a sabre-like curve. The facial line is more depresseu, eye full, mouth larger, and bearing all the marks of a game predatory fish. It is seldom found north of the Delaware. De Kay’s specific appellation “Pallidus” denotes the color, and marks the difference between this and his Labrax rufus, or Ruddy Bass. I believe as he did, that the two are distinct THE PERCH FAMILY. 91 species. Holbrook, quoting Gmelin, calls it Labrax Amert- canus, and falls into the same error as Cuvier and Storer, making no specific difference between the two. Labrax rufus is a northern fish, seldom if ever found south of New York. Its habits differ from those of Palhidus, being found mostly on flat clayey and muddy bottoms, and in shal- lows, and in some of the fresh-water ponds of the New Eng- land states and New York. It has not the game qualities of Pallidus. The White Perch is a congener of the magnificent Rockfish, and is frequently found feeding in the same place and in his company. Its average length is eight or nine inches; it is not often more than twelve, though in rare instances it is found fourteen inches long. This beautiful, free-biting little fish, which affords so much sport, and, which is found in all the fresh and brackish tide-waters, from Cape Hatteras to Sandy Hook, does not receive that favorable notice from writers on ichthyology and angling which it merits. De Kay, in speaking of it, after describing the Ruddy Bass, says: “Like the preceding species, it inhabits salt and brackish waters; but as far as my observa- tions have extended, it is invariably a small fish, and rarely brought to market for food. The Little White Bass, or White Perch, may be readily distinguished from the other, by its light color, small size, and very compressed body.” I am disposed to object to its being called a salt-water fish. Its most natural habitat is fresh tidal-rivers. It is frequently found far above the terminus of the tide, and they are even more abundant in fresh than in brackish waters, at the season of the year when they are sought for by anglers. This fish when found in salt-water creeks, is darker in color, but there is no specific difference. The remark above quoted, that it is “rarely brought tq 92 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. market for food,” is an error so glaring, as to cause one to suppose, that the explorations of the naturalist in question, could not have extended south of New York. The same author also says or implies, that its average size does not exceed six or seven inches; by which he also evinced his slight knowledge of this fish. Frank Forester, in his book on angling, after a slight notice, dismisses it, as “not sufficiently important to merit more particular notice.” The latter gentleman missed much, by not becoming acquainted with our little friend Pallidus. In season, the White Perch is the pan fish (and there is none better) of the Philadelphia, Baltimore, Washington, Norfolk, and Richmond markets. And as for sport; should it be said that a man or boy has no sport, or is not an angler, because he does not use reel or gut? Did not Billy Jones, the chair-maker, down town, go a Perch-fishing four or five times every summer; shut- ting up his shop for the day, and taking his wife, children, and apprentices in his sailboat down the river—or in a furniture car down the “Neck;” and with his brandling-worms in an old coffee-pot, and his minnow-net and frying-pan, and store of bread and butter and bottled ale, make a day of it? Did not “our Johrny” shoulder his reed-pole every Saturday morning, when there was a run of Perch at Fairmount dam; and return at night with a string of them as long as his leg, ‘and his trousers smeared with shad-roe? Is not Uncle Jim— a respectable colored gentleman—who lives in a quiet nook by the Curratoma, down in Old Virginia, always sure of a mess of them? And Old Davy, whose shanty is on the high bluff, by the mouth of the Sassafras, does he not “count on ‘em?” And still the learned De Kay, and the eloquent Frank Forester speak disparagingly or hardly notice this game little fish, so intimately associated with the early, and happy THE PERCH FAMILY. 93 recollections of every angler of the waters that find their way into the Chesapeake and Delaware. White Perch hybernate in the deep salt water of our bays, and ascend the fresh tide-rivers soon after the ice and snow- water have run off. They feed greedily on the spawn of other fish, particularly that of the shad; on insects, grubs, minnows, and on the migratory schools of young eels, which are found in the months of April and May, in great numbers, at any rapid or dam obstructing the upward flow of the tide. Perch usually spawn in May, and then resort to deeper waters to recuperate, and. all summer long, are found by the angler, ever swimming around the deep sunken pier, or the timbers of the rickety old bridge, snapping at shrimp, or chasing the minnows on the flood-tide high up amongst the water-lilies ; and never refusing a bait, if of the right sort, and properly presented. The first Perch-fishing of the season, is always at the terminus of a tideway, as just mentioned. Through the summer, they are taken on the ebb-tide in deep water, on sandy or rocky bottoms or muscle-beds, or around stone piles or sunken hulks; and on the flood-tide, along the margins of rivers, or creeks, where the long grasses or water- lilies afford a home for the minnows. _ In brackish water, shrimps are decidedly the best bait; in deep holes, in fresh tide rivers, brandling-worms; on the flood- tide, along the margin of the grass or water-lilies, minnows are good, or a wedge-shaped fish-bait is greedily taken, if the Perch are well on the feed. This last should be cut with the skin adhering, which makes the bait so tough, that six or eight fish may be taken before renewing it. For early fishing, young eels, spawned the preceding autumn, which are beautifully transparent and not larger than a darning-needle, are the most attractive. These, as I have just said, are to be had where the tide is impeded by dam or rapid. Here 94 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. the Perch and Rockfish devour immense numbers of them, and it is only at such places that these fish look for them. The vitality of these little animals is wonderful; and if the hook is passed through them below the vitals, which are easily seen, they remain alive for some time. Two or three eels are put on each hook. This bait is found in small pools left by the ebb of the tide, and can be easily secured with a small net of sea-grass skirting. The first catch of Perch, with Philadelphia anglers, is, or was, below the dam at Fairmount waterworks; beginning in April with young eels, and occasionally srhall minnows for bait. Early in the season, the most likely places are where the rapid subsides into deep, still water; in May they are found more in the rapids and nearer the fall of the dam. The tackle which affords the best sport is a common native reed pole, of twelve or thirteen feet, not thicker at the butt than the thumb, and tapering to a fine point, which can be rendered still finer and stronger by splicing on a tip of lance or iron-wood. The same rod may also be used with a reel, by putting on rings, and a metallic tip at the end for the line to pass through. A fine line of flax or silk should be used, with a gut leader of three or four feet, with two hooks, one at the end, and one eighteen inches or two feet above. The best hooks when baiting with little eels, are those termed “ weak trout” hooks. They are long in the shank, which facilitatés baiting and taking off the fish; the wire is also delicate, mutilating the bait less than a coarser hook, and being more elastic, or at least more flexible, lets go its hold more easily when caught on the bottom. If in pulling it away, the hook should straighten to any extent, it may be easily restored to its shape, by pressing the bend together between the fore teeth. With delicate handling, these hooks are strong enough to secure 9. three-pound Rockfish, if he should take your bait. THE PERCH FAMILY. , 95 The sinker, conical or round, should be in size from a buck- shot to a half ounce. bullet. Its weight must depend on the depth and force of the current; it should be attached by a weak piece of gut or thread at the junction of the leader with the line; so that in case of its being caught between the rocks, you may lose only the bullet, and not your leader and hooks. When fishing in slack water, especially by the edge of the water-lilies or grass, it 1s advisable to use a float; the Perch, like other predatory fish, seldom taking a bait on the bottom, unless it is in motion. The distance between the hooks and the float should not be more than two-thirds or three-fourths the depth of the water. Where the tide sweeps around the end of a pier, or the piles of a bridge, Perch frequently are found in the eddies on the edge of the current, waiting for minnows or shrimp; then a short line (without a reel) is preferable. In such places they can at times be taken with a pearl minnow. In a tideway or lively water, always fish down stream, to prevent the current bringing your line home to you, and so as to allow it to lift the sinker and leader from the bottom, and veer it about in such way, that the bait will appear attractive. In fishing from a boat, anchor just far enough above the desired place to fish into it, occasionally trying either side. If you are in the right place, and the fish are on the feed, there is no ne- cessity for striking, if the line is kept taut, for they generally hook themselves at the first pass they make at the bait. If the angler is not greedy for a large catch, and the fish are found near the surface, and on the shallow rapids, as they sometimes are on a warm day in May, a stout fly-rod and light tackle might be used, baiting with a single eel, and without using a sinker, casting and drawing as with a heavy fly. Of course it takes longer to secure a fish by such means, but the sport is heightened. 96 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Perch-fishing in the month of May, in brisk water, where the run of fish is from nine to twelve inches, is not a whit inferior to bait-fishing for Trout. I prefer the former, because Perch, by such appliances as I have described, are taken in a sportsmanlike manner, and Trout (which should be taken only with a fly) are not. Sometimes in deep holes at the head of tide-water, when fishing with a minnow, the broad- sided Shad will take the bait; or a three-pound Rockfish will come into your swim; then if you have no reel, or your hand be not gentle, and if you do not grasp your rod by its extreme butt, and give him the whole spring of your fragile reed, you are a ruined angler; and you may not forgive yourself for a week, for lack of skill or precaution. ‘Many anglers object to a reed rod, on account, as they say, of a feeling of insecurity in its use. But for Perch-fishing, its lightness, and graceful bend, when a fish is on, commend it; and the very objection that is urged increases the sport to one who is fond of fishing fine. The Perch is decidedly a pan-fish; and when rolled in grated cracker, or coarse corn meal, and moderately browned, is better fried than broiled. To a man of wholesome, un- pampered appetite, it is hard to serve up a better dinner than fried Perch, with good bread and butter, and a little claret; or what is still better, though more homely, a bottle of Philadelphia ale. Large White Perch are sometimes boiled, and served up with egg sauce. A piquant dish may be made as follows :—Cut off the heads and tails, and fry the fish enough to lay them open, and take out the backbone and ribs, dividing each fish into two slices; then put them in the pan again, and brown them in coarse corn meal; pouring over them, when nearly done, a little Worcestershire sauce, or walnut catsup, and serve them up with drawn butter and an additional quantity of either sauce or catsup. THE PERCH FAMILY. 97 THE WHITE BASS OF THE LAKES. Labrax albidus: Dz Kay. De Kay says: “This fish is bluish white above the lateral line, a few narrow dusky parallel streaks above and beneath this line; sides and belly white; pupils black; irides white intermixed with a little brown; dorsal, caudal, and anal fins brownish, tinged with blue; pectoral fins whitish, tinged with olive green; ventrals light transparent blue, tipped with white. Length 5:10, depth 3-0. Fins, dorsal 9, 1, 13; pec: torals 17; ventrals 1, 5; anal 3,12; caudal 17. This isa very common fish in Lake Erie, and is known at Buffalo under the name of White Bass.” In the year 1844, I made an appointment with a fine old gentleman of the medical profession, known and loved by all Philadelphians, who had taken up an idea that I was something of an angler, to meet him at Mackinaw, on my return from a western tour. We were to have gone to Sault St. Marie, where he had renewed his early love for augling, by taking some of the large Trout in the rapids, the previous summer, with an outfit which I had furnished him. Much to my regret I received a letter from him, when I reached Mackinaw, telling me that his presence at home was indispensable, and requesting me to call at Detroit and spend a few days with his son, then a lieutenant in the U. 8. Engineer Department, who had charge of the construction of a fort there. I stopped, and we spent two long days angling Cd 4 98 . AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. in Detroit River. Our success was varied. On the afternoon of the first day, near sundown, we took twenty-five White Bass, with the artificial fly, in a creek on the Canada side opposite the town. They were all of a size—eight of them weighing just seven pounds. The fly was a rough affair of my own make, the wings being of the end of a peacock’s tail feather. We afterwards learned that we had been fishing in preserved waters; the Canadian fishermen, who supplied the Detroit market, had caught the fish with a net in the river, and had turned them loose in the back-water of the creek and placed some brush across, so as to have them ready when there was a demand for them. I have passed Detroit since, and tried to identify the place ; I think the railroad depot at Sandwich, on the Canadian side, is near it; the creek has been drained off, or has become a Mere ditch or uninhabited water, and the lieutenant, in the course of promotion, has become a great general. I wonder if, amidst the arduous duties of the present, he ever thinks of that quiet afternoon? THE PERCH FAMILY. 99 FRESH-WATER BASS OF THE SOUTH AND WEST. ‘Grystes salmoides: Cuvisr. This fish is known under various names, through the wide extent of its habitat. In the neighborhood of Richmond, it is called the James River Chub, sometimes Bass. In its more southerly range, it goes by the names of Trout, Black Trout, and Brown Trout, and is seldom called Bass, except in the Northwestern States. Although it is called “Trout,” at the South, there is no family or generic affinity between it and our northern Trout. The following is an abridgment of Holbrook’s description, connécted with a few observations of the writer. Head and body, dusky olive above, sometimes with a yellowish tint, lighter on the sides. Belly white; opercles light green or greenish yellow; first dorsal fin, nme spines and eighteen soft rays; pectorals, fifteen; ventrals, one spine and five rays; anal, three spines and twelve rays; caudal, nineteen rays. Body elongated oval, straight on the belly. Hye large. Mouth very large, lower jaw longer. The vomer has brush- 100 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. like teeth in front. Teeth on the palatines and pharyngeal bones. Tongue smooth, without teeth in front. They are found in the James River, in the lagoons of the Dismal Swamp, in the Roanoke, and in every fresh-water stream of any size in the Southern Atlantic States; in the streams and lakes of Florida, and in all the rivers which flow from the north into the Gulf of Mexico along its whole ex- tent. All the creeks and bayous are stocked with them; so are the lakes formed in the old bed of the Mississippi, wher- ever the river has made a cut-off, though they are seldom or ever taken in the river itself—the fish of most families only using it as a high road or thoroughfare from one lake to another. They are also found in the Cheat, Holston, Green, Kentucky, Alabama, Cumberland, Tennessee, and Ohio, and in their tributaries, to their very sources in the highlands and mountains. They are not so plentiful in the streams or their tributaries that fall into the Mississippi on the western side; but the long still lakes of the alluvial bottom lands on the east side, from the Ohio to Rock River, are stocked with this and other percoids by the occasional overflow of the Mis- sissippi. The rivers of Missouri, Kansas, Nebraska, and the streams and clear lakes of Iowa, Wisconsin, and Minnesota, also sup- ply them, with a little variety in form and color. This fish is taken generally by still fishing, with a live minnow, and it is only of late years in the Southern States, that anglers have used the spoon, which is found to be very destructive. An accomplished angler of the “Houseless,” gave me a glowing description of a party who started from Colum- bia, South Carolina, to fish the Edisto River, in the month of May 1860; they used the spoon bait, trolling near the bank under the overhanging branches, each angler occupying a boat paddled by his servant. They collected at night on THE PERCH FAMILY. 101 board of the flat-boat which accompanied them down the river, with stores, cooking utensils, and bedding. They fished fifty or sixty miles of the river, and had a glorious time of it, taking. Bass weighing as high as eight pounds. In the states bordering on the Gulf of Mexico, this fish is taken with the minnow, shrimp, and bob; the latter is an arti- ficial bait, made of gaudy feathers and tinsel (on two or three hooks); it is as large as a humming bird. It is said that the tip end of a buck’s tail answers the same purpose in Florida. The bob is used from a boat, with a long rod and a short line; the boat is paddled silently along, at a convenient distance from the shore, while the angler is dapping his bob along in likely places near the bank; or, if he “paddles his own canoe,” the end of a long reed with a short line projects beyond the bow of the boat, the bob just touching the water. When the fish seizes it, which is always with a bold rush and a spring, a short and decisive tussle ensues, in which the fish is taken by the angler or the rod is carried away by the fish. I have taken this Bass in the vicinity of St. Louis, on a moonshiny night, by skittering a light spoon over the surface of the water, while standing on the shore. In the South, a minnow or shrimp is considered the best bait, and a float of suitable size is used on such occasions. The anglers of New Orleans who have summer residences on the Gulf coast between the latter city and Mobile, formerly enjoyed Bass-fishing to its full extent; many of them were ardent and skilful anglers. T have often thought that this fish would take a large arti- ficial fly well, and give great sport, on a stout trout rod, and corresponding tackle. My belief has lately been verified by an account given me of an English or Scotch angler, who “spent last summer at the town of Rock Island, Illinois. He 102 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. waded Rock River and fished for Bass as for Trout or Salmon, and killed a great many, some of which were of very large size. I hope he did not take the. chills and fever home with him, to disturb his pleasant reminiscences of his sport. : The rod used is generally a springy weapon of fourteen feet for bait-fishing, and a lighter one with the bob. A good reel, and stout line and gut are required; the hook from No. 1 to 00; the latter size is preferable, as the Bass has a large mouth. This fish is unsurpassed in flavor by any of the Perch family. The smaller are broiled or fried, the larger should be boiled and served up With egg sauce. THE PERCH FAMILY. 103 BLACK BASS OF THE NORTHERN LAKES. Grystes nigricans : Acassiz. % The color of this fish (which appears to vary with locality, or the season) is generally dark olive-green on the back, shading gradually into a brownish yellow on the sides; belly, opaque white. Body compressed, oval; back arched; belly less curved than the superior outline; breadth as two to seven. Lateral line concurrent with back. Head small, little less than one-fourth the length of the body; preopercle covered with small scales, scales larger on opercle. The eye is on a line between the snout and posterior angle of opercle, one-third distant from the snout, and is about five-eighths of an inch in diameter ; the irides are dark brown above, and pale yellow below. Nostrilssmall, double. Tongue toothless; both jaws with small brushliké teeth, small patches of the same on each side of the pharynx, as well as on the branchial arches. Branchial rays seven. The first dorsal fin has ten sharp spines, the anterior ray being short; the second dorsal is 104 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. covered at its base with scales, and nas fifteen rays, preceded by an obtuse spine of half their length ; this fin is arched, and rounded posteriorly. The pectorals beginning immediately beneath tne point of the opercle are yellow, nearly obovate in shape, and have eighteen rays. Ventrals commencing slightly’ posteriorly, have five branched rays. The anal terminating beneath the posterior point of the second dorsal, has two sharp, and one longer obtuse spine, and twelve branched rays. The'caudal is very slightly forked, and has eighteen rays. The specimen which the wood-cut at the head of this article represents, and from which my description was taken, was caught early in September near Rouse’s Point, on Lake Champlain. I have been particular in my description, and find it differs from that of Agassiz and De Kay; from the former, in the color, spines, and fin rays. The difference of color I attribute to the season of the year, or some local cause. I regret that my sketch, which is accurate as regards proportions, does not do justice to the original in other respects. The specimen was fourteen and a half inches long, and about two pounds in weight; one of four pounds taken on the same day, measured only eighteen inches. There is some difference between this fish and his Southern congener; he is much stouter, and not as symmetrical in his proportions; his habits and manner of taking the bait are much the same, but his haunts—from the difference in the waters which he inhabits—are necessarily unlike the lurking- places of the Southern Bass. The Black Bass of the Lakes loves the rocky shores of the islands, the sand-bars, and reefs. He takes a live minnow in still-fishing, which is by far a more sportsmanlike mode of capturing him than trolling with the spoon,* though the latter is the method most in * Buel’s patent is most generally used. THE PERCH FAMILY. 105 vogue. He is also trolled for with large gaudy flies—sold at the tackle stores expressly for the purpose—from four to six of them being attached by single lengths of gut to a long salmon casting-line. But the neatest way of taking these fish is practised by a veteran angler, who spends part of his summers in Trout-fishing on Manitoulin Island; to vary his amusement he takes Black Bass from the shore, with a stout trout-rod. They rise so readily at the artificial fly, that it is almost unsportsmanlike to kill them in any other way. In trolling for these fish, a stout rod of ten feet and a good multiplying reel, containing from fifty to a hundred yards of plaited silk line, are required ; a pair of swivels are necessary when using the spoon, but may be dispensed with if trolling with flies. Written directions for trolling from a boat are hardly necessary, as the boatman, who is generally acquainted with the feeding-grounds, rows over the most likely places. When a Bass is struck, the boatman should cease rowing, and as the fish is generally securely hooked if trolling with the spoon, there is little chance of his escape, except from undue excite- ment, or unskilful handling on the part of the angler. In trolling with a gang of flies, it is best to have a landing-net about eighteen inches in diameter. With all the game qualities of the Black Bass, his capture by trolling with spoon or flies does not afford the pleasure that taking fish from the shore does; there is no skill required in finding the game, for that is done by the boat- man; striking is not necessary, as the fish hooks himself, and as for killing him, you must take him, to get him off the hook.. So, in going out with a boatman who knows the waters, it necessarily follows that the merest bungler is as apt to have as good a catch as an expert angler. It is exciting certainly, when trolling with flies, to have two or three plucky fish on at the same time, fighting hard, and 4 106 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK leaping above the water; but like all trolling from a boat, one has little else to do than wind up his line. How different from putting on a brace of light hackles, and going at sun- down to try “a comfortable conclusion” with a Trout that refused your fly at midday ! Before the introduction of the spoon, the best fish were. taken with the minnow, by still-fishing, from a boat. anchored in some favorable place, a long rod without a reel being used, or a shorter one with the reel, and a good-sized float. This. we consider far preferable to trolling with that deadly and unsportsmanlike implement, the spoon, as a fish will always give more sport, and has a better opportunity. of displaying his pluck when he commences the fight at close quarters, and increases the distance by bold dashes and desperate leaps, obliging the angler to give and take line, and deal promptly and coolly with his adversary; while in trolling, you strike him at a long distance, and though he veers from side to side, leaps high, and fights. hard, there is much of a dead pull in winding in so long a line, while it strains your rod, and is distressing to the works of a good reel. Black Bass were once abundant in Lake George, but the steady demand for them at the watering-places has almost depopulated that beautiful water, and those that remain are mostly small fish, taken by deep still-fishing with a drop-line. They are still plentiful at the northern.end of Lake Cham- plain. Alburg Springs is a favorite place for an angler’s sojourn. They are found in abundance at many places on the shores of Lake Ontario, at Cape Vincent, and Alexandria Bay, opposite the Thousand Islands; also in the Niagara and Detroit Rivers, and in Lake Erie. Squaw Island, near San- dusky City, Ohio, is a noted place for them. They are found likewise in Lake St. Clair and Lake Huron. The usual route for anglers of the Atlantic cities who visit THE PERCH FAMILY. 107 the Thousand Isles, is by the New York Central Railroad to Rome, thence to Cape Vincent, and early next morning by steamboat to Alexandria Bay; where Rowe Brothers have quarters that would have delighted Father Izaak himself, and where boats and oarsmen can always be procured. Anglers from all the towns of New York on the Central Railroad come in large numbers to this place, and have immense sport amongst the Bass, Pickerel, and Mascalonge. Like the other fish of this genus, the Bass is esteemed for the excellence of its flesh, though I think it is somewhat overrated. This fish differs from the Oswego Bass, to which it bears so close a resemblance, in having a smaller head, and. its belly less protuberant, though the position of the fins, their shape, and number of spines and rays, are almost identical. It spawns in the spring on the breaking up of the ice, when many of the largest fish are speared on their spawning-beds. An officer of the United States Engineer Department, who had charge of the construction of a fort or lighthouse on Lake St. Clair, some twenty years ago, informed me that on several occasions he took scores of Black Bass by trolling with a hand-line from a boat; the average size was four pounds; he. showed me the artificial bait he used, which was a large Lim- erick hook about an inch and a quarter across the bend, with a white feather whipped to the back of it. 108 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE STRIPED BASS OF THE OHIO. Labrax chrysops: RaFINEsquE. I adopt the scientific name given by the naturalist above quoted, with a condensation of his description. : Body oblong, silvery, with five parallel longitudinal stripes on each side, two of which reach the tail. Lateral line diag- onal, but straight. Head brown above. Mouth large. First dorsal fin eight spines; second, one spine and fourteen rays: pectorals, sixteen rays; ventrals, one spine and five soft rays: anal, one spine and fourteen rays; branchiostegous rays, six. The tail is forked, roseate, tipped with brown. Though this fish is longer in its proportions, it may be the same species as the Striped Bass found at the mouths of the fresh-water bayous and rivers that fall into Lakes Ponchar- train and Borgne, and along the Gulf coast; the latter being modified by a change of its habitat, becoming deeper and more compressed. This species was called “Rockfish” by the early settlers of Kentucky, who supposed it to be identical with the Rockfish of the Atlantic States. It differs, however, in the number of stripes on its sides; the Rockfish has eight and this only five; the other has two spines on the opercle, and this only one; there is also a difference in the number of spines and rays of the fins. This fish has been takeu in the Mississippi above its junc- tion with the Missouri, weighing as much as six pounds though that size is extremely rare. I have never taken it above a pound. The largest are taken with a live minnow, and no doubt afford excellent sport. THE PERCH FAMILY. 109 THE SHORT STRIPED B/ASS. I regret that I have no engraving or ichthyological account of this pretty fish, but if the reader will imagine our White Perch with stripes on its sides resembling those of the Rock- fish, though not so many of them, he will have this Bass in his mind’s eye. There is also a variety called the “Broken Striped: Bass,” which I have no doubt is of the same species ; for we frequently find individual cases in which the stripes on the Rockfish are not continuous, but irregular and broken. The Short Striped Bass of both of these varieties are found frequently in great abundance in Lakes Ponchartrain and Borgne, and along the Gulf coast, where fresh-water bayous and rivers come in. They are most abundant in Lake Pon- chartrain when the Mississippi is high, and discharges some of its water by crevasses or smaller channels into that lake. I have taken fifteen pounds of them before breakfast, off the pier of the New Orleans and Ponchartrain Railroad. With a neat rod, a float, and small hooks, they afford fine sport. The best baits are shrimp, the head and legs taken off, and the hooks baited with only the white meat of the body. They . are not inferior to the White Perch of this latitude, and resemble them much in flavor and firmness of flesh. The creoles of Louisiana sometimes call these fish “ Pattisa ;” this name, however, is applied by them indiscriminately to any small pan-fish. They are taken from seven to twelve inches in length, and sometimes longer; though nine inches is a good average size. 110 AMERICAN AN@LER’S BOOK. OSWEGO BASS. This fish resembles the Black Bass so closely, that few anglers have any appreciation of the difference. It is taken on the same feeding-ground, and in the same way; it leaps from the water when struck, though perhaps not as often as the latter, and.is almost as game; its flesh is said to be inferior to that of the Black Bass. The only difference perceptible to the angler, is the greater bulk of this fish in proportion to its length, a greater pro- tuberance of: belly, and larger head. I counted nine spines and fifteen rays on the dorsal fin, the pectorals had sixteen, anal thirteen, preceded by two short obtuse spines detached from each other. The specimen I examined weighed three pounds, was sixteen inches long thirteen in girth, and five and a half broad. There is cer- tainly a specific difference between the two, though natu- ralists, as far as I have been able to ascertain, have failed to notice a fact which is apparent to anglers. THE PERCH FAMILY. 111 CRAPPIE, SAC-A-LAI, OR CHINKAPIN PERCH. Pomoxis hexacanthus: Cuvier. Form—body oval, much compressed; breadth compared with length as 3 to 7. Lateral line concurrent. with the back. Head small, facial line much depressed; small scales on preopercle, but larger on the opercle, which is without a spine; nostrils small and double; a few denticulations at the lower posterior angle of opercle; branchial rays seven ; dorsal fin seven spines and sixteen soft rays; pectorals twelve; ventrals one spine and five rays; anal large, with six spines and eighteen rays; caudal eighteen rays. There are five indistinct dark lines above the lateral line in the fish of Louisiana, but wanting in those of Illinois; I have found dark transverse markings on the latter. The back is yellowish blue; sides silvery; belly white, tinged with yellow. The pectorals carnate nearest the humeral bone, with a light shade of orange at the tips; ventrals pink, tipped with 112 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. black ; dorsal, anal, and caudal, with dark irregular transverse markings. Teeth on vomer, tongue, and palatines acute, they are small, and recurved on maxillaries. The specific name, Hexacanthus, is significant; its anal fin being armed with six spines, which number of anal spines exceeds that of any other percoid,—at least as far as the writer has observed. This graceful fish is known by the creoles of Louisiana as the “ Sac-a-Lai,” where it is also sometimes called “Chinkapin Perch.” In the neighborhood of St. Louis, Mo., it was called originally “Crappie,” by the old French habitans, and still bears that name. It is known in some of the north-western lakes as “Grass Bass.” It is found in the Atlantic States south of Cape Hatteras, in the bayous in the vicinity of New Orleans, and all the creeks, lakes, and ponds, fed by the over- flow of the Mississippi, from Louisiana to Minnesota. It abounds particularly in the lakelets of what is termed the “ American Bottom,” extending along the Illinois side, oppo- site St. Louis. The lakes, as they are called (though they are more properly ponds), along the alluvial banks of the Mississippi, become very low after a succession of dry seasons, and the fish cease to breed in them; this, with excessive fishing with nets and hooks, almost depopulates those waters; but when a good rise in the river overflows the bottom lands, the ponds are swept of the foul water and replenished with fresh; and, at the same time, restocked with fish. Then it appears almost miraculous where the vast numbers of Crappies, Bass, Perch, and other fish come from, and there is no other way of accounting for this fact, than by supposing that all the lakelets and streams of Wisconsin and Minnesota to the north, have thrown off their surplus production, which they appear to have garnered up. THE PERCH FAMILY. 113 As soon, then, as the water becomes clear in the lakes and ponds, there isa great turnout amongst the fishermen of St. Lonis. But to have good sport with the Crappies, one should get on the right side of Squire Cogswell or of Uncle George Matlack’s boys, who think it a small matter to hitch up their team, and stowing in tent, ice-box, minnow-kettle, frying-pan, and provender for men and horses, are ready at almost any time for a start to Long Lake; or thirty miles away to Mur- dock’s Lake, for Bass and Crappies. Crappies are frequently taken in company with Bass. They love to lie in the brushwood, and about the bushy tops of trees that have fallen in the water; a sultry showery day is most favorable for them. A live minnow, hooked below the back fin, is the best bait ; a substitute for which may be found in a wedge-shaped piece of fish, with the smaller end pendent from the hook; in fish- ing with the latter, the bait should be kept in motion. Worms are objectionable, as they attract the smaller fish, while they are not fancied by Crappies. Shrimp are generally used by the New Orleans anglers. Whatever be the depth of the water, the float (which is generally used) should not be more than three or four feet above the hook. As the mouth of the Crappie is large, a Kirby hook, No. 1 or 0, is to be preferred. The dangerous vicinity of brushwood makes the use of the reel objectiona- ble; for then it is necessary to secure them as soon as pos- sible after being hooked. Holbrook states the extreme length of this fish to be twelve inches. I have seen it, in the vicinity of St. Louis, as long as fifteen, and in one instance, seventeen inches. 8 114 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK YELLOW BARRED PERCH. Perca flavescens: Cuvier. Back yellowish green; sides yellow, with six or seven dark vertical bands; body compressed, elongated; back slightly arched and tapering towards the tail, it is quite slim between the second dorsal and caudal fin; the anal and pectoral fins are of a yellowish red, or bright orange; the first dorsal has twelve or thirteen spinous rays; the second, two spinous and fourteen soft rays; ventrals, one spine and five soft rays; anal, two spines and eight soft rays; caudal, slightly concave, with seventeen rays. There are some beau- tiful tints about this fish. Yellow-barred Perch are found in most of the large north- ern lakes, and with some other species which they closely resemble, as far south as Carolina, inhabiting tidal waters or lakes indiscriminately. They are easily taken with minnows and worms. In trolling the lakes for Black Bass, the angler is frequently annoyed by the great numbers of these Perch, and holds them in small esteem when in search of nobler prey. THE PERCH FAMILY. 115 SUNFISH. Pomotis vulgaris: Cuvimr. There are several species of Pomotis, and even fish of other genera known as “Sunfish.” A diminutive species of the genus Centrachus is constantly called by that name. I have taken a synopsis of a description of the true Sunfish (Pomotis vulgaris), from Holbrook, one of the most exact ichthyologists of our day. Body ovoidal in form, convex above and below, but straight on the belly; color of body brown, with a greenish tint above, with pale blue, waving, horizontal lines on the preo- percle and opercle. Opercular appendix dark, with a bright red blotch on its posterior margin. The dorsal fin has ten spines and eleven rays; pectorals, thirteen rays; ventrals, one spine, and five rays; anal, three spines and ten rays; caudal, seven- teen rays. Mouth small, rather protractile, and armed with small thickly-set teeth. Extreme length eight inches. This beautiful little fish, associated in the minds of all anglers with the first rudiments of a piscatorial education, is known in the Middle and Southern States as the Sunfish or 116 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. “Sunny.” Yankee boys call them “ Punkin Seeds,” or by the more euphonic though appropriate name of “ Kivers ;” prob- ably from their appropriate shape for the cover of a tea-cup or pickle jar. It is a bootless task to describe the manner of taking Sunnies; any incipient angler of twelve summers would beat Theophilus South or Sir Humphrey Davy at catching them. It would be hard to tell the amount of early Saturday morning digging for earth-worms; or how much bark-peeling of old logs for grubs; or how much anxious search for wasps’ nests, they have occasioned. Or how many long sunshiny Saturdays have been spent in search of them; or, when alternat- ing swimming with fishing, and starkly skirting the edge of the mill-pond, how often the youthful “sans culotte” has dropped his bait before their noses, beside the old stump or big rock, and “ whopped them out.” Many an angler will remember the untiring patience with which, in boyhood, he has displayed his worm-covered hook before a half score of these pretty fish, and seen the larger (dua gregis) separate himself from the rest and come towards the bait, sail majestically around, backing and filling, eager, though doubtful of the cheat, and glaring on it with his big permanent eye, and, at last, just as the little angler gives up the game, and is despairingly drawing it away, with a bold rush, the Sunny seizes the barbed hook, and in a trice he is bouncing on the grass, and a hand is on him that relaxes not its grasp till the cruel switch is thrust through his gill. ° Sunfish are extremely predatory in their habits, and the tyrannical little fellow of our aquarium, whom we have dubbed “Captain Walker,” is dearer to us, because he is a representative of those we were accustomed to fish for in our schoolboy days. In preparing their bed for spawning, a pair of Sunfish will THE PERCH FAMILY. 117 clear a place a foot or two in diameter, piling up the gravel, chips, and twigs on the margin; at such times they refuse a bait, remove anything offensive as soon as it drops in, and pugnaciously drive off all intruders. A neat line, small float and hooks, number six to ten, are appropriate tackle. T have a valued friend, who, although long since passed the meridian of life, will still roll up his trousers, and angle for this attractive little fish, with all the ardor of his youthful days. 118 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. BREAM. In the Southern States this fish is called “Bream,” from some fancied likeness to the European fish of that name, which it resembles only in its outline. The true Bream belongs to the peaceable family of Cyprinids, and our rapacious little friend to the Percids. The first attains a weight of five or six pounds, in England, and the latter is seldom taken over eight or nine inches long. It is found in nearly all of the Atlantic States, and generally in the small streams and lake- lets through the whole length of the Mississippi valley, decreasing in size as its range extends northward. It is an excellent pan fish, its flesh being firm, crisp, and well flavored. I have been told that the Red-Bellied Bream is taken of a pound weight in the still waters of North and South Carolina. There are two species of Bream described by Dr. Holbrook. The one he describes as “ Ichthylis incisor,” is the Blue Bream, or Copper-Nosed Bream; it seldom exceeds eight inches in length. The other, “ Ichthylis rubricunda,” is the Red-Bellied Perch, or Red-Tailed Bream. There is yet another Percoid, with brilliant sides and dark green mottled bagk, known as the Goggle-Eye, or War-Mouth Perch. Its shape is different from either of the first named, carrying its oval form no farther than the anal fin, where it falls off suddenly, and is thence very small to the caudal. I have never seen a description of it in any work on ichthy- ology. These three species are frequently called Sunfish, or Sun Perch, and are taken in the same company. THE PERCH FAMILY. 119 Bream are taken with shrimp, minnows, crawfish, red worms, or a wedge-shaped fish-bait. They should be fished for with a slight reed rod, short line, and a No. 8 Kirby hook; the bait from fifteen to twenty-four inches below the float, what- ever be the depth of the water. They haunt the mouths of small branches that put into creeks, ponds, or bayous, and are found around old stumps and logs, and love to lie beneath the scum or drift of sluggish waters. In fishing the bayous in the South, the angler frequently pushes aside the light drift with the end of his rod, and drops his bait into an opening not larger than the crown of his hat, and in a short time has captured a hatful of them. They are the delight of all juveniles; a little urchin of ten years frequently catching a string of them as long as himself, and when Bass are not on the feed, they are the dernier ressort of the more ambitious angler. I have taken all three of these species in Bayou La Branch, about thirty miles north of New Orleans, on the Jackson Railroad, going and returning the same day. With a pleasant companion, a bottle of claret, ice, and cold fowl, the day would pass pleasantly enough. In the month of April the black- berry bushes that grew along the banks of the bayou were laden with fruit, and when we could not reach them from the pirogue, we were sometimes tempted to go ashore for them, at the risk of meeting an alligator in its journey from the bayou to its nest in the canebrake. It was a dismal water, with long weepers of gray moss drooping from the trees; and when a solitary fisherman paddled his canoe over the dark, waveless bayou, his form in the distance would suggest the idea of Old Charon. It certainly was a river of “ sticks,” if not of Acheron. Will I ever wet my seagrass line in Bayou La Branch again? J think not. 120 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. PIKE PERCH. OHIO SALMON. Lucioperca Americana: CuvIER. Of the many misnomers given to fish, that of “Salmon,” as applied to this, is the most inappropriate. It has as few of the characteristics of the true Salmon as the Southern Bass has of the Trout. Still we are not disposed to find fault with rustic anglers because, in the absence of scientific knowledge, they have given what seemed to them the most fitting name for it. Anglers who look into books on ichthyology are at a loss to know why this fish, with its elongated body and general appearance so unlike the Perch, should have been placed in the family Percide. The scientific name “ Lucioperca” (Pike Perch), adopted by Cuvier, indicates its affinity to the Pike as well as the Perch. Recent ichthyologists, however, amongst whom is Mr. Theodore Gill, are in favor of placing it in a sub-family, “ Percine.” Having no specimen at hand, we copy from Mr. Gill’s “Synopsis of the sub-family Percing,” and his description of this genus :— “Body slender, elongate, fusiform, covered with scales arranged in oblique rows. Head semiconical, quite broad, with cheeks and opercles generally covered with scales; isolated patches of scales on the sides of the posterior part of the head ; rest of the head covered with naked skin. Pre- opercle serrated. Opercle armed with from one to five spines. THE PERCH FAMILY. . 121 Dorsal fins two, the first supported by from twelve to fourteen spines. This genus is peculiar to fresh-water streams, rivers, and lakes of North America.” There are several species of this genus found in Europe, where it is known as the Sandre. I have seen this fish as far south as Memphis, Tennessee. It is common, though not numerous, in all the tributaries of the Ohio and Mississippi. It is taken in Lake Champlain, where it is called Pike, in contradistinction to the Pickerel found there. It is remarkable that the Susquehanna and Juniata are the only rivers on the eastern slope of the Alle- ghanies where it is found; but it is not as abundant as it once was. There also, as west of the mountains, it is called “Salmon.” Its flesh, which is perfectly white, is highly esteemed by the residents along the Ohio River. It is said that it does not bite freely at a bait. When fished for, a live minnow is generally used; a float and large hook are required in still- fishing. It is sometimes taken in trolling with the spoon in Lake Champlain. It is taken in the Alleghany from one to four pounds in weight, by trolling with a minnow at the foot of the rapids. 122 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. BUFFALO PERCH. WHITE PERCH OF THE OHIO. Abloden grunniens: RaFinEsQue. Although this fish is known by the above common names, it is not a species of Percidew, but belongs to an entirely different family, that of Scienide. It is the.only Scienoid found in our rivers, and is confined to those on the western side of the Alleghanies, which flow into the Gulf of Mexico. I have placed it amongst the species of this family, only because it has the common name of Perch. Rafinesque’s description of this fish, which was published nearly half a century ago, is quite interesting. I quote from his work on the fishes of the Ohio :— “Entirely silvery, upper lip longer, lateral line curved upwards at the base, bent in the middle and straight poste- riorly, tail lunate, first dorsal fin with nine rays, the first very short, the second with thirty-five rays, the first spiny and short. “The vulgar names of this fish, are White Perch, Buffalo Perch, Grunting Perch, Bubbling Fish, Bubbler, and Muscle Hater. It is one of the largest and best found in the Ohio, reaching sometimes to the length of three feet, and the weight of thirty pounds, and affording a delicate food. It is also one of the most common, being found all over the Ohio, and even the Monongahela, and Allegheny, as also in the Mississippi, Tennessee, Cumberland, Kentucky, Wabash, Miami, and all the large tributary streams, where it is permanent, since it is found in all seasons except in winter. In Pittsburgh it appears again in February. It feeds on many species of THE PERCH FAMILY. 123 fishes; suckers, catfishes, sunfishes, &., but principally on the muscles, or various species of the bivalve genus Unio, so common in the Ohio, whose thick shells it is enabled to crush by means of its large throat teeth. The structure of those teeth is very singular and peculiar; they are placed like paving-stones on the flat bone of the lower throat in great numbers, and of different sizes; the largest, which are as big as a man’s nails, are always in the centre; they are inverted in faint alveoles, but not at all connected with the bone: their shape is circular and flattened, the inside always hollow -with a round hole beneath: in the young fishes they are rather convex, and evidently radiated and mamillar, while in the old fishes they become smooth, truncate, and shining white. These teeth and their bone are common in many museums, where they are erroneously called teeth of the Buffalo-fish, or of a Catfish. I was deceived so far by this mistake, and by the repeated assertions of several persons, as to ascribe those teeth to the Buffalo-fish, which I have since found to be a real catostomus; this error I now correct with pleasure. “A remarkable peculiarity of this fish consists in the strange grunting noise which it produces, and from which I have derived its specific name. It is intermediate between the dumb grunt of a hog and the single croaking noise of the bull frog; that grunt is only repeated at intervals and not in quick succession. “This fish is either taken in the seine or with the hook and line; it bites easily, and affords fine sport to the fisher- men; it spawns in the spring, and lays a great quantity of eggs.” . The fish here described, though quite common in the Ohio River, my own observation leads me to suppose is compara- tively scarce in the Mississippi, above its junction with the former river. 124 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. At the time of the Sauve Crevasse, in the Mississippi above New Orleans, about fifteen years since, it found its way into Lake Ponchartrain, and thence into Lake Borgne, and the brackish and salt waters along the Gulf coast, where it is now permanent. It is very prolific and has improved in its flavor and appearance, having an increased silvery brightness, is more elongated in form, and of more graceful proportions. These changes are no doubt owing to the greater abundance of molluscs and crustacea found in its new habitat. It has the true characteristics of the Scienoids, which are mollusc- eating fishes, indigenous to shoal salt water. It is not very unlike the Croaker in shape; it makes a similar noise, and is sometimes taker in company with that fish. The pharyn- gal bones, with their peculiar crushing teeth, closely resem- bles those of the Drum-fish. When young this is one of the most beautiful of the Acanthopterrt. I have never seen it larger than five pounds in the New Orleans market,—there it is generally of a good size for the pan. In the Ohio it attains four or five times that size, ten or twelve pounds not being uncommon. This is no doubt the fish referred to in the “American Angler’s Guide,” (page 220), in these words :—“ OF THE CaTFIsH.—This is the common fish of the western waters, and is taken by western sportsmen by squid and fly-trolling, and affords capital amusement. They take their name from the noise they make, similar to the purring of a cat.” I have never heard them called “Catfish” along the Ohio or Mississippi,—that name being applied only to the big- mouthed fish, known all over the South and West by that appellation; they do not take a squid or fly. Mr. Brown has doubtless been imposed upon, by some person addicted to telling “fish stories.” CHAPTER V. THE PIKE FAMILY. “@REEN air thy waters—green as bottle glass They lay stretched thar; Fine Muscalongy and Oswego Bass Are ketched thar; Wonst the red Injuns thar took their delights, Fisht, fit and bled; Now the inhabitants is mostly whites With nary red.” From “ A Node to Lake Ontario,” found in the “ K N Pepper Papers,”—quoted from memory. CHAPTER V. THE PIKE FAMILY—ESOCIDA. Rewarxs on THE Pike Famity. Mascalonge pictured by Ouvier.—Eu- ropean species.—American species.—The Garfish; manner of taking it—Dr. Bethune’s remarks on Pikes.—Their introduction into Eng- land.—Pliny’s Pike.—Gesner’s Pike. Tae Great Lake Pickers. Esox lucioides.—Trolling from a boat for Pickerel. Tue Mascatonce. sox estor.—Angling for Mascalonge. Tax Ponp Pixe, sox reticulatus.—Pike-fishing.—Trolling for Pike with the gorge-hook.—Pike-fishing in Eastern Virginia. Tue Great Buve Pixs. Tue Lirtie Pixs or Lone Istanp. Tue Srreakep PiKe or tHE On10.—Story told about a Pike taken in the Kanawha. In Cuvier and Valenciennes’ great work, the only fish of this family I find pictured is our Mascalonge, Hsox estor. The figure is incorrectly colored, and in its markings re- sembles the Great Northern Pickerel, Hsox lucioides, rather than the fish it is intended to represent. There are but few species of Pikes found in Hurope. Hsox lucius, which is common both to England and the Continent, is a handsome fish and grows to a large size. I think it quite likely that there are American species of this family which have not yet been described. De Kay, Richardson, and Holbrook, jointly, do not mention more than six or seven. Besides the Mascalonge and Great Northern (127) 128 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Pickerel, I am impressed with the idea that there are two other species in Lake Ontario. The large fish called the “Blue Pike” or “Black Pike,” found in Pennsylvania and Virginia, west of the Alleghanies, which equals the Masca- longe in size, and another species found in the Ohio and its tributaries, I have never seen properly described or pictured. Frank Forester, in his remarks on the Hsocide, assigns the Great Garfish of the Southern and Western States to this family, calling it “ sow osseus.” There can be no generic affinity between the two. The Gar (Lepidosteus), as I have remarked on a preceding page, is one of the few representa- tives of the ancient order of Ganoids remaining at the present ; while the Pikes, according to Hugh Miller, were not ushered into existence until perhaps millions of years after. Even if they had been cotemporaneous in Creation, the two orders, being so entirely different, would not admit of such classifi- cation. In the waters along the Gulf of Mexico, Gars are frequently an annoyance to the fisherman; they appear sometimes in numbers, scaring away other fish, taking off one’s bait, and often cutting the line with their sharp teeth, while there is hardly a possibility of hooking them in their hard bony jaws. I have tried frequently to secure one, but was never success- ful. A friend has since told me of a way of taking them, in which he says the negroes are more fortunate; he describes it thus:—A noose is made by passing a string through a fish of suitable size, say of seven or eight inches, lengthwise, which can be done with a long baling-needle, and then through a loop at the other end of the string, where it is tied to the tip of along pole or stout reed. The fish is adjusted so as to form the base of a triangle, the slip-knot being at the upper angle, nearest the pole. This triangular snare is then displayed on the. surface of the water, and dabbled up and THE PIKE FAMILY. 129 down to attract the notice of the Gar, which soon appears, and as it seizes the fish crosswise (which is its custom) it runs its long upper jaw or rather its bill into the noose, when the string is tightened by lifting the pole, and the Gar drawn ashore. I have heard it said that the Alligator Gar has been taken as long as eight feet. Dr. Bethune in his notes to his edition of Walton, says: “The name sox is first used by Pliny, who describes a great fish in the Rhine, which attained the size of a thousand pounds (!!!), was caught with a hook attached to a chain (catenato hamo), and drawn out by oxen (bowm jugis).” Of its introduction into England he remarks: “The Pike is said to have been brought into England about the time of the Reformation, according to a distich erroneously quoted by Walton, when speaking of the Carp, from Baker’s Chronicles (p. 817, ed. 1665), where it is, ‘Turkeys, Carps, Hoppes, Piccarel, and Beer, Came into England all in one year ;’ i. e., the fifteenth year of Henry VIII. This is, however, all error. Pike or Pickerel were the subject of legal regulations in the time of Edward I. Turkeys were brought from America about 1521. Hops were introduced about 1524.” The Doctor says that Pliny, in his description of the thou- sand pounder, wrote only from hearsay. In alluding to Gesner’s Pike, he quotes Bloch, the ichthyologist, who says: “This Pike was fifteen feet long, and weighed three hundred and fifty pounds. His skeleton was for a long time preserved at Manheim.” Pickering, in his Piscatorial Reminiscences, speaks of a Pike killed (caught) in Loch Spey that weighed one hundred and forty-six pounds. Of another of twenty-eight pounds, in 9 130 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. which the cook found a black ribband and keys. Quoting Dodsley’s Register, 1765, he says: “In emptying a pool which had not been fished for ages, at Lilleshall Lime Works near New Port, an enormous Pike was found, weighing one hundred and seventy pounds.” It is said that Pikes will eat all the smaller fish in a con- fined pond, and then the larger will devour the smaller, until at last only the largest remains, a solitary proprietor of the domain. ; After being so amiable as to quote the foregoing “fish stories,” without openly expressing a doubt as to the truth of them, it would hardly be fair in the reader to doubt the story of a large Pike on a subsequent page, which was told to me by the hostler of a hotel in Wheeling, twenty years ago. The term “Pickerel” is applied to all fish of this genus, with the exception of the Mascalonge, by the people of New York and the Eastern States. In the Middle States they are called “ Pike,” and in Virginia and further South they go by the name of “ Jackfish.” THE GREAT NORTHERN LAKE PICKBREL. THE PIKE FAMILY. 181 GREAT LAKE PICKEREL. Esox lucioides. The body of this fish presents the characteristics of all the Pike Family, carrying the breadth of body well aft, even to the anal fin; its section is almost rectangular. Length of head compared with body as seven and a half to twenty-eight; breadth one-seventh; back one-twelfth. Color, dark bluish-green above, with a lighter tinge of the same on the sides. Belly white. The markings are white, irregularly shaped on the back, but rectangular on the sides, and twice or thrice as long as they are wide. The head is long, depressed between the eyes, with a slight upward curve of the snout. The under jaw has also an upward curve, and projects beyond the snout; it is armed on each side with seven long sharp teeth projecting forward, but with the points curved somewhat back. The teeth of the upper jaw are shorter afd inverted. The palatine teeth are gradually larger towards the vomer. The vomer, pharynx, and branchial arches have teeth which are shorter, but not less keen. The eye has its posterior margin nearly half way between the snout and angle of opercle, and is slightly below the facial line; its diameter is about one-tenth the length of the head. The specimen I examined exhibited a deficiency in the number of fin-rays as compared with Frank Forester’s de- 132 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. scription. There are fourteen branchial rays. The dorsal fin, which is one-eighth the length of the body, has eighteen rays; pectorals fifteen ; ventrals(midway between snout and end of the caudal), fifteen rays; anal (slightly posterior to the dorsal), fifteen. The caudal is bilobed, rather than forked; it has eighteen rays reaching the posterior margin, and two or three stout rudimentary rays above and below them; the upper lobe of the caudal is the longer. For want of a better artist, I was induced ‘five or six years since, when on a visit to the Thousand Isles, to try my hand for the first time on this fish; and with the aid of an inch measure—for it is a purely mechanical production—made as correct a drawing asI could. The figure at the head of this article is a reduced copy of it. As I had never seen the pecu- liar markings of this fish correctly drawn, I took some pains to do so. My description is from one taken at the same time. This fish is known about the Thousand Isles as the Marsh . Pickerel, and is found more generally in the coves and on the flats than in the deep water. The “Channel Pickerel,” which I suppose to be another species, is a more symmetrical fish, with less fulness of body between the dorsal fin and the tail. It has a yellow instead of a leaden tinge. The markings are three times as numerous and about one-third the size, though of the same shape as those of the Marsh Pickerel; it is found generally in deep water. There is a third variety, which is shorter in the body than either of these, but the color and markings the same as the Marsh Pickerel; some of them, though, are the shape of the letter L, with the lower limb elongated. It is called the “Short Pickerel.” The larger species (the Marsh Pickerel) grows to the weight of twenty-five pounds; it is even said that it has been taken as high as thirty-eight. It is common in the St. Law- rence and Lake Ontario, and all of their connecting waters, \ THE PIKE FAMILY. 1383 and in Lake Champlain. It has been introduced into Lake George within the last seven or eight years. Pickerel are taken almost entirely by trolling with some artificial spinning bait; of these the murderous implement called the spoon is in general use. A stout trolling-rod of ten feet, a multiplying-reel with a hundred yards of plaited-silk line, and the spinning bait, attached by one or two swivels, completes the troller’s outfit. A gaff is sometimes used; but as the fish, when he is drawn up to the boat, has generally two or three hooks in his jaws, it is not required. Alexandria Bay, near the Thousand Isles of the St. Law- rence, is a favorite resort for those who fish for Pickerel. In trolling for them, when the angler takes his seat in the boat, he generally finds his oarsman supplied with one or two stout cedar poles, which by your permission he will rig out on one or both sides, like studding-sail booms. Trailing from each of these poles, there will be thirty or forty yards of strong hemp line, with a spoon attached by a swivel; and while he looks after them, he leaves you to the enjoyment of your jointed rod, your multiplying-reel, and your pipe, in the stern. When a fish is hooked the boatman slacks his speed, keeping easy way to prevent the lines on the other rods from becoming entangled, or the spoons from sinking to the bottom. If the fish be on the line attached to the native rod, you throw the point forward, grasp the line, and pull in the victim hand over hand. As he nears the boat, he will perhaps raise his head out of the water and rattle the spoon (in the oarsman’s vernacular, “ring the bell”). By the time you get him alongside he is generally docile; when you put your hand over and grasp him by the nape of the neck, bring him on board, disengage the hooks, give him a few taps on the head with a stick kept in the boat for that purpose, and the drama is played out. -When you strike a fish with your 184 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. own rod, if you request it, the boatman will cease rowing, draw his lines in, and let you fight your adversary in your own way, which after all is not much of a fight, and after a steady strain on your rod and reel, he is drawn in and knocked on the head, as just described. The number and weight of Pickerel taken in a day’s fishing in this way is considerable; though I cannot see that the wear and tear of fine tackle expended on them is justified by trolling for them, with any other than that used by the natives. But to one to whom angling is really “the contemplative man’s recreation,” the fairy boat, the clear deep water, and the beauty of the Thousand Isles, are suggestive of the far-off times, when the Indian in his bark canoe, the early explorer, the devout Jesuit missionary, and hardy voyageurs passed over the great inland seas and their connecting waters; and strange legends, traditions, and history almost forgotten come up before him. THE PIKE FAMILY. 135 MASCALONGE. Esox estor: Cuvier. * Body elliptical, elongated; section oval, not quadrangular as in the Pickerel. Color green, with a tint of steel blue on the back, shading lighter and into a bluish pearl color on the sides; the body is covered with round or oval spots of much darker color. Belly white; the whole body has a pearly lustre. Head not quite one-fourth of its length, and very slender, causing it to appear much longer in proportion to length of body than it really is; the skull depressed between the eyes, and the profile concave between the eyes and snout; upper part of preopercle and opercle covered with small deep green brilliant scales, those on opercle are the larger. Eyes large, near the top of the head, and midway between snout and angle of opercle. Irides light yellow. Cheeks and gill- covers resembling gray pearl, with four or five clouded spots on preopercle, and one or two on opercle. Upper jaw broad, verging to a point; under jaw terminated with an upward curve. Branchial rays seventeen, the series extending high up against the opercle. The arrangement of teeth similar, but not quite the same as in the Pickerel. Fins all covered with dark spots half the size of those on the body. I counted in my specimen seventeen rays in the pectoral fins, which are ‘pinnate in shape, aud situated beneath the extremity of the gill-cover. Ventrals slightly posterior to its mid-length, with twelve rays. Anal seventeen. Dorsal two-thirds length 4 136 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. from the snout, twenty-two rays. The caudal, which is deeply lunate, has twenty-eight rays; the six in the centre are branched. The specimen from which Frank Forester’s drawing was taken must have been unusually stout; a fish of eighteen pounds should measure over three feet, instead of two and a half. My representation is a drawing of a smaller specimen ; like the picture of the Great Northern Pickerel, it is an attempt of my own, which, though rude, is mathematically correct in its proportions. The Mascalonge differs materially from the Pickerel de- scribed on a preceding page; the head is extremely small, a section of the body presenting almost an oval; the mouth is smaller, not opening so far back; the color of its body much more silvery, the spots being dark instead of white, also of different shape, and much larger than in the Pickerel. The tail of the Pickerel is bilobed; while that of the Mascalonge is deeply lunate. It is said that this fish is found in the Wisconsin and Upper Mississippi, about the Falls of St. Anthony. It is generally sought for in the upper waters of the St. Lawrence, and the smaller lakes on the Canada side, by anglers from the Eastern cities. From all accounts they were never numerous; the angler who captures four or five of fair size in a day’s fishing at Alexandria Bay, is considered in luck. Rice Lake, farther west on the Canada side, is said to afford them in some abundance, though twelve or fifteen of six or seven pounds weight is reported to be a good day’s fishing even there. This fish is said to attain a weight of sixty or seventy pounds, but generally it does not exceed the size of the Blue Pike taken in the rivers and small lakes of Western Penn- sylvania. Its size varies from three to thirty pounds; a few have been taken as high as forty; one or two instances only THE MASCALONGE. THE PIKE FAMILY. 137 ure spoken of where the weight was as much as seventy pounds. Angling for Mascalonge is the same as for Pickerel, the spoon being almost universally used. They are active, and have more pluck than the large Pickerel; though any angler who holds a stout trolling-rod, with a good multiplying- reel and a hundred yards of good line, if he is cool and waits assiduously on his enemy, is sure of him. I had rather trust to a good grip on the nape of the neck, than to a gaff-hook in getting one into the boat. I know of old anglers who have experienced better things, who make long excursions in pursuit of Mascalonge, who will sit on a cushioned seat with a cushioned back in the stern of a boat, and suffer themselves to be pulled about all day, with a trolling-rod extended from each side. I never could appre- “ciate this inactive mode of taking fish, which is little better than cockney punt-fishing, and does not require one-tenth the skill. If spoon-fishing had been practised in Maelzel’s day, and that ingenious man had been an angler, no doubt he would have constructed an automaton Pickerel-fisher. 138 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE POND PIKE, OR COMMON PIKE. The smaller species of Pikes are confined almost exclusively to the streams on the eastern slope of the Alleghanies. There is much resemblance in their general appearance. I give the wood-cut at the head of this article, as a general representative. of the whole. _ The Pond Pike is not often taken above five pounds, its average being less than a pound and a half. They are seldom if ever captured by trolling with a spoon; I suppose, for the reason that they are not fished for in that way. The live bait is used in still-fishing, when the Pike generally takes it near the bank, where he is in the habit of looking. for small fish. In fishing a pond, where there are water- lilies, grass, or other aquatic vegetation, it is generally from a boat, with a long light rod, the bait a minnow, frog’s leg, a piece of the Pike’s belly, or a strip of pork. The Pike of England is larger than our common Pond Pike, and doubtless more worthy of the elaborate tackle and scientific angling used in its capture. And, although there is a prevalent indisposition amongst our anglers to learn any- thing out of a book, there are still a few who have profited by the lessons taught in English books, and use the leaded gorge-hook, with much advantage over the usual manner of THE PIKE FAMILY. 189 fishing for them here. The tackle and the mode of taking’ them, described with so much minuteness by Hofland and Salter, are seldom resorted to in this country. Our anglers having so many fish amongst the Perch and Salmon families, and salt-water species, affording an infinite deal more sport, the Pike of our ponds are considered fish of secondary or third-rate importance. When fishing a pond from a boat, the snood should have two hooks, the smaller about two inches above the larger; the end of the bait or head of the minnow being held by the upper, while the lower hook is passed through it mid- way. When the Pike takes the bait he should be allowed to run ashort distance; the line should then be tightened and the angler strike, and get the fish into the boat as soon as possible, never allowing him any slack line. TROLLING FOR PIKE WITH A GorGE-Hoox.—Where there are deep holes close in by the bank, trolling with the gorge- hook is far more successful than any other mode. A good bass rod of twelve feet, with metallic guides and tip, and an easy-running reel with forty yards of plaited-silk line, are then required: a tin bait-box, carried at one’s side like a powder-flask, is best to hold the minnows used for bait; they should have bran, coarse meal, or saw-dust put in with them, to prevent their rubbing or bruising. A piece of gimp of twelve inches is attached by a box-swivel to the line, and a hook-swivel is fastened at the other end of the gimp, for the purpose of taking off or putting on the bait after it is placed on the GORGE-HOOK. 140 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. The disgorging-hook and baiting-needle are considered superfluous by American trollers, a forked stick being used to disengage the bait when it is far down the fish’s throat. In putting on the minnow for a bait, the twisted wire to which the leaded hook is fastened is put—small end foremost of course—into the mouth of the bait, and worked along the backbone until it comes out at the tail, when it is drawn entirely through, the lead lying in the belly of the minnow. The tail and back fins are then nipped off with a knife, or with the thumb and finger-nails, and the minnow bent slightly near the tail to insure its spinning or twirling, and attached to the gimp by the hook-swivel. In trolling, the minnow is drawn through the water tail foremost. If you cast much among weeds and grass, it is necessary to tie the tail of the bait to the wire of the gorge-hook, with a few turns of coarse thread ; it is perhaps better in all cases. English anglers are sometimes so nice as even to sew up the mouth of the minnow. With a line of convenient length, not longer than the rod, approach the bank carefully, casting close in shore, dropping the bait in softly, and by successive short pulls, raising and lowering the point of your rod, draw it towards you. You will notice that as you lower the point of the rod, the bait shoots forward and downward with a spiral motion, assisted in its twirling by the easy turning of the swivels and its having been bent, and that it spins or twirls in the same way as it is drawn towards you. When you have drawn in the bait sufficiently near you by these short pulls, raise it gently from the water, and cast and draw as before. If your bait is not taken near the bank, extend your cast up and down, and across towards the opposite bank, and towards the water-lilies, brush-wood, and under-bushes, and around and about old stumps, being careful not to be caught by roots or brush. THE PIKE FAMILY. 141 As the length of the cast is increased, draw a proportionate length of line from the reel, holding part of it in a coil in your left hand, and letting it go as you cast; the impetus acquired by the leaded bait will not only take the coil held in your hand, but an additional quantity from the reel, if it runs freely. The extra length of line is recovered by winding up; or gathering at each raising, and lowering of the point of the rod, a foot or two at a time, with the left hand, holding it in coils ready for the next cast. It is said that English Pike-fishers are able to cast thirty yards or more, when they cannot approach a desirable spot. It is well to draw the bait well home between each cast, as a Pike will occasionally follow it for some distance, when he isnot hungry, as a cat does a mouse, and seize it only when he finds that it is about to escape, as you draw it from the water. When your bait is arrested, or you feel a tug, lower the point of the rod, and give the fish as much line as he wants; he will take it to his haunt, or some place near at hand, and swallow, or, as the English anglers say, “pouch it;” for the Pike seizes his prey crosswise in his long jaws, and taking it to his haunt, turns it and swallows it head foremost. As this requires some moments or perhaps minutes, the angler is kept in hopeful suspense, and in the meanwhile his line should remain perfectly slack: but as soon as the fish has pouched the bait, the hook pricking the sides of his stomach, causes him uneasiness and he starts off; then give him a yard or so to run, and winding up the slazk strike sharply, for in nine cases out of ten he is hooked beyond all peradventure of escape. If he is a fish of moderate size, reel him in and lift him ashore, or catching hold of the gimp trace, throw him out. If he is large and requires line, give it grudgingly, and keep him away from all places that would endanger your tackle, or enable him to get your line foul; if you do so, there is 149 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. little chance of losing him, for he pulls as steady as a Conestoga wagon-horse, and knows few of the wiles of the Trout or Bass. If, after seizing your bait and making his first run, he appears long in pouching it, you may feel him gently, by winding up the slack slowly and bearing on him slightly. If he is still there, he will resist or signify his dissent by a shake or another tug, when the line must be again slacked, and more time given him. On certain kinds of days a Pike will seize the bait, make his first run and then drop or only chew it, as if he was overfed or indifferent. Then it is better to use hooks, as described for pond-fishing on a preceding page, putting the smaller through the lips of the minnow, and the larger through the back, just behind the dorsal fin, and fish as there directed. Much depends on the day in Pike-fishing, some persons say even on the quarter the moon may be in. Ona cloudy day, if not too warm, I have found them to take a bait from sunrise to ten o’clock, or from four in the afternoon until dark, though sometimes they are on the feed all day. The Pike spawns in this latitude in the latter part of February, or early in March, or directly after the ice is gone, and soon recovers condition. He may be taken by snap- fishing at almost any season after spawning. Trolling with the gorge-hook is not successful until later in the season— from August until November is considered the best time, or even later if the weather is warm. They may be taken all winter in open weather by trolling, and numbers of them are caught by fishing through holes cut in the ice. Trolling from the bank is the most sportsmanlike way of taking the Pike; and, as will be observed, is very different from trolling or rather trailing the bait from a boat, as it is» rowed along. Still, after one has taken the magnificent THE PIKE FAMILY. 148 Striped and Fresh-water Bass, Trout, Weakfish, Barb, and Red- fish through the summer, at the end of a long line, he is apt to think trolling for Pike stupid sport, notwithstanding the importance attached to it by English anglers. There is one recommendation to it, however; it is apt to fill the creel, in parts of the country where diminutive streams and ponds furnish no other than small or worthless fish. It is scarcely necessary to say to a sagacious angler, that the larger the run of Pike, the larger the bait to be used, and as a consequence the larger the hook. When the fish are small—from three-quarters to a pound and a quarter—a minnow the size of one’s little finger is large enough; if they run two pounds and upward, a roach or chub of four or five inches is better. A pike of four pounds will readily take a roach of six inches. Pike-fishing is enjoyed much by the anglers of Virginia, between tidewater and Blue Ridge, in the fall of the year. The usual method is to bait one or more holes for Carp, as they are called there (though truly Suckers). A half-peck | or so of coarse corn meal is made into a stiff dough, and thrown in at intervals of two or three days, for a week or so, to attract the Carp, which are fished for before breakfast, and late in the afternoon. This food also draws the minnows, and the small fry of course attract the “Jackfish,” as the Virginians call the Pike. Early on some frosty morning, then, the angler of the Old Dominion may be seen wending his way to a baited hole, preceded by a negro boy, with four or half a dozen pine poles on his shoulder, and a chunk of corn bread in his hand, the use of which I will mention anon. When he gets to the baited hole, he proceeds deliberately to bait his Carp-hooks with earth-worms, and drops them quietly in, some distance out from the shore. Then with a small hook and line he 144 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. catches his minnows, baits his Jack-hooks (which are sus- pended to the ends of stout lines two feet or so below large corks), and ranges them in a line close to the bank, where the Pike are most likely to lie in ambush for the minnows, as Captain Walker used to wait in the chaparral for the “ Greasers,” down on the Rio Grande. After he sets his poles he then “sets himself,” on a stump, or log, or on a bench made for that purpose, and for the use of all anglers who fish that hole, and waits patiently for a bite. When there is a tremulous motion of his Carp-corks, the angler shows a disposition to rise, as if to discuss an “ abstract question ;” but if a school of minnows skip suddenly along the surface, mention of the John Brown raid could not arouse him so thoroughly—Jaek are about! his middle cork sails away and disappears; he gives him a little time, then pulls with all his might, and the fish is landed. He places the toe of his boot under the abdominal fins, and sends Johannis Hsox some ten paces farther inland, and leaves him flouncing and rustling in the dry leaves. Then baiting his hook again, he “sets his pole,” and takes his seat on the bench to wait for another bite. If there are no signs of Jack, after awhile he crumbles up a little piece of the corn bread his black adjutor has brought along, strews it over the water to attract the minnows, and sits down again, perhaps rising occasionally to land a Carp— but look out! the minnows skip again! there, the cork nearest the alders! jerk—he has missed him—he pulled too soon. Perhaps he “cusses” a little, but baits his hook again, resets his pole, and once more takes his seat on the bench. If the Jack bite well, he resigns the capture of the less noble game—the Suckers—to his henchman, who has been standing all the time with his hands in his pockets, rubbing one foot over the other to keep them warm, and shivering as a negro THE PIKE FAMILY. 145 boy always will on a frosty morning, whether he is cold or not. As the day advances, he wiles the minnows with the crumbs of corn bread, and the minnows attract the Jack- fish. At last, after more or less sport, he strings his fish on a dogwood switch, hands them to Csesar, goes home, takes a honey dram, or, if he has taken the temperance pledge lately, compromises on a mug of persimmon beer, which he calls “36.30,” and sits down to breakfast; and such a breakfast as is seldom found outside of the Old Dominion. On such excursions, when I have been with “the Major,” minnows would be scarce, and the Jackfish would keep their hiding-places; then with my trolling-rod and gorge-hook, I have forced from him acknowledgment of the superiority of science over native aptness. But he always viewed trolling in the light of some new-fangled “Northern heresy ;” and when I have attempted to drill him in my tactics, he would make a few casts and return to his big cork lines; and still adheres to their use with as much pertinacity as he does to the “ political teachings of Thomas Jefferson,” or the doctrine of State Rights. I would not imply from the foregoing, that the anglers of the Old Dominion are solitary or unsocial in their sports; on the contrary they are gregarious, and consequently convivial. A fishing-party, if stationary, sometimes lasts all day, and is apt to draw an occasional passer-by; when a game of “ seven- up” or a tune on a fiddle is interluded. “The Major” says, a cockfight sometimes varies the amusements of the day; and that he has even known a quarter race to come off in an adjoining lane, by way of finale to the day’s sport. [Since penning the foregoing sketch of an old friend, the besom of war has swept over the broad fields along the upper Rappahannock, where he lived; crops have been destroyed, 10 a 146 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. farm stock driven off, servants scattered, and many a hos- pitable home, that was open to all comers, has been desolated. I prefer not altering what I have written, for I love to think of that part of the country and its people as they were, and indulge the hope that when our Union is restored, I shall again behold “the Major” as I last saw him after returning trom Jack-fishing—warming himself before his big log-fire.] THE PIKE FAMILY. 147 GREAT BLUE PIKE. This fish has a broad short snout, which is very different from the ducklike bill of the Pond Pike; its head resembling what one might imagine the produce of the bulldog and greyhound would be. It has a formidable array of broad lancet-looking teeth. I have the head of a specimen, sent from Meadville, Pennsylvania, in a jar of alcohol, which measures twenty-five inches in circumference; after large slices of it being cut off, to get it into the jar. Mr. Wilson, who keeps the gun and fishing-tackle store in Chestnut Street below Fifth, Philadelphia, has the dried head of a Pike of the same species in his window, with its two rows of teeth all complete; it is worth examining. This fish is found in the lakelets and in the streams that are tributary to the Ohio, in the south-western part of New York, Pennsylvania, and North-western Virginia. A friend tells me it takes a live bait nine or ten inches long, and pulls like a Shetland pony. It has been taken weighing as much as eighty pounds in Connaught Lake in Bradford County, Pennsylvania. THE LITTLE POND PIKE OF LONG ISLAND. In olden times on Long Island there was a small Pike which bothered the fly-fisher a great deal, rising at the fly and insisting on being caught. Frank Forester describes it at length in his book as Hsow fasciatus. o 148 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE STREAKED PIKE OF THE OHIO. Esox vittatus: RaFINESQuE. Of the Pikes found in the Ohio, Rafinesque says :—“ There are several species of Pikes in the Ohio, Mississippi, Wabash, Kentucky, &. I have not yet been able to observe them thoroughly. I have, however, procured correct accounts, and figures of two species; but there are more. They appear to belong to a peculiar subgenus distinguished by a long dorsal fin, a forked tail, and the abdominal fins anterior, being removed from the vent. It may be called Picorellus. The French settlers of the Wabash and Missouri call them Piconeau, and the American settlers Pikes or Pickerels. They are permanent but rare fishes, retiring however in deep waters in winter. They prefer the large streams, are very voracious, and grow to a large size. They prey on all the other fishes except the Garfishes, &c. They are easily taken with the hook, and afford a very good food, having a delicate flesh. “STREAKED PIKE. ZHsox vittatus. Brochet raye. “White, with two blackish longitudinal streaks on each side, back brownish ; jaws nearly equal, very obtuse, eyes large and behind the mouth; dorsal fins longitudinal between the abdominal and anal fins; tail forked. “This fish is rare in the Ohio, (although it has been seen at Pittsburgh), but more common in the Wabash aud Upper THE PIKE FAMILY. 149 Mississippi. It is called Piconeaw or Picaneau by the Cana: dians and Missourians. It reaches the length of from three to five feet. The pectoral and abdominal fins are trapezoidal, the anal and dorsal longitudinal, with many rays and nearly equal. It is sometimes called Jack or Jackfish. Lateral line straight.” I saw an account, and an engraving of a fish of this species in some scientific journal a few years since, at the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, and fully intended to have referred to it in this work; but on looking for it recently— having forgotten the title of the periodical—much to my regret I was unable to find it, even with the assistance of the librarian. I have been told by Kentucky anglers that this Pike takes a Chub or a Sucker a foot long, and prefers a bait of that size to a smaller one; and that in setting night-lines for it, the- usual way is to go in a boat to pools which it frequents, and tie the line to the limb of a tree, extending over the water. When the fish takes the bait, the branch giving, allows him to run a little with his prey, and when he is securely hooked, it also acts as a rod, yielding, though still holding him. Miraculous stories are told of the size of a Pike found in the Kanawha and other tributaries of the Ohio, below Wheel- ing, Virginia, which must be of the species referred to above. If these accounts are to be credited, it is the largest Pike ever taken with hook and line—excepting, always, Pliny’s and old Gesner’s. One of the stories alluded to, I heard many years ago, when detained at Wheeling, Virginia, waiting for the Cincinnati packet. It was from the hostler of the hotel opposite the steamboat landing. He told me that the proprietor, who was then on a fishing excursion to the Kanawha, on a former trip 150 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. had taken a Pike which reached clear across the dining-table after ats head and tail were cut off; and that it was necessary to have a tin boiler made expressly to cook it. He did not say how much wood was consumed in boiling it; probably some- thing less than a cord. From his “dare-devil” air, and the leer in his eye I had a faint impression that he was quizzing me. But he affirmed positively as to the length of the fish, as he sat in his shirt-sleeves, with his thumbs under his sus. penders, and a very long native segar in his mouth. CHAPTER VI. THE CARP FAMILY. “ Ler me live harmlessly, and near the brink Of Trent or Avon, have a dwelling-place; Where I may see my quill or cork down sink With eager bite of Perch, or Bleak, or Dace, And on the world and my Creator think; Whilst some men strive ill-gotten goods to embrace, And others spend their time in base excess Of wine, or worse, in war and wantonness. “Let them that list, these pastimes still pursue, And on such pleasing fancies feed their fill, 80 I the fields and meadows green may view, And daily by fresh rivers walk at will, Among the daisies and the violets blue, Red hyacinth, and yellow daffodil, Purple narcissus like the morning rays, Pale gander-grass, and azure culverkeys.” Jo. Davors, Esq. CHAPTER VI. THE CARP FAMILY—CYPRINID&. REMARKS ON THE CYPRINIDS. Tue Sucker. Catostomus communis. Burrato Fisa. Catostomus bubalus.—Buffalo Fish as an article of diet. Toe Cuus or Fautrisu. Leucosomus rhotheus—Errors of American writers in regard to the size of the Chub.—Chub an annoyance to fly-fishers.—Chub-fishing on the Brandywine.—Umbrella invented by a Chub Fisherman. Roacu, and Roach-fishing. Tuts family furnishes but few species that may be called game fish. The more ambitious angler who has access to Trout-streams or waters where Bass and Pike are found, seldom fishes for them in this country. As food they are not esteemed, and in warm weather are scarcely edible. There are pleasing associations, however, connected with some of the fish of this family. To many an angler they have furnished the means of a rudimentary knowledge of the gentle art, while the pursuit of them along the streams that flow through green meadows, has likely fostered a love of quiet pastoral scenery; and if, in after years, he reads the lines attributed by Walton to “Jo Davors, Esq.,” quoted on the preceding leaf, he will more thoroughly appreciate the character of our simple-hearted, though strong-headed Father (153) 154 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Izaak, as in his fancy he hears him discourse with his pupil, under a honeysuckle hedge during a shower. The characteristics of this family are: the mouth slightly cleft; weak jaws, most frequently without teeth; margin of the jaws formed by the intermaxillaries. Pharyngeals strongly toothed; lips fleshy. Branchial rays few. Body scaly. One dorsal fin. Belly not compressed; never serrated. Intestinal canal short. The least carnivorous or predatory of all fishes. There are nearly thirty genera, and over two hundred species. THE SUCKER. Catostomus communis: De Kay. There are several species of the genus Catostomus known by this common name; they appear to be ubiquitous in the streams of the Northern, Middle, and Western States, are less numerous in the Southern, and are seldom found in those ' states that border on the Gulf of Mexico. The Sucker cannot be called a sporting fish, yet the diffi- culty of taking it with hook and line, and the nicety required in fishing for it, makes the taking of it a matter of interest to those who like to accomplish something difficult in angling. As an article of food it is only esteemed when other fish are scarce, When fly-fishing in the month of June, I have frequently found them to collect in large numbers in some gentle current to spawn; then Trout are apt to lie at the lower end of the school to catch the ova as it drifts down stream. At such places the angler is sure of a good catch of Trout, which will tise readily at the fly although they may be gorged with the spawn of the Suckers. THE CARP FAMILY. 155 In Eastern Virginia the Sucker is called “Carp,” and they are fished for in the same manner as the Carp in England; this mode of angling having no doubt been handed down by the early settlers. A hole in the creek, river, or mill-pond is baited every evening for a week or ten days with coarse corn-meal dough, and is then fished early in the morning and late in the afternoon; the season of the year, April, October, and November. In still water a float is used, and a small hook with an earth-worm put on so as to let it crawl on the bottom; it is sucked in by the fish; the motion of the cork is slight, the angler striking as it moves off, or as it is drawn gently under. BUFFALO FISH. Catostomus bubalus: RarinEsque. In mentioning the specific characteristics of this fish, Rafi- nesque says: “Diameter one-fifth of the total length; oliva- cious brown, pale beneath, fins blackish, pectoral fins brown and short; head sloping, snout rounded, cheeks whitish; lateral: straight, dorsal fin narrow, with twenty-eight equal rays, anal trapezoidal with twelve rays.” “It is called every- where Buffalo Fish, and ‘Piconeauw’ by the French settlers of Louisiana. It is commonly taken with a dart at night when asleep, or in the seine; it does not bite readily at the hook. It feeds on smaller fishes and shells,* and often goes in shoals.” This. is a true Sucker, though his proportions are very unlike the elongated friend of our youthful days. Its shape * An error. None of the Catostomi feed on molluses; their weak jaws and peculiar mouth render it impossible. 156 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. resembles what a huge Perch might be, if inflated; for its body is not only very deep, but thick and full, and is puffed up to the very tail; a fish of thirty inches, weighing almost as many pounds. It is seldom taken with a hook and line, and is of little interest to the angler. I notice it here, only because it is never seen by the angler of the Atlantic States, though it is common to all the waters that connect with the Ohio and Mississippi. Its flesh is gross and unpalatable. At St. Louis I have seen a dray-load of these unwieldy, mis- shapen fish, brought on board of a steamboat bound for New Orleans. Although kept in ice, they would get rather stale by the time the boat reached the cotton and sugar regions. Billy Clark, an assistant clerk on one of these boats, who was somewhat of a wag, would write them down at the head of the bill of fare “ Mississippi Salmon 4 la tartare,” but quietly remarked, he would as soon eat a piece of the Ohio Fat Boy. Some of the natives though, who came aboard, apparently from inland, on our passage down, seemed to relish them hugely. I remember one of these, a short, pot-bellied, bald- headed little man, with low-quartered shoes, short trousers, and a brown linen jacket, an outline of whose figure closely resembled the fish in question. There used to be some fast eating on western steamboats in those days. I have seen all the courses from “soup,” down to “almonds and raisins,” done in twenty minutes: but when this piscivorous little gentleman sat down to boiled Buffalo, it was astonishing to a man accustomed to slow eating. The mention of this fish brings up other ludicrous reminiscences ; but “Farewell! a word that must be, and hath been— A sound which makes us linger—yet, farewell !”” The Sunny South—farewell, great Bubalus, and all the minor Catostomi. THE CARP FAMILY. 157 THE CHUB, OR FALLFISH. Leucosomus rhotheus. There are several species of the genus Leuwcosomus found in the Eastern and Middle States. I therefore omit a descrip- tion of any one species as a representative of the fish called “ Chub.” The Chub is a persecuted individual in a Trout-stream; one whose name is cast out as a reproach amongst fly-fishers ; whose head is knocked off, or he is thrown ashore on a sun- shiny day to linger and die on the pebbly beach, like an Ishmaelite in the sands of the great Sahara. Every man’s hand is against him. Dr. Bethune, in a note to his edition of Walton, says: “The Chub in this country is the scorn and vexation of the angler, and, except when large, is by no means the shy fish that Walton and other English writers describe him to be; on the contrary, he is a bold biter, more ready than welcome at any bait offered him.” Mr. Brown, in the “American Angler’s Guide,” says, “Their length is not usually over ten inches ;” and Frank Forester writes, “The American Chub never exceeds ten inches.” . The writers last quoted could not have fished many of the tributaries of the Delaware and Susquehanna, or they never would have recorded so gross an error. The Upper Dela- ware, the Beaverkill, Schuylkill, West Canada Creek, and many other streams, abound in large Chub, and any urchin who wets his clumsy line, with a white grub at the end of it, knows better. Immediately below Frank Forester’s remark just quoted, I find (in a copy of his book in my possession) the following note by the president of our little club: “A 158 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. mistake—I have taken them twenty-two inches long and weighing three pounds; common in the Schuylkill, eighteen inches.” Dr. Bethune is unnecessarily disparaging in his remarks on this fish. In many sections of the country it furnishes excellent sport, especially in those streams where Trout have been fished out, or have disappeared from other causes; it takes a grasshopper at midwater or on the surface, and on a warm day rises freely at the fly, and shows much pluck when hooked. But when fly-fishing for Trout, in some streams they are so numerous as to be deservedly considered a nui- sance; for it is a severe trial of the angler’s patience, when he hooks a good Trout in a rift, and as he gets him into still water and has almost drowned him, to have a big Chub with his fresh vigor seize the other fly, and be held tight by his leathery mouth, while the chances for the escape of the Trout are augmented. Then again they will be jumping at your flies, frequently getting the start of a shy Trout, or, after being hooked, swim deep and strong, and encourage the vain hope that it is a stout, steady-pulling Trout; but one glance at the back fin or his forked tail as he gives in, dispels the illusion. They prefer a fly with a big red body, and in such streams those who fish for Trout should avoid a dubbing of that color. Some years back I was one of a party on the Beaverkill, when an incipient fly-firher hooked a large Chub, and played it some minutes, supposing it to be a Trout; on landing it, he looked at a veteran native angler, as if to solicit his approval, but “Uncle Peter,” turning over the Chub with the toe of his boot, remarked in his quiet way, “ why, he’s as big as a lamb.” There was a laugh, and of course the angler was chagrined, when he was told the Chub was never basketed there. THE CARP FAMILY. 159 A friend who is a veteran Chub-fisher, and who stands up for his favorite, writes thus in his defence; I insert his remarks, word for word :— “T suggest that the mistake of Frank Forester arises from the fact of a fish with a clumsy, horny head, which is washy and worthless, and rarely attains a greater length than ten inches, is frequently found in Trout-streams, and is called ‘Chub.’ But the fish in question, which is known in Chester county and in many other parts of the state as ‘the Falltish,’ probably from his being in the best condition and most readily taken in the autumn months, is a shapely, cleanly fish, with a white, silvery belly, and when well grown is shy and requires careful and quiet fishing. The sides and heads of those above twelve inches are often colored with a pink tinge.” From the above it will be seen that the Chub is much esteemed in many streams for the sport he affords in bottom- fishing. The best season of the year is September; a grass- hopper or grub-worm, or a small cube of tough cheese, is a good bait; the bottom-tackle should be neat, as he bites delicately ; a long, light cane rod, a small float, and a No. 1 Kirby hook, are appropriate tackle. Some anglers now residents of the “Quaker City,” who came from an adjoining county, as our friend just quoted, are expert Chub-fishers. I am acquainted with a retired mer- chant, a neat, dapper old gentleman, who fishes the Brandy- wine, and has all kinds of contrivances pertaining to catching them. To be appreciated, he should be seen with his tin bait-box strapped before him, his portable stool, and his im- provement for holding his umbrella without the use of his hands; the latter invention is « long pocket, two inches wide and twelve inches deep, down the back of his coat, into which he slips the staff of his umbrella, and waits patiently 160 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. for a bite, regardless of April showers or July’s scorching sun. When the mild Indian summer is over, he greases his long reed pole with linseed oil, and lays it carefully away; viewing it now and then with the same satisfaction that Gloster did his “bruised arms hung up for monuments.” I have suggested to him the use of the artificial fly, but he believes not in things ethereal, or things ephemeral, but has more “confidence in the flesh,’ viz. red worms and white grubs. Long may he live to fish for Chub, chewing “the cud of sweet and bitter fancy,” as well as his Bologna sausage at noon, while he contemplates the beauties of nature by the peaceful Brandywine. “CAVEAT ENTERED.” THE CARP FAMILY. 161 THE ROACH. Of course no angler will fish for Roach when better sport san be had; but as they are only in season when all other fish refuse a bait, and thus act as a palliative to one who suffers from “ Anglo-Mania,” they deserve some notice. On any warm day from October to April, the angler may unite recreation with exercise, by taking his walking cane rod in his hand, and with a lump of tough dough or a few small wood-worms, have an hour’s sport with these pretty little fish. If he has some juvenile friend with him, the pleasure is enhanced. I have taken scores of them during the winter, from seven to nine inches in length, at Gray’s Ferry, also in Cooper’s Creek, and at Red Bank below the city. They are generally found on the lee side of a pier stretching into a fresh-water creek or river; and sometimes in the dock itself. When fishing for Roach I have frequently laid them on the snow or ice, when they would become frozen; but on taking them home carefully, and putting them in hydrant water, would have the whole catch swimming about. There is some nicety required in taking Roach artistically, which is not attained by bunglers, and this fact adds to the pleasure of this kind of winter angling. The rod should be slight and from eight to ten feet long ; the line of fine silk; bottom of fine gut; hooks No. 12, Kirby, one of which should be seized to the extreme end, and three others to short pieces of gut, diverging at intervals 11 162 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of eight inches; float, a neat quill; the sinker should be just heavy enough to sink half or two-thirds of the float; the bottom hook should touch or be near the bottom. The bait, if paste, should be rolled in small pellets, not larger than a No. 1 shot, between the finger and thumb; it should merely cover the point and barb of the hook. When they bite freely, a small mite of the tough skin of a chicken’s leg will obviate the necessity-of baiting often. Worms ob- tained by peeling the bark from rotten logs, are generally used in winter. On a cold day a bite is almost imperceptible to a novice, but a little observation will soon teach him when to strike, which should be done by a quick but slight motion. _ Roach will not rise at a fly in winter, but I have caught them when casting for Trout on a pond in March. They are soft, and have a muddy taste. CHAPTER VII. THE HERRING FAMILY, Quaker Lady (raising the window). I say, man—thee with the wheel- barrow—what does thee ask for shad? Colored Fishvender. Hay dar! (turning quickly round and touching the rim of his bellcrowned hat) From three fips, marm, to a quarter and a fip, ’cordin’ to de size of ’em.—None of your grass-fed shad, marm, but ra’al fat corn-fed fellows.——Sha-a-ad, O shad! Jet go my knife and fork, fresh shad /——Whih ! here dey go! Old Times in Philadelphia. CHAPTER VII. THE HERRING FAMILY—CLUPEIDA. Remarks on THE Herrine Famity, from the “Iconographic Encyclo- pedia.”—Their abundance in the waters of the United States.—Great numbers of them taken in the Potomac.—Herring-fishing with the artificial fly. Toe Swap. Alosa prestabilis—Its delicacy and value as food.—Mi- gratory habits.—Shad taken with the minnow.—Shad-roe as bait. ALTHOUGH this family of fishes is of little interest to the angler, as far as sporting qualities are concerned, its import- ance in an economic and commercial point of view is so great, that I am induced to copy at length an interesting article from the “Iconographic Encyclopedia of Science, Literature, and Art,” a work which has been translated from the German, and edited by our countryman, Professor Spencer F. Baird, of the Smithsonian Institute, and published by the Messrs. Appleton, of New York. “CLUPEIDa. The fishes of this family exhibit considerable analogies to the Salmonoids, differing, however, in the absence of an adipose dorsal. Both maxillaries and intermaxillaries are employed in forming the margin of the upper jaw, instead of the usual introduction of the latter alone. The body is well scaled, the scales sometimes very large. Bones of the mouth variously provided with teeth, these occurring some- times on the pectinated tongue: “The fishes of this family are among the most useful and indispensable to man. It includes the Anchovy, the Sardine, (165) 166 AMERICAN ANGUER’S BOOK. the Sprat, the various Herrings, and the Shad. The Anchovy Engraulis encrasicholus, is a small fish, a few inches in length, distributed throughout Europe, and especially abundant in various parts of the Mediterranean. It is distinguished, as a genus, by the projecting and pointed upper jaw, and the long anal. The top of the head and back is blue; irides, sides, and belly, silvery white. This fish was well known to the ancient Greeks and Romans, who prepared from it a sauce called garum, held in great favor. They are taken in countless numbers on the coast of Sardinia, 400,000 having been caught at a single haul. The fishing is highly successful by uight, when the Anchovies are readily attracted by the glare of fire-pans. In preparing them for purposes of commerce, the head and viscera must be removed; the former being bitter, and for this reason called Hncrasicholus by Aristotle. The Anchovies, after being washed clean, are plaeed with the belly upwards in vessels, a layer of fish alternating with one of salt, until the whole is full. . Pressure must be exerted to drive out the oil as much as possible. A hole is left in the top of the vessel, which is then exposed to the sun. After fermentation has commenced, the hole is stopped up, and the vessel removed to a storehouse. The operation is not com- pleted until the following year. The Anchovy is taken from December to May. “The Clupeide, with non-projecting upper jaws, are divided into various genera, as Clupea, Sardinella, Harengula, Pellona, Meletia, Alosa, and others. A distinction was formerly made between a genus Alusa, characterized by an emargination of the upper jaw, and Clupea, with the border of the jaw con- tinuous or entire. This division, however, has been found to be inadequate to the wants of the present system. “Alosa vulgaris, a European species, is represented in America by one of much finer flavor, the A. sapidissima, or Jt THE HERRING FAMILY. 167 vommon American Shad. This well-known species com- mences its entrance into our rivers, at periods varying from January to May, according to the latitude. It penetrates all the Atlantic streams, and when unobstructed by dams or other impediments, travels to a considerable distance from the mouth for the purpose of depositing its spawn. They are taken in great numbers, especially in Chesapeake and Delaware Bays, by various means, the most conspicuous of which are large seines and gill-nets. The price varies from five to fifty dollars per hundred, according to the abundance or size. As already remarked, various Herrings occur in immense numbers. Conspicuous among European species, in this respect, is the Sprat, Harengula sprattus ; but vastly more so the common Herring, Clupea harengus. The true abode of the immense hordes of Herring is not, even at this jay, definitely ascertained, the fish being scarcely known, except in its wanderings. Some naturalists suppose it to come from the high north to deposit its spawn upon the shores of the North Sea; others, again, consider the bottom of the North Sea to be its home, since it is first visible at the Shetland Islands in April. Here myriads of Herrings com- bine into armies many miles in length, and then pass on to the coasts of Norway, England Germany, and the Nether- lands. From the main army, branches go off in various directions, supplying almost the whole coast of Europe, and possibly extend their migrations even to the northern coast of North America. They have never been seen to return to the north, and their migrations themselves occur neither at perfectly regular intervals nor in the same direction. The density of the columns also varies much in different parts of the army. In some seasons the numbers are countless, in others very limited; at one time the individuals will be fat and large, at another very lean. By the end of August they 168 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. are no longer seen. The Dutch, who, since 1164, have pro- secuted the Herring-fishery with the greatest success, some- times employ whole fleets of boats in the pursuit. At no very remote period, the number of boats annually leaving the Texel, under the protection of vessels of war, amounted to not less than eleven or twelve hundred. This trade was at its highest state of prosperity in the year 1618, at which time the number of boats employed was 3000, manned by fifty to sixty thousand men. Since that time the trade has passed out of the hands of the Dutch, to a certain extent, and is carried on by many nations of northern Europe. Accord- ing to Black, the fishermen of Gothenburg alone, in his time, took upwards of 700,000,000 Herrings. More than 130,000 barrels have been exported from Bergen in Norway; the amount consumed in the entire land exceeding double this number. At the present day, the largest quantities are taken on the shores of England. Recent investigations have ren- dered it probable that the Herring actually does live within a moderate distance of the localities where it is caught, coming in from the deep water for the sake of depositing its spawn. “ A beautiful spectacle is seen when the Herring approach the shores; the rays of the sun are reflected from myriads of silver scales, and above the army may be seen hovering hosts of gulls, terns, and other sea-birds. Behind and alongside are numerous rapacious fish, which, with seals, porpoises, and other marine animals, devour immense numbers. The water is filled with loose scales, rubbed off by their close proximity. On account of their vast numbers, these fish are very easily captured. This is done by means of nets, either on shore or at sea. Hvery Dutch smack has four smaller boats along with it, to carry fresh fish to the sea-ports, and for other pur- poses. They use nets of 500 or 600 fathoms in length, made THE HERRING FAMILY. 169 of coarse Persian silk, as being stronger than hemp. These are blackened by smoke, in order that the fish may not be frightened by the white thread. The nets are set in the evening, buoyed by empty barrels, and stretched by weights; they thus rest at the surface of the sea. In the morning they are drawn in by means of a windlass. The Herrings are sometimes attracted within reach of the nets by lanterns suspended at various intervals. But a faint idea can be formed of the actual number of these prolific fishes, which exists at one time in the ocean. When we remember, how- ever, that an annual consumption of over two thousand millions in Kurope, not to mention the myriads devoured by fishes, birds, and various marine vertebrata, scarcely appears to affect their number, we may obtain an approximate con- ception of what that number must be to which the sum of those annually destroyed is in such small proportion. “As the Herrings are so abundant, and the flesh at the same time so excellent, various modes have been adopted to preserve them for a certain length of time. Even at sea many are salted down, and sold in this state. This is called by the French saler en vrac. To keep them longer than is permitted by this method, two other ways are made use of: they are called white-salting and red-salting (saler en blanc and saurer). To white-salt Herring, they are gutted on being caught, and packed in barrels, with a thick brine poured over them. They are there retained, until it is convenient to give them a final packing. After the bustle of the fishing is over, the smacks or busses run in and discharge their cargoes, when the barrels are inspected, and the fish sorted under the in- spection of official authorities. They are then repacked with fresh lime and salt, and the particular quality marked on the barrel by the brand of an inspector. The red-salting is effected by allowing fat Herrings to lie for a considerable 170 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. time in the brine, then arranging them on hurdles, and placing them in ovens holding from ten to twelve thousand, for the purpose of being dried and smoked. The invention of pickling, as applied to Herring, has been ascribed to Wilhelm Béekelson, or Beukelson, a fisherman of Viervliet in the province of Zealand (about 1440): he, however, only improved an art known before his time. The Emperor Charles V. eat a herring over his grave, in thankful acknow- ledgment of his worth, and erected a monument to his honor in 1556. “Several species of Herring are caught in vast numbers on the coast and in the Atlantic rivers of the United States. The principal of these is the Clupea elongata, the representa- tive of C. harengus. Besides Alosa sapidissima, or Shad, already mentioned, Alosa tyrannus and A. menhaden are of economical value, the former as an article of food, the latter for manure. Immense numbers are taken and spread on poor lands, to which they impart a fertility not inferior to that produced by guano.” In the United States, Herrings are most abundant in the rivers that flow into the Chesapeake. In Maryland and Virginia they have even been used as manure, as the small species known as “ Manhaden” and “ Mossbunkers” have been farther north. In Virginia and North Carolina, the custom of visiting the “fishing-shores” annually for a supply of Herrings to salt down, still exists as an “institution,” and the inhabitants for many miles back from the rivers that furnish these fish, come every spring and take away immense numbers of them. One of the greatest hauls with a seine that I ever heard of, was made by a fisherman on the Potomac near Dumfries, Va. ‘With one sweep of his long net he encompassed a school which supplied all applicants. Hv sold them as long as they THE HERRING FAMILY. 171 would bring a price, and then, after furnishing them to the people of the immediate neighborhood without charge, lifted his net and allowed the remainder of the imprisoned fish to escape. The Herring will occasionally take a bait, and on a sun- shiny day in May, when the wind is from the south, will jump at a piece of red flannel tied to a hook. An old Scotch merchant of New Y ork—a superannuated Trout-fisher—some years back was in the habit of fishing for them with a ay, from the decks of vessels in the East River. THE SHAD. Alosa prestabilus: Dr Kay. The Shad is held in greater estimation by the epicure than by the angler. When properly in season, it is considered by many the most delicious fish that can be eaten. Fresh Salmon, or a Spanish Mackerel, or a Pompano may possibly equal it; but who can forget the delicate flavor and juicy sweetness of a fresh Shad, broiled or “planked;” hot from the fire, opened, salted and peppered, and spread lightly with fresh May butter. There is one peculiarity of the Shad, which some of its advocates of our city claim for it, which is, that the longer it remains in fresh water up to the time of spawning, the fatter and more juicy it becomes. This is seemingly paradoxical, as the Shad is never found in fresh water with any food in its stomach or intestines. What then does it feed on; or how does it grow fatter as it gets towards its place of spawning? Is the theory, or more properly the hypothesis, that it “lives by suction,” correct? That is, that it retains animalcula and 172 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. microscopic animals contained in the water as it passes through its gills in breathing, and appropriates such food to its sustenance. It is hardly worth while to go into a description of this fish, or give a portrait of it; for the outline of its form and general appearance is as familiar to us all, as the cut of the coat worn by “one of our oldest and most respectable citizens,” to which coat the Shad has given a name—may his tribe decrease not, nor his fatness and flavor diminish with each vernal return of his Shadship! Yarrell says the Alice Shad, a European species, also improves the higher it ascends the rivers. It is admitted, however, by Englishmen, that the flesh of the Shad he men- tions, bears no comparison to ours; nor does it attain more than one-third the size. Shad ascend all our rivers, from Georgia to Maine, in the spring, for the purpose of spawning, and at one time every: tributary of the larger rivers, that had depth enough to float these deep-bodied fish, were annually visited by them, until mill-dams, tanneries, and other obstructions and nuisances prevented their return to their native waters and spawn beds. They entered the various creeks and brooks that feed the Susquehanna, away up amongst the mountains, hundreds of miles from their marine feeding-grounds, where they had spent the winter in attaining that increase in size, which is only exceeded by the almost miraculous growth of the Salmon. It is hardly to be wondered at, that many of the old settlers on the strenms in the interior, opposed the introduction of canals and slack-water navigation, when these improvements were at the expense of the annual visits of the Shad, which not only furnished them an article of luxurious diet until the month of June, but gave them a stock of smoked and salted fish for the winter. THE HERRING FAMILY. 178 Shad are taken at Savannah in the latter part of January. As the season advances, they enter the rivers successively along the coast towards the north, and are not found in the waters near Boston until about May. _ It was supposed at one time that Shad, as I have already remarked, were of southern birth, and that the same great migratory shoal gradually found its way along the coast. It has since been pretty clearly ascertained that this is not the case; and it is now thought, with much show of reason, that they do not wander far from the mouths:of the bays and rivers from which they migrated the preceding summer or autumn. In more than one respect there is a close analogy between the Shad and Salmon; both are anadromous fishes, changing their habitat annually from salt to fresh water to spawn; both present the same phenomenon of never having any food— in whatever process of digestion—in their -stomachs, after reaching fresh water; and both are not only fish of extremely rapid growth in salt water, but present the same peculiarity of proportions, that is, a remarkably small head and deep fleshy body. Frank Forester’s idea that the Shad habitually takes a bait or an artificial fly is an erroneous one; it is not a predatory fish, and it is to be feared that his impression, or hope of its being classed among game fish at some future day, will never be realized ; though there may have been rare instances in which it has been taken with a fly, and occasionally with asmall silver minnow. I was once fortunate enough to hook three in succession, when fishing for Perch with a bright little minnow below Fairmount Dam, and secured two, the third was lost for want of a landing-net, for the mouth is extremely delicate. They have also been taken, though rarely, with shad-roe. A friend of the writer, a novice in 174 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. angling, some ten or twelve years ago went to Fairmount, and in the course of a morning’s fishing caught three with this bait. He has never been fishing since to my knowledge, and I have no doubt, he is thoroughly convinced that they can be taken in the same way at any time, and perhaps even in the water above the dam. I have had young Shad to leap into my boat in the twi- light, pursued, likely, by Rockfish; they were not as long as the blade of a breakfast-knife and not much thicker. One of these I examined carefully; but a slight handling of the silvery delicate thing destroyed the young life, which next season after its return from sea would have made a meal for two or three hungry men. After spawning, the Shad, in Salmon-fisher’s parlance, is a kipper, and has lost nearly half its weight; it then finds its way to the sea, and next season returns with its accustomed size and fatness. The roe of the Shad is a tempting bait to all fish, and is much used by Philadelphia fishermen; great care is required in attaching it to the hook by means of the slight membrane that envelops it. Each ova as it is washed from the baited hook and floats off down the tide, is greedily swallowed by any fish, small or large, and he is toled along until he finds the “placer,” when the “nugget” is swallowed at a gulph, if his mouth is large enough. Then if the fisher strikes at the particular time he hooks his prize; but an inexpert person, will lose a halt dozen baits for every fish he catches, and will bedaub the but of his rod, hands, and coat sleeves. until he presents anything but the appearance of a well-dressed angler. CHAPTER VIII, CATFISH AND EELS. “Cats and EEs, aud sich as that.” “One Sat’day night De niggas went a huntin’, De dogs dey run de Coon, De Coon he run de Wolver, De Wolver run de Stiff-leg, De Stiff-leg run de Devil, Dey run him up de hill, But dey cotch him on de level. “Sat’day night come arter, De niggas went a-fishin’, Dey call for Billy Carter, *Case he want to go a-cattin’, Dey filled de jug an’ started Fer de Pocomoka river, Chicken-guts wus better bait, Dey dug a gourd o’ wurrims.” From a. song of the “ Peasantry of the South”—banjo accompaniment omitted, CHAPTER VIII. CATFISH AND EELS. Carrisn, Siluride.—Extract from Iconographic Encyclopedia. CarFisH oF THE ATLANTIC SraTEs AND WESTERN WATERS. Eets.—Observations on the Petromyzontide (Lamprey Eels), on the Murenide (Common Eels), and on the Gymnotide (Electric Eels). Taz Common Eex. Anguilla vulgaris.—Fishing for Eels.—Migratory habits.—Young Eels as bait.—Eels not hermaphrodites. CatFisH and EELs are so closely associated in the minds of anglers, that I have thought it proper to include them in the same chapter. In treating of them I give a brief but comprehensive article from the Iconographic Encyclopedia on the Stluride, as well as an account of the different fami- hes of anguilliform fishes known as Eels, from the same work. “SILuRID#.—Fishes of this family have the skin either naked, and covered with a slimy secretion, or provided with osseous plates of various number and shape. The head is usually depressed, and provided with a variable number of barbels. In most, there is a second and adipose dorsal, some- times confluent with the caudal. The first rays of the dorsal and pectoral fins are generally enlarged into strong spines; and the pectoral spine is capable of being inflexibly fixed, by peculiar mechanism, in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the body. The edge of the mouth is formed by the inter- 12 (177) 178 AMERICAN ANGLEK’S BOOK. maxillaries suspended from the sides of the ethmoid, which enters into the outline of the mouth, forming the superior median portion. The suboperculum is absent in the whole family. “ Species of this polymorphous family are found distributed throughout the globe. In Europe, however, there is found but one species, the Silurus glanis, or Sheat Fish. This species, interesting from the fact of its being the largest fresh- water fish in Europe, the Sturgeons excepted, is most abund. ant in Central Europe, its existence in England being hypo- thetical. The weight has been known to exceed 100 lbs,, in this respect equalling some of the American Siluride. It differs from the North American species in the absence of a posterior adipose dorsal, in the very small true dorsal, and in the very long anal. Other species of this restricted genus, Silurus, are found in various parts of Asia, and perhaps Africa, but not in America. The American forms are highly varied, those of the northern continent, however, being quite uniform in structure. The two most conspicuous fresh-water genera are Pimelodus and Noturus ; the former with a distinct adipose dorsal, the latter with this dorsal confluent with the caudal. Numerous species of Pimelodus (Catfish, Horned- Pout, Bull-Head) occur in the various waters of North America, some of which acquire a large size. One species, from the Mississippi, has been known to weigh over 100 lbs. The flesh of many species is highly prized, owing to its sweetness and freedom from bones. The genus Noturus, known provincially as Stone Catfish, embraces but few species, found in the Atlantic streams south of New York, and in those of the Mississippi valley. They will probably be dis- covered in the eastern rivers (in the Hudson at least), when their ichthyology has been more fully studied. Marine forms CATFISH AND EELB. 179 are met with in @aleichthys, Arius, and Bagrus, the former characterized by the high dorsal and pectorals. “South America exhibits some Siluroids of especial inte- rest. Conspicuous among these are Arges cyclopum, or Pime- lodus cyclopum of Humboldt, and Brontes prenadilla, which inhabit the highest regions in which fish are known to live. They are found in Quito, at elevations of more than 16,000 feet above the level of the sea, living in the streams running down the sides of Cotopaxi and Tunguragua. The most interesting fact in the history of these fishes is, that they are frequently ejected from the craters of the above-mentioned volcanoes, in immense numbers; the supply being probably derived from the subterranean lakes in the body of the mountains. Our space will not permit’ us to mention any other members of this interesting family, excepting the Ma- lapterus electricus, the Stlurus electricus of older authors. This species is characterized generically by the absence of the first dorsal, the adipose dorsal alone existing, as also by the possession of an electric apparatus or battery, somewhat intermediate in character between those of Gymnotus and Torpedo, although of much finer texture. The whole body beneath the integuments is enclosed by the apparatus in two layers of great compactness, and at first sight suggesting a deposit of fat. A dense fascia separates the battery from the muscular system. The cells, formed by transverse and longi- tudinal fibrous partitions, are rhombic in shape, and exceed- ingly minute. The nerves of the outer organ come from branches of the fifth pair of nerves, the inner organ is sup- plied by the intercostal nerves. The direction of the current is probably from the head to the tail; the cephalic extremity being positive, and the caudal negative.” 180 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. CATFISH OF THE ATLANTIC AND WESTERN WATERS. No artist, not even Landseer himself, could give a correct picture of this familiar old friend. A profile does not convey a correct idea, and a perspective view won't do; so I give it up in despair, believing that photography would even fail in its likeness. It is not necessary to tell the angler that there are many species of Catfish in this latitude. There is the Catfish of our sluices, meadow-ditches, and ponds. The less ugly White Catfish, of rare excellence for the pan, which comes up our rivers in April, stays all summer, and goes back to brackish or salt water in winter. And there is the great “Sockdologer” of the Mississippi and its tributaries, with a mouth large enough for a little boy to get his head into, and a throat big enough to thrust his leg down. Old Jack, a “short-haired brother” of the angle, down in Mississippi, has declared to me he has seen one “as long asa cotton bale.” I have, myself, seen one carried through the streets of New Orleans, tied by the gills toa fence rail, with a negro man supporting each end, and the tail of the fish touching the ground. I have heard of them weighing one hundred and twenty pounds; but I forbear, lest the reader should think I exalt this fish above measure. At the cabarets along the levee at New Orleans, I have heard the music of the frying-pan, as steaks of these “ whoppers” were cooking, and have seen the laborers eat them with an appetite, but never had the curiosity to taste of them. GATFISH AND EELS. 181 There are two varieties of these monsters in the Ohio and Mississippi: the “Mud Cat,” with a broad flat head, and the “Channel Cat.” The latter is far more active and stronger than the former. In my boyhood, I frequently went Catfishing with a rustic angler, whom I shall never forget. After breakfast, one of the servants would appear with a gourdfull of worms, and we would proceed to his favorite pool, and “set our poles,” sticking the buts, which were sharpened, into the muddy bank, and resting them on forked sticks. Ponto, an old bob- tail pointer, would be one of the party, and appeared to enjoy the sport as much as his master; at the slightest tremor of the cork, he would become restless; when it disappeared he would come to a stand; and when the fish was landed, he would seize it or keep it away from the water with as much assiduity as he would look for a wounded partridge. “ Aunt Bett,” the cook, one day docked Pont’s tail with a cleaver, for some depredation, as he was retreating from the kitchen; and it is said, the neighbors could always tell when “ Uncle Tom” had been at his favorite fishing-hole, by the impression that Pont’s tail left in the mud, as he sat on his hurdies. As an expedient, on one occasion, when we forgot the gourd of worms, and were waiting while the boy had gone back for it, we shot a squirrel, and a small bait of its entrails appeared perfectly acceptable to our friends of the muddy water. When the negroes went “a catting” at night, they not unfrequently supplied ‘themselves with chickens’ entrails, as well as worms, averring that the former took the largest Cat- fish. In regard to the question whether any fish manifest a care for their young after the latter are hatched from the spawn, Tam informed by a brother angler—the same who writes in 182 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK, defence of the Chub, and on whose statement I can rely with entire confidence—that in his younger days, when going to a large mill-pond to: bathe, he was struck with the move- ments of a Catfish some ten to twelve inches long, which was swimming near the bank, in water about twelve or fifteen inches deep, making circuits round and round a mass of dark specks, which were lying huddled together in a space about a foot in diameter. Upon lying down on the bank and parting the sedge and long grass which overhung the water, he dis- covered that the dark specks were young Catfish, about one-half to three-fourths of an inch in length, while the maternal anxiety manifested by the parent fish was ex- plained by his observing at a short distance a number of hungry Sunfish, who were hovering round, and with greedy eyes watching their chance to make a dash at the young innocents. Whenever any of the heedless brood would show an inclination to swim away from the flock, the old one would head them off and drive them back to the fold, and protecting them from the maw of the spoilers so long as my friend watched this curious exhibition of an instinct which till then he had supposed all kinds of fish to be wholly devoid of. It is hardly necessary to describe the tackle and manner of taking the Catfish: either or both must be suited to the water and size of the fish. The smaller species are favorite pan-fish in the Atlantic States, from Delaware to Georgia. The larger, particularly the White forked-tail Catfish of tide-water, makes an excellent stew. They should not be skinned, nor the heads taken off; but well scraped and washed, then seasoned with onions and other pot-herbs, and smoked bacon-flitch: a little rich milk should be poured in the stew before it is taken off the fire. CATFISH AND EBLB. 188 EELS. Observations from the “Iconographic Encyclopsedia.” “PETROMYZONTIDH. This family, the last of the Der- mopteri, is also without lateral fins: a continuous median fin is formed by the coalescence of the dorsal, caudal, and anal. Respiration is generally performed by means of fixed gills, the lateral openings to which are seven in number on each side. A single nostril is placed on the top of the head. The principal forms belong to the genera Petromyzon or true Lamprey Eel, and Ammocetes, or Sand Lamprey. The former have a circular mouth provided with numerous teeth, and fringed with ciliz to assist the animal in attaching itself to the bodies of its prey. The mouth is a true sucker, adhesion being effected by atmospheric pressure. Fishes of various kinds are not unfrequently caught bearing the bloody circular scar produced by the bite of the Lamprey, and quite often the Lamprey itself. The Catfish, or Pimelodus, appears to be especially liable to such attacks. The Lampreys attain to great size, and are highly prized by some nations. The love borne them by the ancient Romans is a matter of classical history, and at the present day they are the favorite food of epicures. “The Murenide or Eels, with the normal structure of the gill apertures, yet have them very small and capable of being completely closed. The body is serpentiform, and although provided with scales, these are scarcely ap- parent, being embedded in a thick mucous skin. The air- bladder is polymorphous, and the intestines without cceca. The Eels, in their different species, are inhabitants of both 184 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. fresh and salt waters; those living in the former belong- ing generally to the restricted genus Anguilla. Species of Anguilla occur in greater or less number throughout the United States, being, however, very rare in many if not most of the waters of the Mississippi basin.. Popular opinion assigns to these species a viviparous reproduction, owing to the apparent absence of individuals containing eggs. The ova are yet, probably, present in a due proportion of the supposed males, escaping observation by their diminutive size. The Hel hardly yields to any other fish in the power of sustaining a deprivation of its proper element for a con- siderable length of time. To transport these animals over a considerable space, all that is necessary is to pack them in damp grass or some similar substance. They even leave the water spontaneously at night in search of food, or of a body of water better suited to their convenience than the one in which they may happen to be placed. Hels are said to be very susceptible to magnetic or galvanic influence: the sim- ple contact of a knife being sufficient to paralyze them. When a magnet is presented to the dish in which the living animal may happen to be, violent contortions, a painful gasping after breath, and other signs of inconvenience, are reported to be exhibited. “The Gymnotide, highly interesting on account of their electrical properties, are characterized by the anterior position of the anus, the entire absence of dorsal fin, the extent of the anal, and the position of the gill-opening. The best known species, Gymnotus electricus or Electric Hel, is a native of the tropical portions of South America. It attains to a great size, being sometimes over six feet in length, and almost a full load for a strong man to carry. The electric or galvanic apparatus consists of four longitudinal bundles, disposed in two pairs, one larger above, and a smaller below, against the CATFISH AND EELS. 185 base of the anal fin. The fasciculi are divided by longitudi- nal partitions into hexagonal prisms, and transverse divisions separate these into small cells. The cells are filled with a gelatinous matter, and the whole apparatus is abundantly supplied with nerves from the spinal marrow. In the Tor- pedo, these nerves come directly from the brain. “The amount of electricity furnished by the Gymnotus is enormous. Faraday made a calculation in regard to a speci- men of ordinary size examined by him, that a single medium discharge was equal to that from a battery of 3500 square inches charged to its maximum. It need not then be a matter of surprise that the Gymnotus is capable of killing a horse by repeated discharges; which it does by applying its whole length along the belly of the animal when in the water. The method of capturing the Gymnotus made use of by the South American Indians, consists in driving a number of horses and other cattle into the muddy pools in which the Electric Hels abound. Roused from their retreats in the mud, the Gymnoti emerge into the water, and gliding in among the animals, give to them violent shocks. A succession of discharges results in weakening the Hels to such a degree, as to make it a matter of little danger or difficulty to capture them. The voltaic pile, formed by the electric apparatus of the Gymnotus, is much like that of the Torpedo; the column being longitudinal, however, in the natural position of the animal, instead of vertical. The anterior or cephalic extrem- ity is positive; the caudal negative; and the animal is capable of discharging any portion of its column. The sub- stance occupying the cells is a dense albuminous liquid, with a small amount of common salt. Each cell is separate and independent, answering to the cell of the galvanic battery. 186 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE COMMON EEL. Anguilla communis. I cannot say that Mr. Billy Allen, who kept a tavern at Culpepper Court House, Virginia, many years ago, had a very extensive knowledge of the natural sciences; but he sagely remarked on one occasion, that a Mink was “a great incendiary to a hen-house!” Quoting the aforesaid authority, I might pronounce the Eel a great incendiary to a fishing-line. Knots and slime! how often he has brought the youthful angler to grief! It is astonishing how many knots a nimble little Hel, of a half yard long, can tie in a boy’s line, from the time he ig landed, until he is taken off the hook, or until his head is cut off. There are hard knots and bow knots, single knots and double knots, all cemented with the pervading slime. The last resort of the little angler is, to do as Alexander the Great did with the Gordian Knot; and take out his jack- knife and cut his line; thus reducing the many knots to one. Albeit the Eel is a “ slippery fellow,” there are several facts in its natural history which are interesting. One is, that it spawns in salt or brackish water, and migrates to fresh water ; the very reverse of Shad, Herring, and Salmon. Young Eels are found all along shore in fresh tidewater streams, in this latitude, in April or May, by turning over a stone, when they shoot out and seek another hiding-place for the time; at that season of the year they are not larger than a (larning-needle and quite transparent, showing their vital CATFISH AND EELS. 187 organs plainly. They collect at the head of tidewaters in great numbers, endeavoring to surmount falls or rapids, and many perish in the attempt or are devoured by fish. They may be taken, in such places, with a small scoop-net made of sea-grass skirting, or other open fabric, and used with great effect as bait for Perch and small Rockfish. T have seen no less than a barrel of these silvery, trans- parent little animals congregated in a pool at low tide, below the western angle of the dam at Fairmount, waiting to renew their efforts to get over the fall at high water; and any little boy will go in and dip up a quart of them for the asking, or for a half dime. In the fall they descend our rivers and are taken in weirs, traps, and eel-pots in immense numbers; in the Susquehanna a single weir sometimes produces two barrels of Hels in a night. They are speared at night in the upper Delaware; the reflection from the torch giving them a white, glaring appearance. I used to bob for them from a boat, when a boy. Imagine three or four urchins, barefooted, with trousers rolled up to their knees, and occasionally a cold slimy Eel of larger size than common, gliding over their feet or around their ankles. There was some screaming and laughing on such occasions, which did not accord with the general idea of a fishing-party; and there was also some scraping of dry slime from jackets and trousers next morning. Eels are speared in winter, on the salt flats along our coast, at low water; the harpooner judges by certain indications what hole to drive his implement into, without seeing them, and draws it out with the impaled Eels writhing and squirming. These fish are not viviparous or hermaphrodites, as some suppose, but the spawn is impregnated by the male after 188 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. ejection, as is the case with other oviparous fishes. They spawn in salt or brackish water, and the vernal migration to fresh-water streams commences at an early period of their existence. The autumnal journey towards the sea begins in September in this latitude. It would appear without reflection that it is strange that there are no Hels in the Mississippi and its thousands of miles of tributaries, at least I have never seen one there; but if we look at the immense distance upward and down- ward, and the time it would occupy, it would seem that instinct or some wise law of Providence annuls the rule which obtains in the tidal streams of the Atlantic States. , Although a prejudice exists against Eels, on account of their reptilian form, they are excellent eating. Sometimes, when taken in a muddy creek or mill-pond, they are purified by putting them in a box with holes bored in it, in a spring branch, when they rid themselves of any strong taste they may have acquired in their former home. CHAPTER IX. THE SALMON FAMILY. “ ABUSED mortals, did you know Where joy, heart’s ease, and comforts grow, You’d scorn proud towers, And seek them in these bowers; Where winds sometimes our woods perhaps may shake, But blustering care could never tempest make, Nor murmurs e’er come nigh us, Saving of fountains that glide by us. “ Blest silent groves, oh may you be For ever mirth’s best nursery! May pure contents For ever pitch their tents Upon these downs, these meads, these rocks, these mountains, And peace still slumber by these purling fountains, Which we may every year Meet when we come a-fishing here.” ‘Watton. CHAPTER IX. THE SALMON FAMILY.—SALMONIDA. REMARKS ON THE SALMONIDA. Tue Broox Trour.—Scientific description—Habits and manner of breed- ing.—Growth.—Difference in size between Trout of still waters and those of brisk streams.—Effect of light and shade, and bright or dark water, on the color of Trout.—Errors as regards new species.—Food of the Trout.—Its greediness.—Its geographical range——Former abund- ance and causes of decrease.—Size of Trout in the regions of Lake Superior and State of Maine.—Size in the preserved waters of England, and size the angler is restricted to in rented waters. Tae Satmon.—Former abundance in the rivers of New York and the Eastern States.—Great numbers in California, Oregon, and British Possessions._—Decline of the Salmon-fisheries in British Provinces.— Scientific description.—Natural process of propagation.—Their growth. —Parr, Smolt and Grilse.—Mature Salmon.—Size of Salmon.—Instinct. —Restocking depleted rivers, and introducing Salmon into new waters. —Their migration from sea to fresh rivers, and gradual preparation for their change of habitat.—Salmon-leaps.—Food of Salmon at sea. Te Canapian Trout, or Sea Trout. Salmo Canadensis.—Error in referring it to the species Salmo trutta of Europe; their dissimilarity — Its affinity to Salmo fontinalis (Brook Trout).—Sea-Trout fishing in the Tabasintac.—Mr. Perley’s and Dr. Adamson’s account of Sea-Trout fishing.—Their abundance in the rivers falling into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and annoyance to Salmon-fishers. Tux Scuoopic Trout, or DwarF SaLMon oF THE St. Crorx. Salmo Glovert. —Account of three summers fishing in the Schoodic Lakes. Tae Great Lake Trout. Salmo namaycush.—Manner of taking them. Tux Lesser Laxe Trout. Salmo Adirondakus.—Trolling for Lake Trout. Bacx’s Gravuine. Thymallus signifer.—Dr. Richardson’s remarks on the Grayling. (191) 192 AMERICAN -ANGLER’S BOOK. Tue Suet. Osmerus viridiscens.—Their great numbers along the north- ern part of our coast.—Smelt in the Schuylkill —Quantity sent south from Boston.—Smelt used as a fertilizer. Tue CarEtin. Mallotus villosus. Tue WairerisH. Coregonus albus. Trout Bait-FIsHINa. THE family of Salmonide embraces many genera, of which the genus Sulmo furnishes nearly all the species that contri- bute to the sport of the angler, or that may properly be called game fish. Of the genus Salmo, the following species are herein described :— The Brook Trout, or Speckled Trout. Salmo fontinalis. The Salmon. Salmo salar. The Canadian Trout. Salmo Canadensis. Known as the Sea Trout. The Schoodic Trout. Salmo Glovert. Of the St. Croix River. The Great Lake Trout. Salmo namaycush. The Lesser Lake Trout. Salmo Adirondacus. There are other species than these, described by ichthyolo- gists as being found in the rivers and lakes of that vast extent of country on our north, known as the British Possessions, and in the rivers on the Pacific coast; but as the object of: this work is to interest the angler rather than the naturalist, I mention only those that are accessible and furnish sport to the brethren of the rod. Of the genus Thymallus, to which the Grayling of England belongs, we have only two species, as far as has been ascer- tained. I only give an account of one, Thymallus signifer, the Standard Bearer, Back’s Grayling. Of the genus Osmerus, we have only one acknowledged species in this country, O. viridiscens, the Smelt. Of the genus Coregonus, we have ten species described by THE SALMON FAMILY. 193 ichthyologists, and perhaps several more of which no descrip- tion has yet been given. As none of this genus are sporting fish, I have only referred to C. albus, the large Whitefish. Of the genus Mallotus, we have only one species, I. villosus, the Capelin or Sparling, which is found on our north-east coast. One of the characteristic marks, by which the most careless observer can distinguish any species of Salmonide, is the second dorsal fin, which is always adipose, a mere carti- lage, wanting in the usual fin-rays. Any fish that one meets with having it, except a Catfish, may safely be set down as one of the Salmon Family. The Salmonide delight in cold waters, and their geo- graphical range, whether inland or on the sea-coast, seldom extends below the thirty-eighth parallel. Their value as an article of food, and importance in a commercial point of view, can hardly be appreciated, unless one enters into an investi- gation of all the statistical information on record. 13 194 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. BROOK TROUT. SPECKLED TROUT. Salmo fontinalis: Mrrcutt. Form elliptical, elongated. Color, olive on the back, shad- ing gradually lighter to the lateral line; sides still lighter, with roseate pearly reflections; belly white and rose-tinted, sometimes shaded with yellow, and occasionally a deep orange. The markings of this fish are beautiful; the sides are covered with yellowish spots of metallic lustre interspersed above and below the lateral line with smaller spots of bright vermilion ; the back is vermiculated, that is, marked with dark tracings of irregular form, many of which run into each other. The dorsal fin has five or six lines of dark spots; the pectorals are olive, with the exception of the two anterior rays, which are black and much stouter than the others; the anterior ray of the ventrals and anal is white, the next black, and the re- maining rays a deep orange; the caudal is slightly concave, with dusky markings on the upper border of the rays. The head is rather more than one-fifth the length of the body, exclusive of caudal; breadth one-fourth. There are ten branchial rays: the first dorsal fin has eleven rays; the second dorsal being adipose is without rays; the pectorals have twelve rays; the ventrals eight; anal nine; caudal nineteen. No fish affords as much sport to the angler as the Brook Trout; whether he is fished for by the country urchin, who ties his knotted horsehair-line to his alder-pole, and “snakes THE BROOK TROUT. THE SALMON FAMILY. 195 out” the speckled fellows by the caving-bank of the meadow brook, and from under the overhanging branches of the wooded stream; or by the scientific angler, who delivers his flies attached to his nine-foot leader—straight out and lightly —from his well-balanced rod, and kills his fish artistically. He is as game as a bantam cock, and with a pliant rod and fine tackle, a twelve-incher gives as much sport as most other fish of four times his size, on a stout rod and coarse tackle. But let us begin with a slight glance at his habits and natural history; his unnatural death we will speak of afterwards; though the angler may think it more natural that the Trout should die by his hands, than in any other way. Towards the end of August, if you loiter along a Trout- stream, and look into a pool with smooth gliding current, where a spring branch enters; or wander along the banks of some clear, cool tributary of the main brook, you may find a dozen Trout congregated—sometimes a half dozen or a single pair—and if not disturbed by a freshet, caught by the angler, or snared by the villanous poacher, with his wire-loop, they will remain there until October or November, when the female will cast her spawn—some say in a furrow, made longitudinally or diagonally in the bed of the stream, by rooting with her nose; others say, more after the manner of broadcast. Whichever it be, the male fish follows imme- diately, ejecting his milt over it. The parents of the future progeny then, as a usual thing, take their course down stream to some deep pool, and there remain in winter quarters, recovering strength and flesh until the ensuing spring, when they move up stream with every rise of water, always on the lookout for something to eat, and ever eager to take a bait or rise at a fly, and reproducing in autumn as before. After fecundation the ova assumes a somewhat brownish 196 AMER:CAN ANGLER’S BOOK. transparent hue, each egg showing in its centre a small dark spot, which is the embryo of the future fish. The young fish are hatched out in two or three months, and appear somewhat larger than the little wriggle-tails in a barrel of stale rain- water. They have large prominent eyes and little pot-bellies, ichthyologically termed “umbilical bladders,” in which is stored the sustenance left from the egg, and which lasts three or four weeks, or until they commence seeking their own food. By this time they have grown to an inch and a half long; they then seek the shallows and gentle margins of the brook, or smaller rills, and commence feeding on minute aquatic insects and the larva of flies. It is surprising how small a quantity of running water will sustain a school of young Trout. I have seen a half dozen in a track left by a horse’s foot, in a mossy spring branch. Trout have the same dusky patches or finger-marks, that all their congeners have, when young. As far as I have observed, they rarely attain a size beyond four or five inches during the first summer in our mountain streams. They seldom venture into the larger waters until the second summer, when they are the little fingerlings that jump at one’s droppers, as he is killing their progenitor on the stretcher-fly. At our noonings, when we have emptied our creels to select the larger fish for a roast, or a bake under the ashes, I have placed the whole catch in a row, the smallest at one end, increasing in size to the largest at the other end, and: en- deavored to theorize as to their ages, or separate the year- lings from the two year old, and those of three from those of four years; but have never been able to draw a line separating, with any degree of certainty, the fish of a year from those of two, or those of two from those of three years, and so on to the largest.\ No general rule as to their growth could be laid down, unless all the fish of one year had been hatched THE SALMON FAMILY. 194 out at the same time, and enjoyed the same advantages of feed and range of water, up to the time of being caught. Still, in a brisk stream, I have generally considered a Trout of seven inches as being in its second summer; one of nine or ten in its third summer; a fish of twelve or thirteen in its fourth; and so on. The Trout found in the deep still waters of the state of New York, though a variety of this species, are a third, or one-half larger at the same age, than the fish of our clear rapid streams; and as the rivers and lakelets there are less fished than the tributaries of the Delaware, Hudson, and Susquehanna, the Trout have a chance of growing older, and consequently larger. From my own observation, the average size of the adult fish in ngrthern New York is at least double that of the fish taken in the streams flowing into the rivers named above. Some years ago, I had an afternoon’s fishing in Hamilton County, when the catch was forty-five pounds. The fish averaged fourteen inches in length, and not less than a pound in weight. A friend on whose word I ‘can rely, tells me he has taken three Trout of two pounds each, at a single cast, in the Raquette River, and repeated it several times in succes- sion; and that he took off his drop-flies, to prevent a surfeit of sport, or too much strain on his light rod. I have achieved something in the way of taking large Trout in Hamilton County, but after a man has satisfied the sentiment of camping out, and been bitten to his heart’s content by mosquitoes and punkies, he prefers sleeping on a good straw bed, and enjoying the comforts of civilization, where although the fish are smaller, the streams are livelier and clearer, and it requires finer tackle and greater skill to take them. There is a specific difference between our Brook Trout and 198 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. the Common Trout (Salmo fario’ of Great Britain. The Brook Trout when taken in its natural habitat (the clear rapid mountain stream), is a more symmetrical fish ; its spots more brilliant; its sides of a brighter silvery hue; its flesh of finer flavor, though of lighter color; and its average size much smaller. The Trout of Hamilton and Franklin Counties, New York, are, as a general rule, not inferior in size to the Trout of England; their average is larger than those of the ponds of Long Island, and about equal to those taken below the ponds, where the fish have access to salt water. I cannot agree with Frank Forester, that the Trout of Long Island are superior to those of our inland brooks and rivers; on the contrary, I think the pond Trout of Long Island much inferior in delicacy and flavor, though I admit, that those which have the run of both fresh and salt water are at least equal to those taken in mountain streams. Fish inhabiting still, sluggish waters, dams, and lakelets, are of stouter proportions than those of rapid, tumbling streams. The difference is remarked by anglers who have fished the waters of Hamilton County; those of the lakes being deep of body and proportionately short, while those taken in the outlets are longer, and afford more sport when hooked. In some of the ponds of Long Island they are extremely stout; a Trout of twelve inches weighing a pound, which is four ounces more than one of the same length taken in a mountain stream would weigh. I would here say, from personal knowledge of the fish, that the “Silver Trout” mentioned by Frank Forester as being taken in Green’s Creek, on Long Island, is in every respect the same as those of the neighboring ponds. The lighter and more pearly hue is to be attributed entirely to the bright open creek flowing through a meadow, unshaded by trees, and communicating directly with the salt water of the bay. THE SALMON FAWILY. 199 All observing anglers have noticed the effect of water and light on the color of Trout; those taken in streams discolored from having their fountains in swamps, or flowing through boggy grounds where hemlock and juniper trees grow, are invariably dark, their spots less brilliant, and their sides and bellies frequently blurred; while those of bright streams flowing through open meadows or cultivated fields, are as remarkable for the deep vermilion of their spots, their light color, and delicate shading. Anglers who have fished the Tobyhanna and Broadhead’s Creek, in Pennsylvania, will remember the color of the fish of these two streams; the: former is boggy, much shaded, and the water almost the color of brandy; while the latter is clear, open, bright, and rapid. The Trout of the former are almost black, while those of the latter are light of color, and brilliant. I have seen anglers who could identify the Trout belonging to the different streams in the vicinity, when one turned out his catch from the creel. Mr. Brown, in his “American Angler’s Guide,” says: “The Silver Trout or Common Trout is found in almost all of our clear, swift-running northern streams, and weighs from one to fifteen pounds. A splendid specimen of this species of Trout is found in Bashe’s Kill, Sullivan County, New York. Mr. Brown was imposed on by the person on whose authority he makes this statement, for they are seldom if ever taken in Sullivan County above the weight of four pounds. Nor does an average catch in that or the adjoining counties exceed four or five ounces; nor is there any species called the “Silver Trout.” The Black Trout also, which he describes as “found in muddy, sluggish streams with clay bottoms, in the roughest and wildest part of our country,” is also nothing more nor less than var ordinary Brook Trout (Salmo fontinalis), which, as already stated, be- 200 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. comes dark from inhabiting water discolored by vegetable infusion. | Frank Forester’s strictures on this disposition to claim a difference of species, on account of local or accidental causes producing a difference in size, condition, or color, are entirely appropriate, and he had good reasons for saying that the “Sea Trout” claimed by Mr. Smith of Massachusetts as a new species, was none other than a well-fed Brook Trout that had access to salt water, where its greater variety and abundance of food produced a brighter hue and deeper- colored flesh. Mr. Brown, after quoting Mr. Smith’s observations on the fish just referred to, says: “The last-mentioned species, Le- pomis salmonea, is common in our Southern rivers, and with many Southerners goes under the name of Trout Bass, or Brown Bass.” Mr. Brown here takes an error of Mr. Smith as a basis, and piles an error of his own, or that of his informer, on top of it, making “ confusion worse confounded.” Let me assure the reader that the so-called “Southern Trout” is not a Trout, nor has it the least generic affinity to it; it is a fresh-water Bass, Grystes salmoides, and belongs to the Perch family ; and let me further say that there are no Trout, or any species of the Salmon family, found south of Virginia. Foop or Trout.—Flies, beetles, bugs, caterpillars, grass- hoppers, in fact all manner of insects that are so unlucky as to touch the surface of the water, are arrested by the vigilant Trout; and little stonefish, minnows, and shiners are chased and devoured by them at night, in shoal water. I once opened a Trout of eleven inches, which appeared rather stout, and took from its pouch eight small shiners, which equalled nearly a fourth of its own weight. At another time, in a dark, still water, I took a Trout of twelve inches, which had nearly swallowed a water-lizard of six inches, the head of the THE SALMON FAMILY. 901 victim protruding from the mouth of the fish; choked as he was with the lizard, he seized my fly. The little worm hatched from the egg of the fly (which a few days before, as she dapped on the surface of the water, she deposited at the risk of her life), is devoured with its little house of sand, in which, by the aid of its gluten, it encases itself. Hence the quantity of sand found in a Trout’s stomach, in the early months of fly-fishing. The grasshopper is a good big mouth- ful; and sometimes as the angler grasps his prize, to disen- gage the hook, he feels them crush like rumpled paper, as if wings and legs were cracking beneath his fingers. In watching the glassy surface of pools in the still of the evening, we see Trout dimpling the water with diverging circles, as they rise and suck in the little midge, or gray gnat, too small to be seen in the distance by the human eye. In every still water, or eddy, or hurrying rift, or under the shelving edges of stones, he searches for larva, diligent in earning his living “by the small;” or from his lair under ledge of rock or overhanging bank, he watches for larger prey as it floats past, seizing it with unerring and lightning- like rapidity. Concerning the disposition of Trout to rise at a fly after having previously escaped from the angler with a hook fastened in its mouth, I would say that some years ago I took a Trout of ten inches out of a tumbling little hole under some alder-bushes, and to my surprise found what I thought to be a bristle sticking out of its mouth. On pulling hard on it, I drew the stomach of the fish up into its throat, and found the supposed bristle to be a stout piece of silk- worm gut, four or five inches long, and a pretty ginger hackle on the end of it. I disengaged it, and on showing it to my fishing companion, he recognised it as his own drop-fly which a fish had broken from his leader, in the hole I 202 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. described to him, three or four days before. He supposed the fish to have been at least twelve inches in length, when he lost his dropper. Only last summer a young fly-fisher of my acquaintance caught a Trout with a hook in his mouth, to which was fastened a gut-leader two feet long, and three good-sized shot on it, and yet the fish rose greedily at his red hackle. On returning to the house and showing the leader, it was claimed by a bait-fisherman, who had lost it the day before. Brook Trout were once abundant in all the clear, rapid streams on the eastern side of the Alleghanies, from the Arctic regions to the thirty-eighth parallel, and even below it in the mountains of Virginia; in the upper tributaries of the Ohio, as well as in many of the northern streams flowing into the Mississippi; also in the smaller rivers which flow into the great chain of lakes from the north, and in many of those coming in from the south. They are taken fre- quently along the shores of Lake Superior, and in the more southern lakes, where creeks and brooks of a lower tem- perature than the lake itself fall in, and in the rapids at the great outlet of Lake Superior, known as Sault Ste. Marie. Most of the beautiful lakelets of New York, Maine, New Hampshire, and the Canadas, abound in Brook Trout of large size. They are found also in many of the streams that flow east- ward and southward from the Rocky Mountains; in the great basin between the latter range of mountains and the Sierra Nevada; and are numerous in the waters of the whole Pacific coast, as far down as the Bay of San Francisco, though per- haps with some distinction in variety, and, it may be, in species also. In the rivers and brooks of the more settled part of the country, Trout have decreased both in numbers and size. + THE SALMON FAMILY. 208 This is to be attributed to many causes; to the clearing up of forests, exposing the surface of the ground to the sun, which has dried up the sources of sylvan brooks, or increased their temperature, and consequently that of the larger waters which they feed, rendering them less suitable for Trout, and promoting the introduction and increase of coarser families of fish. Streams which once had few fish besides Trout in them, now abound with Chub and other inferior fish. The saw-mill, with its high dam obstructing the passage of fish, and its sawdust filling the pools below; the tannery, with its leached bark, and the discharge of lime mixed with impure animal matter extracted from the hides, flowing in and poisoning the Trout, have done more to depopulate our waters in a few years, than whole generations of anglers. It is an old story everywhere along our mountain streams, of how abundant Trout once were; and the angler is shocked and disgusted on every visit, with the unfair modes practised by the natives and pot-fishers in exterminating them. Trout were probably more abundant in our mountain streams at the time of the early settlement of the timber regions by the whites, than they were during the time of occupation by the Indians; for the red man, although he took no more than hs could consume at the time, was a destructive fisher; his weirs and traps at the time of their autumnal descent, the spear on the spawning beds, and his snare or loop, were murderous implements; the proximity to good fishing-grounds was always a desideratum in placing his wigwam. The rivers flowing into Lake Superior, as well as the outlet of that water, the Sault Ste. Marie, contain Brook Trout of large size. A friend who was on a north-west tour, during the summer of 1860, brought me the profile of a Trout, cut out of brown paper, with the following memoranda 204 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. on it:—“Taken by J. H. Cady, of Sault Ste. Marie, July 30th 1858. Weight six and a quarter pounds, length twenty-four inches, circumference thirteen inches; at the same time took seven Trout from the same pool weighing thirty-one and a quarter pounds; taken in Batchewaunaung River, Canada West.” This may appear improbable, but the gentleman who presented it, and the captor, are both truthful men. I have lately been shown a letter which stated that a party of three anglers went last summer from Chicago by rail and boat, to the town of Green Bay, and there packed their lug- gage on mules and travelled a distance of forty miles toa stream not over twenty feet wide, within twelve miles of Lake Superior. They fished two pools where there was neither tree nor bush to interfere with their fly-cast, and during their stay of ten days, each of them killed from fifty toa hundred pounds of Trout per day; the fish weighing from two to four pounds each. In the state of Maine, Lake Umbagog and Moosehead Lake have great reputation. The tributaries of the St. John and Mirimichi have many and large Trout; and from all accounts they fairly swarm in Lake Nipissiguit, at the head of the river of that name, in the British Province of New Brunswick. Mr. B., an angier of this city, a few years ago, brought home from Maine, where he had been on a fishing excursion, the skin of a Trout, which he has since had stuffed; the weight of the fish exceeded eight pounds. The following was clipped from the “Saturday Evening Post” last summer, and handed to me by a friend :— “Hnormous Trout.—Mr. George S. Page, of the firm of George S. Page & Brother, of this city, has shown us a basket of Trout, caught—he says it does not matter where, and he would rather not disclose the precise locality—but which are by far the largest of their kind we have ever seen. In the basket before us the heaviest fish weighs eight pounds and THE SALMON FAMILY. 205 three-eighths; another weighs eight pounds and a quarter; and another, seven and a quarter pounds. Two others weighed six pounds and a quarter and six pounds; one weighed five and a half, and two five pounds each. “These fish are all the catch of two gentlemen, Mr. Page and Mr. R. O. Stanley, of Maine, in the early part of the present month. In eight days they caught two hundred and seventy-three pounds, steelyard weight, and the fish caught averaged three and a half pounds each. “Mr. Page desires us to say that all these fish were caught in fair play, with the fly. Trout-fishermen must look out for their laurels.” If these fish were caught in the St. Croix River or its tributaries in Maine, they may have been the Schoodic Trout, Salmo Glovert. One who is not accustomed to mark specific differences, may easily have been deceived, though there are some instances of Brook Trout exceeding even the size of the Schoodic Trout. Sir Humphrey Davy, in his “Salmonia,” gives the reader the impression that in strictly preserved streams in England, Trout under two pounds are not basketed, but returned to the water. This is by no means a general rule. Last sum- mer, in looking over an English angler’s fly-book with him, he produced his written authority, signed by the steward of some nobleman, I think the Duke of Northumberland, to fish a certain water. The prper specified that the catch of the angler should at any time be subject to the inspection of the gamekeeper and that he should basket no fish under four inches, 206 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE SALMON. Salmo salar: Linnavs. This magnificent fish has been the exalted theme of all writers on angling, from the time of Walton to the present. It is said that two or three varieties of the true Salmon are found on the eastern coast of America, while there are several described as distinct species by Dr. Richardson, in his “Fauna Boreali-Americana,” existing in the Arctic regions, and as many more mentioned by Dr. George Suckley, U.S. A, in his report upon the fishes of the Pacific coast. The economic value of the Salmon has been the cause of much legislation in Great Britain and her American colo- nies; and its habits and manner of breeding, together with the growth of its young, and its wonderful increase in size, caused by periodical visits to the sea, have been the subject of much discussion and voluminous essays amongst natu- ralists and observers. As abundant as Salmon once were in the waters of the United States, they are now only found in two or three of the rivers of Maine, and these furnish but a small number to net- fishers in tide-water: a few years more and they will be known amongst us only by tradition and in books. Salmon once abounded in all of our rivers from Maine to New York, but, if we except a few stray Salmon which have been taken in the Delaware, were never found south of the Hudson, not- withstanding Mr. Thackeray, in his book “The Virginians,” makes General Braddock, Washington, and Franklin dine on Shad and Salmon at Lady Warrington’s table in lower Vir- ginia. Sh Pie Pa ae aie inuinet THE SALMON. THE SALMON FAMILY. 207 Hendrick Hudson, when he first ascended the river that bears his name, recorded in his journal, “many Salmon, Mullets, and Rays very great ;” and when he passed the High- lands remarks: “Great stores of Salmon in the river.” They were formerly abundant in all the lakes in the interior of New York, that communicate with Lake Ontario, and were also found in Lake Champlain and the rivers flowing into the St. Lawrence, from the south. Stories have been handed down of the great numbers once taken in the Connecticut, and it is said of old dwellers on its banks, that in their articles of indenture, it was stipulated. that the master should not feed his apprentice on Salmon more than three days in the week. The only fresh Salmon we get now, come from Montreal, and from St. John, New Brunswick: from the latter by steamer to Boston, packed in ice, where they are repacked and sent to cities further south. At Chatham, Bathurst, and several other ports of the British Provinces, there are estab- lishments where they are parboiled after being cut into pieces of suitable size, and packed in hermetically sealed cans, and shipped to Europe and the United States. The smoked and salted Salmon generally come from points further north. The rivers which flow into the St. Lawrence from the north, below Quebec, and those that empty into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and into the Atlantic along the coast of Labrador, still furnish rare sport to the angler who will undertake the journey. In the more southern portions of those regions, every means, fair or foul, of taking them is practised, without a thought for the continurnce of the species; as if extermina- tion was the present and ultimate object. The streams of California connecting with the ocean, from the thirty-seventh degree of latitude northward, and the rivers of Oregon and Washington Territory, as well as those - 208 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of the British and Russian possessions, contain them in vast numbers, Dr. Suckley, in his report on the fishes collected on the Pacific Railroad Survey, says, in that part of it devoted to the Salmonide of the North-West Coast: “The species of Salmon which is principally used for salting in Puget Sound, is the Skowitz, an autumnal visitor. Of these Messrs. Riley & Swan, proprietors of the Salmon-packing establishment at the mouth of the Puyallup River, have taken three thousand at one haul of the seine.” Fisheries, I am told, have been established on the Hel and Russian Rivers of California, but owing to the lack of practical knowledge in preserving the fish, they have not proved remunerative. It is said, that notwithstanding the great numbers of Salmon in the rivers of our North-West Coast, where they collect in great shoals at the falls, and rub their noses raw in their efforts to get up the rapids, and where a spear thrown at random strikes a fish, that they are never known to take the fly. This may be for the want of the proper kinds of pools that make a fly- cast ; there is no doubt, however, that it will yet be found, that there are casts on some of those rivers where a proper combination of fur and feathers will entice them If we believe the tales of explorers—and they seem probable —there are whole tribes of Indians on the Pacific, as well as on the rivers that flow into the Arctic Ocean, from Macken- zie’s River eastward, and into Hudson’s Bay, who would become extinct but for the periodical appearance of almost incredible numbers of these fish. There is no doubt that they are the chief food, for a great part of the year, of the tribes that dwell on the rivers that debouch into Baffin’s Bay, Davis’s Strait, and the streams on the coast of Labrador, and that such is also the case to a great extent with the barbaric tribes of northern Asia above the sixtieth parallel, THE SALMON FAMILY. 209 4 a and the rude population of the extreme north of Hurope; for the geographical range of this prolific fish, so valuable to the human race, extends from the North Pole downwards on all sides of the globe (except in one or two instances where the isothermal line bends unduly northward), to the forty-fifth parallel, and in some cases, as in California and Japan, even below it. Mr. Richard Nettle, of Montreal, in his comprehensive little work, “The Salmon-Fisheries of the St. Lawrence and its Tributaries,” says, in reference to the Salmon-fisheries of the mother country :— “Man, the destroyer man, commenced a war of extermina- tion, hunted them with nets of all descriptions, with spear, with hook, with leister; poisoned them with lime, spearing them by torchlight, mangling and wounding as many as he killed; and to crown all, denied them a right of way by building dams, and thus destroyed their fisheries. “T have said that the fish are dogged and sullen. All sportsmen know what I mean. Prevent them from reaching their old haunts—their spawning-beds, and experience proves that it is with difficulty they are enticed back. Good laws, time, and a right of way may induce them to return........ “Before the year 1812, and even in 1815, almost every river in the kingdom swarmed with fish; witness in Scotland the Tweed with its 150,000 Salmon at a rental of £20,000 per annum, the Tay, a similar river, the Deveron, the Find- horn, the Don, the Spey, and numerous others. “In Treland, the Shannon, the Bann, the Lee, the Foyle, the Blackwater, the Lagan, the Moy, with its 70,000 fish in one season. Numerous others also are to be found in the Emerald Isle.” Mr. Perley, in his “Report upon the Fisheries of New Brunswick,” Dr. Adamson, in his appendix to his “Salmon- 14 910 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Fishing in Canada,” and other writers, speak also of the former abundance of Salmon in the Canadas. Mr. Nettle says, “The late Robert Christie, so many years the member for Gaspé, and by whom I have been urged to do battle in behalf of the Salmon-fisheries, has often told me, that while he resided there he never took less than 2000 tierces in the Ristigouche alone..... Bouchet, in speaking of the same river, says 2000 to 8000 are taken...... What would that gentleman say, could he know that the 2000 or 3000 of his day has dwindled down to 200 or 300 at the present time?” Our own countrymen, in their everlasting search after “that other dollar,” after having destroyed their own Salmon- fisheries, are now prompting and assisting the illegal fishers of Canada in doing the same, by establishing packing-houses for the exportation of smoked, pickled, and “ canned” Salmon. Setting a price on the head of every fish of this species that finds its way up the rivers, after escaping the gill-nets that drift out even beyond the entrance of the bays and estuaries, and the stake-nets that extend beyond the prescribed distance from the shore, by paying the mongrel Indians four or five cents a pound for all the Salmon they spear at night. It is claimed with some show of justice that the Indians have an hereditary right to the use of the flambeau and spear—it is the only way in which they take Salmon; but this is no reason why they should be permitted to practise it at improper seasons of the year, for the injury they do to the rivers is visited upon themselves as well as the whites, by the gradual extirpation of the fish. A few years back, and there was scarcely a stream of any size on the coast of New Brunswick, that was not visited annually by large numbers of Salmon, and still are to a limited extent; but the drift-net, the stake-net, the spear, and the high dams—without a sluiceway to help them over, \ THE SALMON FAMILY. 211 are steadily doing their work of destruction, and unless more stringent laws are enacted for the protection of Salmon, or those already passed are more rigidly enforced, the Salmon- rivers of the British provinces will, in the course of a few years, become as barren as our own. ScIENTIFIic DEscRIPTION.—The following is a description of a fresh-run female Salmon, of sixteen pounds, taken in the Nipissiguit last summer :— Length to the fork of the caudal fin, thirty-three inches, girth eighteen, breadth seven, caudal when expanded, nine. Form, an elongated ellipse, its greatest breadth in front of the dorsal fin. Color; back, of greenish blue; sides, light silvery gray; belly, white; there are angular but irregular markings, sometimes like the letter X, dispersed along the back and above the lateral line about an inch or two apart. The brilliancy of a fresh-run fish is unsurpassed, its sides gleaming in the sunlight like burnished silver, as it leaps above the water. The head is a dark steel-blue above, shading lighter below with pearly reflections, and entirely white beneath; it has two or three dark spots on the opercle. There is a great difference in the proportions of a male and female Salmon, which is more perceptible as the summer advances; the head of a male fish is nearly one-fourth of its length, exclusive of the caudal, that of a female is not much more than a fifth, while the head of a female Grilse is not more than a sixth. The lateral line is straight, as in all the Salmonoids. There are twelve branchial rays. The pectoral fin, which has thirteen rays, is a pearly gray, with the first - ray black; ventrals grayish white, with nine rays; anal roseate white, with nine rays; dorsal dark pearly blue, with twelve rays; the caudal is slightly lunate, and has eighteen, exclusive of the rudimentary rays. There is a cartilaginous projection on the tip of the lower 912 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. jaw in the male fish, which closes into a cavity in the snout; it becomes harder and longer, and has more of an inward curve, as the time of spawning approaches: it 1s supposed by some persons, that it is used by the fish in removing the gravel when preparing the spawning-bed in autumn. The eye is one-third distant between the snout and posterior margin of the opercle. There are sharp but short incurved teeth on the palate, maxillaries, pharynx, and tongue, but none that I could discover on the vomer. The artificial propagation of Salmon has been resorted to in Scotland and Ireland, and nurseries for this purpose have been successfully established on rivers which had been depleted of the vast numbers they once produced. As the reader will, find a chapter on Pisciculture in a subsequent part of this work, I will make no further mention here of that mode of producing them—or rather of assisting, or stimulating their production; but would remark, that if the waters of Great Britain are ever restored to their former fecundity, or our own restocked, it must be one of the means employed. THE NatTuRAL PROCESS OF PROPAGATION.—To give a lucid description of the manner of generation with the Salmon, it is necessary to advert to one of its specific peculiarities, which is, that it is anadromous. This term is commonly applied to fish which inhabit the sea the greater part of the year, but enter fresh rivers to spawn; a residence of a certain length of time in fresh water being necessary to mature the spawn and milt. Salmon, as a general thing, begin to ascend the rivers on the north-eastern coast of America the latter part of June, and there will be an occa- sional run of fish from the sea until the middle of September, each school being influenced to some extent in their migra- tion by easterly gales or a rise in the rivers they enter. The first run of Grilse does not occur until a month later, and the THE SALMON FAMILY. 918 ‘ number taken by the angler at that time, compared with Salmon, is often five to one. The early emigrants of course are prepared to spawn first ; but as a general rule, all the Salmon leave the pools and rapids, and collect for this purpose on the shallows and in the tributaries of the rivers by the middle of October,* and the spawning season, instead of extending over a period of six months, as it does in Scotland, hardly embraces as many weeks, for by the last of November the rivers are generally closed by ice, and the spawning beds sealed against the fecundating influence of the air, and many of them are frozen hard even to the bottom hy the middle of December. The probability therefore is, that incubation is arrested for months by the spawn being encased in ice; so, it follows, that a much longer period (perhaps even double the time) is required for the ova to hatch, than is necessary in the temperate waters of Scot- land and Ireland. I have never read or heard: of any person having tested it in America by experiment, as has been done in Scotland, but it is probable, that spawn de- posited in American Salmon rivers late in October or in November, does not produce the young fish until the ensuing month of June or July. But it is not my object now, to show that the general rule for the time of incubation, as laid down by Scotch naturalists and observers, is inapplicable to the northern waters of America, from great disparity of winter temperature; but to give the result of their experiments— carefully conducted through a long series of years—as to the *In Scotland and Ireland, where the rivers are open all the year, Salmon begin to come into fresh water in January and February, and continue to do so every succeeding month until October. The rivers of British America being ice-bound four or five months in the year, the time of coming and going is limited to about four months. 914 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. laws of nature that gover. Salmon, in generating as well as the process of incubation and growth of its young. Those who take an interest in the subject, will refer with pleasure and profit to the “Book of the Salmon,” by a Mr. Graham, who wrote articles on angling for “Bell’s Life in London,” for many years, and who also, with the soubriquet of “ Ephemera,” was the author of “ A Handbook of Angling.” He was assisted in his “Book of the Salmon,” by Mr. Andrew Young, of Invershin, Scotland, the manager of the Duke of Sutherland’s northern fisheries, who thad been an experi- menter on Salmon for more than thirty years. Part of the information imparted by Mr. Young was in writing, and much was communicated orally, whenever Mr. Graham visited him for the purpose of angling, and observing the habits of the Salmon. In the following pages, I will endeavor to give the gist of Mr. Graham’s remarks, or quote them verbatim as may best suit the purpose. “ Salmon preparing to spawn.—The male and female Salmon appear together on that part of a shallow in which their bed is to be dug, and they remain moving about upon it for a few days before they begin the process of nidification. No pre- cise period can be fixed for their appearance. Salmon spawn- ing-beds are made by the fish in sandy or gravelly parts of the river, generally high up towards its source, and not unfre- auently in rivers and almost rivulets,* tributaries to some large river, of course connected with the sea. Before two Salmon, male and female, commence the formation of their nests, they make efforts to drive away every fish that may * This was the case last fall in Pabineau and Gordon’s Brooks, both small tributaries of the Nipissiguit: the outlet of the latter is over a gravelly shoal, and so small that Salmon cannot ascend through the outlet to the deeper water above, unless with the assistance of a freshet. Yet they were found there in large numbers depositing their spawn. THE’ SALMON FAMILY. 215 come within their vicinity. The spawning-bed, which may be called a continuation of nests, is never fashioned trans- versely or across the water-current, but straight against it. “ A Salmon-bed is constructed thus: the fish having paired, chosen their ground for bed-making, and being ready to lay in, they drop down the stream a little, and then returning with velocity towards the spot selected, they dart their heads into the gravel, burrowing with their snouts into it. This burrowing action, assisted by the power of the fins, is per- formed with great force, and the water’s current aiding, the upper part or roof of the excavation is removed. The bur- rowing process is continued until a first nest is dug sufii- ciently capacious for a first deposition of ova. Then the female enters this first hollowed link of the bed, and deposits therein a portion of her ova. That done, she retires down stream, and the male instantly takes her place, and pouring, by emission, a certain quantity of milt over the deposited ova, impregnates them. After this the fish commence a second excavation, immediately above the first, and in a straight line with it. In making the excavations they relieve one another. When one fish grows tired of its work it drops down the stream until it is refreshed, and, then, with renovated powers, resumes its labors, relieving at the same time its partner. The partner acts in the same spirit, and so their labor progresses by alternate exertion. The second bed completed, the female enters it as she did the first, again depositing a portion of ova, and drops a little down the stream. The male forthwith enters the excavation, and impregnates the ova in it. The ova in the first part of the bed are covered by the sand and gravel dug from the second being carried into it, chiefly by the action of the current. The excavating process just described is continued until the female has no more ova to deposit. The last deposition of ova is covered in by the 216 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK “ action of the fish and water breaking down some of the gravel bank above and over the nest. Thus is formed a complete spawning bed—not at once, not by a single effort, but piece- meal, and at several intervals of greater or less duration, according to the age and size of the fish, and quantity of ova and milt to be deposited and emitted. A female Salmon in its third year has a larger quantity of ova to deposit than a female Grilse, or young Salmon in its second year; and it may be taken for granted, that the older and larger either fish—male or female—is, the greater quantity of ova to be deposited, and of milt to be emitted. In consequence, the time occupied in deposition chiefly depends upon the size and fecundity of the female fish. The average time is from five to ten days. It would be more correct to say the mean time lies betwixt. “When the spawning operations—I am describing those of a single pair of Salmon—are terminated, the female fish, with instinctive view to repose and convalescence, falls back into some pool below the spawning-bed just completed, and sown with Salmon-seed. The male frequently follows her example, sometimes from two motives: Ist, to consort with another female, if he have any milt remaining; 2d, if he have not, for the purpose of recovering from the debilitating effects of spawning. A male Salmon may impregnate the ova of one or more Salmon. A mature male Salmon has milt enough to impregnate the ova of several Grilse, or young Salmon; and he will continue the operation of impregnation as long as ‘the seminal fluid lasts. If in the first instance, a female choose a mate unable to fecundate all her ova, she will, when his milt is exhausted, go in search of another, and will be a bigamist or polygamist, as long as nature, or (as phrenologists would say) philo-progenitiveness, compels her to be so. The length of a spawning-bed depends upon the quantity of spawn THE SALMON FAMILY. 917 to be deposited therein, and also upon the hardness or softness of the gravel which has to be excavated. The harder the gravel-bed, the shorter the spawning-bed, for then the succes- sion of nests will be more compact, and take up less space, whether in length or width. “A single pair of Salmon may be forced to form distinct beds, in different spots. For instance, they have commenced spawning in a stream two feet in depth more or less, and whilst so engaged, the river falls so low, that they cannot continue to work in the first selected spot, for want of water wherein freely to move. When this happens they will drop lower down, or at any rate retire elsewhere, in search of deeper running water. Other causes may induce them, e. g., floods, to have recourse to the formation of a second bed, in a spot suited for it. “Thinking as I do the laying and impregnating, covering up and hatching of Salmon-eggs—I use plain words pur- posely—most interesting points in the history of our River- king, I will not, if I can, leave anything connected with them untouched. When I do not state facts, I will bring forward deductions, and, as it were, circumstantial evidence, as convincing to the reasoning mind as fact itself. We have seen that the bed, or trench, in which Salmon deposit their spawn, is made bit by bit, and no doubt the inquiring reader will ask why? I have,I hope, a ready and satis- factory answer. The ova of the female Salmon are not mature all at the same time. That portion of them next the vent becomes first ripe for deposition, whilst the part in the pectoral regions is immature. In consequence, the ova can be deposited by piecemeal only, and that is one of the chief reasons why the Salmon-bed consists of a succession of exca- vations, the first for the reception of the ova next the vent which are already mature; the second for the ova that will 218 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. become next the vent and matured in four-and-twenty hours, perhaps, and so on for several days until all the eggs forming what is called the ‘hard roe’ are ripe and fit to be laid. On this point the common hen, and other birds, afford an analogy. They deposit their eggs at intervals, as their outward cover- ing or shells harden, that is, as they become mature. The analogy extends no further. Birds’ eggs are impregnated before they are deposited; Salmons’ eggs are not; birds’ eggs naturally require animal heat to vivify them, Salmons’ eggs never do. The analogy, therefore, applies only to deposition or laying at intervals. 7 “Let any one examine the roe of a female Salmon about spawning-time, and the peas, grains, or eggs of that part of it nearest the vent will always be found of larger size, and softer than those situated higher up in the stomach of the fish. They are softer also, and their outward filaments are thinner and more porous, and thus they are fitter for impreg- nation—for absorbing the milt of the male as it is poured over them, There is another reason why all the ova cannot be deposited at once. It is forced from the fish, or rather the fish forces it from itself by pressure—by foreing itself into the gravel of the nest. No natural pressure would be suffi- cient to expel the ova at once. When artificial pressure is employed—I mean manual pressure—the mature ova alone come freely away through the vent; the immature ova remain firmly enclosed within their reticulated tissues or membranes, within, as it were, their net-work fastenings. Although the unripe ova should be expressed, they would be useless for production, for their absorbing pores.are still closed against the interpenetration of the milt, and consequently in this state impregnation is impossible. The milt of the male, like the ova of the female fish, becomes mature by degrees. When inature they are very easily exuded, for even holding up the THE SALMON FAMILY. 219 fish by the heads will cause limited exudation of milt and ova. The pressure, or weight of the roe above on the roe beneath, is sufficient to produce this partial exudation. ' “The facts stated in the preceding paragraph are sufficient not only to account for impregnation taking place at inter- vals, for the impossibility of its being done tout dun coup, but also for the improbability of impregnation by intermis- sion or cottus either before or at the time of the deposition of ova. Mr. Young dissipated all doubts upon this point by the following experiments :—He took a female Salmon, exu- ded by manipulation a portion of her ova, and having simply done so, he buried it beneath the gravel of one part of an artificial spawning-pond. From the same Salmon he exuded another portion of ova, but before he covered it over with the gravel of another portion of his spawning-bed, he impreg- nated it by pressing milt from the male Salmon, and causing it to come in contact with the last ova deposited. He then covered them in beneath the gravel, and in due time they produced fish. The ova he had covered in without impreg- nation produced nothing. He repeated the experiment fre- quently, and always with similar results. He has even taken two female Salmon in the act of spawning. The ova of one he impregnated with milt from a male; the ova of the other he did not impregnate. He covered in each under equal conditions, apart in the same spawning-bed. The ova that he had caused to be impregnated were productive; the other proved perfectly barren. This experiment was repeated, and the result was ever the same. “Tt may be asked, how is it that ova and milt are not swept away by the action of the rapid water in which they are deposited—that they are not swept away in the act of deposition, and before they can be covered in beneath the gravel? It would appear that at the critical moment of 9290 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. deposition, the specific gravity of the water is less than that of the mature spawn, for the grains of ova fall to the bottom like grains of shot, and the milt sinks as if it were molten lead. However, we must take into account the effect of the force by which ova and milt are expelled downwards by the spawning fish. “ As some of the ova are deposited and impregnated ten or more days sooner than other portions, we must expect to see the incubating process completed by degrees. Such, in fact, is the case. The evolving of the fish foetus is not simultane- ous, but gradual, and the infant fry come out from their sand- bed by degrees; at intervals of time corresponding with the intervals that took place during the deposition of the ova. We may, therefore, have young fish, from one and the same nest, differing in age from one to ten or fourteen days. “The length of time necessary for the completion of the incubating process varies according to the localities of rivers, because locality produces different temperatures. The tem- perature of river-water is also very sensibly affected — heightened or diminished by the mildness or rigor of the season. In the rivers of the north of Scotland Salmon ova are hatched in a period varying in duration from one hundred to one hundred and forty days. In conformity with the habits of oviparous, or egg, or spawn-bearing fish, the parent Salmon having deposited their spawn, impregnated it, and covered it in beneath sand and gravel, take no further heed of it, or the fry it produces, except, perchance, hereafter to feed upon them. Water influenced by atmospheric action is the sole incubating agent. I may here observe that after the ova are covered in they are safe from all casualties, on which point more hereafter. “It is during the deposition of ova that they are destroyed, and the great destroyers of them are river Trout of every THE SALMON FAMILY. 221 species. These Salmon-pests are ever on the watch whilst Salmon are depositing their ova, and are only kept away from the spawning-beds or trenches by fierce attacks and rapid charges made on them by male and female Salmon, both whilst they are preparing to spawn, and are, at least one of them, actually engaged in doing so. However, as long as a spawning Salmon is in its bed, or nest, laying ova or impregnating it, no Trout will venture to come near the excavation. It is only when spawning fish drop down the stream, to gather vigor for the formation of another nest, or link of the bed above that already excavated, and in which uncovered ova are deposited, that Trout dart towards the bed and devour the spawn. The falling down stream for a short time and short distance on the part of Salmon is of twofold necessity: first, to gain renewed strength by temporary cessa- tion from labor; and secondly, to get space enough to ‘take arun,’ if I may use a jumper’s phrase, in order to be able to dart their heads with greater force and effect into the sand and gravel for the formation of a new nest, or link in the bed- trench. The water-ousel is also a sad destroyer of Salmon ova. It watches their emission by the spawning Salmon, then dives into the water, and descending to the bottom, runs along it to the spawning-bed, out of which it extracts a large quantity of spawn, and would steal more did not the procrea- ting fish see it and drive it away. The spawn once fairly covered in, neither Trout, nor water-ousel, nor any other fish or bird can injure it. The supposition that Eels burrow into Salmon-beds and feed upon the spawn beneath, is erroneous. “Tt is alleged that alluvial deposits frequently settle upon and cover the beds, thereby destroying the ova—addling them, in fine, by preventing the chemical action necessary for their incubation from reaching them. Such occurrences can very rarely, if ever, take place in the spots Salmon select ” 922, AMERICAN ANGLERS BOOK. for spawning. Those spots are in running waters, where alluvial or other matter brought down by floods cannot well abide. And here let me remark, that Salmon never deposit their ova in the sand or gravel of still, smooth, or deep waters. They never breed in lochs or lakes. Nor, a very curious fact, will they spawn in new gravel, nor in gravel that has been recently disturbed by natural or artificial causes. For instance, a spate or flood shall sweep away a portion of the gravel of a ford, and, for many years, a favorite spawning locality, and by so doing expose a new stratum of gravel. Not only will Salmon spawn no longer there, but they will not even rest in their journeys in water having a bottom recently disturbed. A period of about two years must elapse before they will frequent a pool or stream from which gravel has been removed, or to which gravel has been added. So that an excellent spawning-bed, or a famous pool, may be annihilated by a furious rush of water. “GROWTH OF SaLMON-F RY.—The ova having been hatched, the embryo Salmon pierces the sandy and gravelly crust of its nest, and almost instanter assumes a shape somewhat like a hairless caterpillar, or fringed larva of about three-quarters of an inch in length, and tapering from head to tail, having a small sac attached to it, near the throat, about the size of, or rather less than, the original ovum, or single pea or spawn. This sac is the remains cf the incubated ovum or egg, and still, no doubt, contains vitelline, or matter equivalent, for the sustentation of the infant Salmon. In connection with the sac and incipient fish, several conduits, or veins, are visible. The sac remains attached to the imperfectly formed fish for about a month, and is detached or consumed by degrees. The gradual detachment may be observed in a specimen of twelve days old, for at that age it will be seen that the sac THE SALMON FAMILY 223 has visibly decreased in volume, though it has not as yet become undetached, or entirely consumed. “Ata month old the fish-fostus has grown in length, and exhibits to the naked eye plain traces of head, eyes, and tail. Still it is barely more than a pale, misshapen, little longi- tudinal, half-animated substance. “ At two months old the ‘fry’ measures about one inch and a half, is of nearly perfect piscine formation, having all its fins well defined, and on its coat a slight appearance of trans- verse bars, commonly and erroneously termed ‘parr marks.’ In speaking of the young of Salmon I shall invariably use the word ‘fry,’ until they have attained the age of twelve months, when I shall call them ‘Smolts.’ “ At from three to four months a Salmon-fry measures in length from two to two and a half inches—hardly so much. Its head is round; there are pink spots on the body, and the transverse bars are plainly apparent. “ At six months the young fish measures from three and a quarter to three and a half inches in length, and the pink spots and transverse bars continue to become more and more distinct. « At eight months the fry is very little longer than it is at six months of age, but it is evidently thicker or more bulky. At nine months, even, the increase of growth does not tally with the increase of age. No doubt its growth is impeded by (I beg the reader to bear in mind that I am speaking gene- rally, and not of exceptions) its attaining the above age in the winter months, when its favorite food, flies, other insects, and larvee cannot be procured in anything like abundance.” “ A Salmon-fry at ten months measures about four inches, and the transverse bars begin to disappear, silvery smolt scales by degrees taking their place. 994 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. = “ At eleven months its length is four and a half inches, and the bright silvery scales are now seen descending towards the region of the belly. “A Salmon-fry at twelve months old is called a ‘Smolt.’” “Tt now assumes the migratory coat, that is, the silvery one. The transverse bars have disappeared, and so have the pink spots on the sides. .The young fish, a part of the back, belly, and head, is covered with bright silvery scales. At the shoulder a few Trout-like spots are visible. It is now ready at the first fitting opportunity to commence journeying down river to the sea. In order to induce and enable smolts to do so, it 1s not necessary that rivers should be flooded, but there must be a sufficient volume of water to carry the migrating fish safely over weirs, shallows, and other impediments. They will not migrate at low water.” Although repeating in part what has just been said, to elucidate the subject still further, I give on the next page my own explanation of the subjoined illustration. THE SALMON FAMILY. 995 In the foregoing figures, No. 1, represents the impregnated egg; 2. The young fish on emerging from the egg—with the umbilical bladder, from which it draws its sustenance for the first month, attached—this little sack of nutriment being absorbed in about that time; 8. The young fish after the umbilical bladder has dis- appeared ; 4, Represents its size when three months old. 5. Represents the size at five or six months old. Figure 6, on page 227, shows the size at ten or eleven months. It is seldom found larger with the bars or “ finger- marks” on it; and has much the appearance of a young Trout. Figure 7, on same page, represents the fish, when a ‘ month or two older, after it has assumed the silvery coat, that ushers it into the “Smolt” state; soon after which it takes its course seaward, to return in a few months a beautiful Grilse, weighing as many pounds, as it did ounces when it set out on its first journey to the great deep. The first four figures, on page 224, I have had copied by Mr. Fry’s permission, from his work on Fish-Breeding; the remaining figure (No. 5), and those on page 227 (Nos. 6 and 7), are fac similes of those in the “Book of the Salmon.” A careful observer will have no hesitation in distinguishing the fry of the Salmon from small Trout. The Salmon-fry have scales which are much more perceptible, and easily de- tached; they are also more brilliant, and generally with a single row of red spots; the eyes are larger and more promi- nent. There is a fact connected with its change of apparel, not mentioned in the “Book of the Salmon,” but which Mr. Scrope turns to account in proving that the little fish, known for a long time as the “ Parr,” and thought to be of another 15 996 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. species, is no other than a young Salmon. This he demon- strated conclusively by scraping away the silvery scales of the Smolt for half the length of its body and exhibiting the red spots and bars of the so-called “Parr,” still distinctly painted beneath, on the skin. In his “Days and Nights of Salmon Fishing,” can be found a beautifully colored engraving of a Smolt, with half of its body denuded of the scales, show- ing that it had not entirely parted with its beautiful vesture of red spots and bars, but had only concealed it with the silvery coat of its progenitors. The spots and bars which remain beneath the scales, are only obliterated by its first visit to sea—during its transition from the Smolt to the Grilse state. The usual manner of designating the different stages of growth and changes in the condition of the Salmon is thus:— As long as it bears the red spots and finger-marks, it is known as “ Pink,” “Salmon-fry,” “Samlet,” and is sometimes yet called “Parr.” When it puts on the bright coat prepara- tory to going to sea for the first time, it is called a “Smolt.” After its return, it isa “Grilse.” After its second migration, it is a “Salmon,” and is ever after so called. : A Salmon just from the sea is called a fresh-run fish, when it generally has parasites, called sea-lice, adhering to different parts of its body and in its gills. After it has been long enough in fresh water to lose its silvery appearance, it is called a “Blackfish.” After spawning it is a “Kelt,” or “Foul” fish. | Let us turn back, now, to the young fish at the time it be- came a Smolt. The “Book of the Salmon” says that the greater portion of Smolts descend the rivers of Scotland in April and May, and implies that they continue— though in smaller numbers—to go to sea all summer, and even until autumn. This naturally occurs where the spawning season is THE SALMON FAMILY. 227 THE SALMON FAMILY. 2929 distributed over a space of five or six months; but from information received from the best sources, and from reason- able conclusions drawn from premises already laid down, it is doubtful whether the migration of Smolts—that is, in large noumbers—from the rivers of New Brunswick and Canada, commences until late in the summer or early in autumn. I did not take a Smolt during my last summer's fishing in the Nipissiguit, although I caught numbers of the fry with bars and red spots. Nor, in my inquiries, did I meet with any person who had ever seen the young fish in the Smolt state in that river. I therefore concluded, that the bars and spots on the young fish disappeared later in the season, after the angling, which lasts until the middle of September, was over, and that it was not until after that time that they assumed the silvery coat of the Smolt and migrated to sea. It is also a matter of doubt whether the young fish returns as a Grilse until the following summer. The long time necessarily occupied in incubation in those cold waters, and the length and low temperature of the winter which follows. debarring it from feeding and retarding its growth, it appears, would prevent its attaining the Smolt state until the autumn of the second year, and too late to return as a Grilse before the river was closed by ice. In opposition to this idea, it may be argued that Grilse, when they do enter the rivers the next summer, after remain- ing at sea all winter, should be very large. This is not the case, nor does it necessarily follow, if we consider that the extremely cold winter which closes harbors and bays, and frequently fringes the shore for miles out with ice, must, of course, lessen that class of animal life which constitutes the chief food of the Salmon at sea. From all accounts there is a disparity in the size of American and European Grilse. It appears from the “ Book 930 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of the Salmon,” and other British authority, that in all proba- bility the Smolt that goes to sea not larger than figure 7 on page 227, returns in eight or nine weeks a Grilse of five pounds or more. Some writers mention them of eight or nine pounds, and say that the average is over four pounds. The generality of American Grilse, as far as my experience goes, do not weigh over three pounds. During the whole of last summer’s fishing on the Nipissiguit, I killed but two that weighed as much as five. A Grilse can easily be distinguished from a Salmon, even if both should be of the same size (which is not usual), by its short small head, and the shape of the markings above and along the lateral line, which are more numerous, and are round or oval instead of being angular and shaped like an X, as they frequently are on a Salmon. From personal observation, and the information obtained from the canoe-men (and certainly they have the means of judging, for they open enough of them), the female Grilse is | never found with roe, though the milt occurs in the males, who, no doubt, perform the office of procreation with the female Salmon. Grilse lose flesh and condition in fresh water, as Salmon do, though it may not be to the same extent. There is nothing in the water that surpasses a Grilse in its symmetrical beauty, its brilliancy, and its agility and pluck. I have had one of four pounds to leap from the water ten times, and higher and further than a Salmon. Woe to the angler who attempts, without giving line, to hold one even of three pounds; he does it at the risk of his casting-line, or his agile opponent tears a piece from its jaw or snout in its desperate efforts to escape, and frequently it is not until after repeated attempts that the canoe-man is able to gaff it. The only safe plan to secure one is with a wide landing-net. The usual manner of noting the growth of Grilse or Salmon THE SALMON FAMILY. 931 in Scotland, it is said, is to mark them when taken in a net, by fastening a small piece of copper or zinc, with a fine copper wire, in the root of the adipose fin, or in the rudimentary rays of some of the other fins, or in other parts of the body where it interferes least with the health and growth of the fish; the piece of copper or zinc has a number stamped on it, which is entered with appropriate memoranda in a book kept for the purpose. The fish, impelled by an unerring instinct, returns year after year, if not prevented by accident, to continue its species in its native river, and many of those thus marked are retaken and the growth ascertained. Sometimes this is repeated, and their subsequent growth from time to time found out. This and other means of collecting facts concerning the natural history of the Salmon, are at the command of large landed proprietors in Great Britain, whose domains frequently include several fine Salmon rivers. Toe Mature SaLMon.—We now come to the mature fish ; no longer the rollicking hobbiedehoy, or frolicsome maiden Grilse, but the bright glorious Salmon in all its strength and beauty. There is nothing fairer; no fish that so flutters the heart, and blanches the cheek, when for the first time a great swell, and perhaps a gleam of molten silver is seen above the surface on the very pitch of the pool, and the tyro finds that he is fast, by a small hook and a hairlike piece of silkworm- gut, to something strong and heavy; which goes at first where it pleases, with head against the current, and presently with a mad rush takes its course down stream, and by despe- rate leaps endeavors to rid itself of the frail tackle, that at last, by the unceasing bearing of the pliant rod, brings it within reach of the deadly gaff. A Salmon that comes from the 'sea in July a bright fish of ten pounds, loses its pearly hue and stout proportions as the summer wears away. Its fins, which were white and AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. to ow bo comparatively soft, become blue and of a whalebone con- sistency, from stemming the rapids, and from its stay in fresh water. By the time the spawning season is over, it has lost ‘nearly half of its weight, and all of its fine flavor. Then with lank body and big head, bedimmed of its lustre and miserable in appearance, it seeks once more its old home in the ocean, where from the abundance and nutritive quality of its food, it regains its lost flesh and adds some four or five additional pounds to its weight, and when it ascends its native stream again, it is likely a fish of fifteen pounds. “Ephemera” says in his “Book of the Salmon:” “A Salmon weighing, when caught in its descent to the sea, ten pounds, has been taken on its return, after a sojourn of thirty-eight days, on its salt-water feeding-grounds, and when captured it weighed twenty-one and a quarter pounds.” This is an instance of wonderfully rapid growth, still it is difficult to estimate from it, the general increase in size. The same author remarks truly, that some Salmon, from being generated by large parents, have an inherent disposition to grow rapidly. Certain rivers also have a larger breed of Salmon, while in others they are small. Much also depends on the quantity and quality of the food they may find on their feeding- grounds, and the length of time they remain there. We have no account of Salmon having been taken in American waters, as large as the recorded sizes of those which have been captured in Scotland. It is probable, that the North Sea and Atlantic surrounding Great Britain, being warmer, and of more equable temperature than the Atlantic on our north-east coast, are also more favorable to that order of marine animals (as crustacea, &c.) on which Salmon feed, and as a consequence, fish that spend the winter at sea there grow larger. Salmon have been taken in Scotland weighing over eighty pounds. Mr. Perley, THE SALMON FAMIbY. 233 in his report upon the fisheries of New Brunswick, says, he has been told of several taken in the Ristigouche that weighed over fifty. The largest I ever heard of in the Nipissiguit, was a fish of forty-two pounds: the canoe-man who speared it, said it had been in the river some time, and would probably have weighed fifty pounds when it came from sea. It was not a very rare thing to take fish of twenty- five and thirty pounds with the rod in the Tweed, the Shin, and other rivers of Scotland some years back, and many are still taken of twenty and twenty-five pounds. On this side of the Atlantic it is as rare to take them with the rod, over fifteen pounds. The largest fish I have ever heard of being taken with a fly in the Nipissiguit, was one killed at the Grand Falls, by Mr. Lilly, of New York; its weight was over thirty-three pounds: ten or twelve pounds, though, is a fair average weight for the angler, on any of the streams of New Brunswick or Canada. Instinct.—The instinct which induces this fish to seek its native stream for the purpose of spawning, has been fre- quently turned to account, in stocking rivers having the natural properties of Salmon-streams, but which before had none in them. The following instances of this kind are mentioned in the “ Book of the Salmon.” “Loch Shin, a piece of water about twenty-one miles by fourteen, situate in the heart of the Sutherland mountains, is the immediate feeder of the River Shin, noted for its Salmon fecundity. The loch itself has four feeders, middling-sized rivers, viz.: the Terry, Fiack, Garvie, and Curry, in which, pre- viously to the year 1836, not a Salmon was ever seen, though many were in the habit of entering the loch or lake. In the year mentioned, at the request of his Grace of Sutherland and Mr. Loch, M. P., Salmon were caught in the River Shin, shortly before the spawning season, and conveyed to the four 984 AMERICAN ANGLER 5 BOOK. rivers above named, amongst which they were distributed in due proportions. Mr. Young was the managing director on the occasion. In the wonted season all the fish spawned, each in 1ts respective river. Now, mark one of the consequences: Salmon at present, and ever since, come regularly to spawn, traversing the lake to do so, in all these heretofore Salmon- less rivers. Nay, more, the fish hatched in the Terry, at least those that survive long enough, return to the Terry; and the young of the other three rivers return from the sea to them, each Grilse or Salmon entering never-failingly the stream that gave it birth. What wonderful and unerring instinct! One might think that they would remain in the River Shin, spawn where their ancestors had spawned ; but no, they leave their own natal shallows, pass down the lake, through the River Shin, along the kyle of Sunderland, to the sea; and there having become adolescent, they retrace their route, and, after necessary rests on their long voyage, very frequently on the spots of their parents’ nativity, they revisit for the first time, the scenes of their birth and infancy. Revisit them—for what? Being nubile, to perform. the nuptial rights, which they do where their forefathers begat them, and so they go on increasing and multiplying in colonies heretofore tenantless of Salmon, ever since volcanic action called from the ‘vasty deep,’ the mountains and rivers of northern Caledonia!” On our coast Salmon begin to leave the deeps and come into the bays and estuaries in May, and prepare for their residence in fresh rivers by spending a few weeks in the brackish water, where they still find food, though of less nutritive quality, such as Shrimp, Capelins, and Smelts. My friend, John Chamberlain, says, he once speared a Salmon at the entrance of Bathurst harbor, in which he found eleven Capelins. After these fish have thus gradually prepared themselves & THE SALMON FAMILY. 235, for a residence in fresh water, they ascend the rivers on the first rise, surmounting rapids and leaping falls of less than five or six feet with perfect ease, and resting in the pools above. In the early part of the season they make short stages, some- times occupying a pool for a day ortwo. As the season advances, those that enter the river travel faster; it is thought making twenty or thirty miles a day. As a general thing, they have an instinctive liking for the part of the river in which they were ushered into being, should any caprice or law of nature, however, impel them to ascend farther, and an impassable fall prevent their doing so; after fruitless attempts to leap it, they return to the next pool, or deep still water below, and renew their efforts to pass the barrier at every rise in the water. When the time for spawning draws near, they drop down the river to the shallows, or seek some of the smaller tributaries for that purpose. “Hphemera” properly ridicules the notion that formerly existed, and still does to some extent amongst ignorant people, that the Salmon in surmounting a fall, puts its tail in its mouth, and so bending itself like a bow, with a sudden spring and letting the tail go, throws itself above the obstruc- tion. It is clear to every thinking mind that in making its leap, the Salmon must have depth of water, to acquire impetus in throwing itself above the fall. The author in question says, he has seen a Grilse leap upward and forward, somewhat obliquely, the length of his fishing-rod, which was seventeen feet long; and that Mr. Young has known Salmon to clear a fall of sixteen feet. Mr. Scrope, who had been a Salmon- fisher more than a quarter of a century, states that they jump on an average no higher than six feet. There is a great difference in the activity and endurance of Salmon; a young fish of eight pounds, which is as small as they are generally taken, sometimes giving more sport than 936 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. one of fiftee, hooked in the same pool. There is conse- quently much difference in the time required to kill a fish, but this arises in some instances from the nature of the water, still or rapid, or the weather and the time of day. The first Salmon I ever hooked—one of sixteen pounds—I killed in about ten minutes, without its jumping once, while a nine-pound fish, which contended with me for two hundred yards down a succession of rapids, required three-quarters of an hour. Then, again, I have killed one of ten pounds in three minutes, from its having exhausted itself by continued desperate leaping. Foop or tae Satmon.—The natural food of the young fish, in its native stream, consists no doubt of small insects, the larva of flies, and the flies themselves that deposit their eggs in pools and running water to pass through the process of incubation. I frequently took the fry last summer when fishing for Salmon with an ordinary-sized Salmon-fly. These young fish appeared not to feed in still pools or in the eddies on the margin of the rapid, as the Trout do, but in the smoothly gliding, swift water, where the Salmon are found; they would frequently jump at the knots on my casting-line. Before. the British Salmon-streams were protected from improper fishing, and before it was known that the little fish then called the “Parr,” was really the young of the Salmon, they were indiscriminately slaughtered by boys and foolish anglers. This was also the case, to a great extent, after they had arrived at the Smolt state, and were descending the rivers on their first migration to sea. It is supposed, that the feeding-ground of the Salmon at sea, is not very remote from the mouth of the river from which it migrates. Regarding its food while at sea, Dr. Knox says: “The tint of its flesh, its superior flavor, and its wonderful growth, is THE SALMON FAMILY. 237 owing to its feeding on the eggs of various echinodermata and erustacea.” Sir Humphrey Davy supposes the Sand Eel to be one of its chief means of subsistence. It is certain, however, that it does not exclude small fish, such as Capelins and Smelt, from its bill of fare. Every one who has seen the transverse section of a Salmon, has noted the small cavity in which its stomach, intestines, and vital organs are contained; a fish of twelve pounds frequently having the flesh on the belly at least an inch thick. This with the proportionate smallness of its head, is the cause of its giving more edible substance than any other fish of its size. Concerning the remarkable fact that this fish is seldom found with food in its stomach after its appearance in fresh water, Sir Humphrey Davy, who was a close observer of all that pertains to the Salmon, says: “I have opened ten or twelve, and never found anything in their stomachs but tape- worms bred there, and some yellow fluid; but I believe this is generally owing to their being caught at the time of migra- tion, when they are travelling from the sea upwards, and when they do not willingly load themselves with food. Their digestion seems to be quick, and their habits seem to show, that after having taking a bait on the river, they do not usually offer to take another till the work of digestion is nearly performed ; *»ut when they are taken at sea and in the rivers in winter, foud, I am told, is sometimes found in their stomachs. The Sea Trout is a much more voracious fish, and like the Land Trout, is not willingly found with an empty stomach.” I have reserved 11y remarks on “Salmon-fishing” for a separate chapter. 238 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK, THE CANADIAN TROUT. SEA TROUT. Salmo Canadensis: Hamiuton SMITH. With a view of correcting an error which prevails in regard to this fish, I have adopted the specific name above. It is improperly referred by Mr. Perley to Salmo ‘rutia, an European species found in the rivers of Scotland and Ireland, and known there as the Salmon Trout, Sea Trout, or White Trout. As no scientific description of the Canadian Trout has yet been published, I have deemed it a matter of sufficient importance to give an account of its specific characteristics, comparing it with the European fish and the Brook Trout of America. ; Griffith, in his “Animal Kingdom” (Vol. X., p. 474), in alluding to a beautifully colored, though not correct drawing, found on a preceding page of the same volume, says: “Our figure of Salmo Canadensis was drawn by Colonel Hamilton Smith from a living specimen taken in Canada; it is beauti- fully dotted with blood-red in white circular spots.” This is all that this naturalist says of it. Mr. Perley, in his letter to Frank Forester (see ‘Fish and Fishing,” page 122), gives none of the specific characteristics of this fish; even his account of its habits and general appearance would not warrant his referring it to the same species as the Sea Trout of Scotland, for he implies when comparing it with the Brook Trout (S. fontinalis), that the Canadian Trout has red spots, which S. trutia never has, but on the contrary dark irregular markings, as Yarrell says, ‘somewhat resembling the letter THE SALMON FAMILY. 939 X,” which are the shape of those found also on the Salmon. Sir Humphrey Davy and Yarrell make no mention of red spots on the Sea Trout of Scotland, and Irish and Scotch anglers, in whose company I have taken the Canadian fish, say, positively, that the Sea Trout they caught in the “old country” is entirely a different fish, and has no red spots. Mr. Perley says of the habits of the Canadian, or Sea Trout, as he calls them: “They proceed up the rivers as far as the head of tide in each, but never ascend into purely fresh water."* Here he was no less at fault than in confounding it with the European fish, for it is an established fact, that all the Salmon Family seek water which is highly aerated for the purpose of spawning, and of necessity “ascend into purely fresh water,” and that fish of this species will go to the very sources of a river for that purpose, if not prevented by impassable falls or the smallness of the upper waters; fre- quently occupying the same feeding and spawning grounds with Brook Trout, or, as the Canadians call them, “River Trout.” This intimate association is one reason why they are so often confounded with the latter by careless observers ; for a residence in fresh water gives them much the appearance of light-colored Brook Trout, and many persons can only distinguish them by laying an individual of each species side by side. It was thus by imperfect observation, and too readily credit- ing stories of persons who were ignorant of the habits of this * Yarrell, in his work on British fishes, says: ‘Doctor McCulloch states, that the Salmon Trout, or Sea Trout as it is called in Scotland, is now a permanent resident in a fresh-water lake on the island of Lismore, one of the Hebrides, and without the power of leaving or reaching the sea. There it has be2n known for a long course of years perfectly recon ciled to its prison, and propagating without any apparent difficulty.”— Journal of the Royal Institute, No. xxxiv., page 212.” 240 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. fish, that Mr. Perley not only referred it to an entirely different species and misled persons as to its habits, but has communicated the same errors to Frank Forester, who entails them upon his readers. Taking Mr. Perley’s account with Frank Forester’s endorse- ment as true, I arranged my tackle accordingly, and last summer visited the Province of New Brunswick, expecting to take the true Salmo trutia, but after diligent search and inquiry, seeking every source of reliable information, I could not find or hear of its locality. All who had observed fish or had to do with them, averring that there were no Trout in the Provinces but those with red spots, or any fish of the Salmon family in the rivers without red spots, except Salmon, Smelts, and Capelins. I also found that the general average size of this fish when taken in the rivers, was not as large as Mr. Perley’s remarks would lead one to suppose, and that his “average from three to five pounds,” and his killing “in one morning sixteen Trout weighing eighty pounds,” were won- ders “few and far between.” Such rare sport may occasion- ally be found in May or early in June, when many of the schools that enter the bays and harbors are composed entirely of fish of large size, but in fresh water I do not think, as a general thing, that the average will reach a pound. I have taken them as small as four ounces. A Canadian Trout, fresh from the sea, compared with a Brook or River Trout, has larger and more distinct scales; the form is not so much compressed; the markings on the back are lighter, and not so vermiculated in form, but resem- ble more the broken segments of a circle; it has fewer red spots, which are also less distinct. It is more slender until it reaches two pounds, a fish of seventeen inches (including the caudal), after it has been some time in fresh water, weighing only a pound and three-quarters, while a Brook Trout of the THE SALMON FAMILY. 941 same length, in good condition, would weigh three-quarters of a pound more. They become more robust, however, as they increase in weight, a fish of four pounds resembling in its outline the engraving of the Sea Trout in Yarrell’s or Frank Forester’s book. In color, when fresh run from sea, this fish is of a light bluish green on the back, light silvery gray on the sides, and brilliant white on the belly ; the ventrals and anal fin entirely white; the pectorals brownish blue in front, and the posterior rays roseate white. The tail is quite forked in the young fish, as in all the Salmonide, but when fully grown it is slightly lunate. There are recurved teeth on the palate, max- illaries, and tongue, but none on the vomer. If the number of rays in the fins indicate specific differ- ence, or affinity, the following table will show that this fish is more nearly allied to the Brook Trout than to the Sea Trout of Europe :— D.| P.)| V.) AL] C. Sea Trout (S.¢rutta) . . . .. . . . [12}/18/ 9} 10/19 Canadian Trout (8. Canadensis) . . . . {10/13]/ 8] 9] 19 Brook or River Trout (8. fontinalis) . . . |10/12] 8 | 9|19 There being only a difference of one ray in the pectorals, which may be accidental. Although I have taken some trouble to prove that S. Cana- densis and §. trutta are distinct species, and that the latter does not exist in the waters of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, I have no doubt that it is found in the Arctic Seas, on this side of the Atlantic, as I have examined, at the Academy of Natural Sciences, specimens of the young fish brought by Dr. Hayes, in his last Arctic expedition, from Upernavik, which agree exactly with the description of S. trutta given by Yarrell, There were no markings, however, on the back, which might be accounted for from the fact that the specimens 16 249 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. were quite young, not being over eight or nine inches in length; or the markings might have been obliterated by the alcohol in which they were preserved. In a recent publication (“Game Fish of the North”), the author, who writes over the name of “ Barnwell,” says, when speaking of fishing for Canadian Trout on the way from Chatham to Bathurst: “In case you should be too late to reach Bathurst the same day, or have leisure on your hands, stop at the Half Way House, on the Tabasintac, which has the last syllable accentuated, and fish that night and next morn- ing for Sea Trout. They are taken from a horse-boat in abundance and of great size.” After reading the above, I concluded, last summer in visit- ing the Nipissiguit, to take “ Barnwell’s” advice, but was puz- zled as to what he meant by a “horse-boat;” after thinking the matter over, though, I came to the conclusion that the Tabasintac was a river of some size, crossed. by means of an old-fashioned horse /ferry-boat, from which an angler had nothing to do but cast his flies, and take wheelbarrow-loads of three and four pound Trout. Judge of my surprise, when I found the Tabasintac, at the Half-Way House, a shallow brook crossed by a wooden bridge of a single span; that there was no fishing worth stopping for, unless one would make up his mind to go five or six miles down the brook, where it joined another stream of the same size, which would occupy a whole day, or necessitate one’s staying all night at the junction, if he started in the afternoon; and then with a certainty of being stung terribly by mosquitoes, and bled copiously by black flies. I also found that Barnwell’s “ horse- boat” was a large, leaky old “dug-out,” made of two huge logs, joined together with wooden pins, and drawn up and down the bed of the brook by a pair of stout horses, the bot- tom grating over the pebbles, and bumping along over the THE SALMON FAMILY. 243 larger stones, doubtless to the astonishment and terror of all the troutlets in the brook. Notwithstanding my being so completely “sold” by “ Barn- well’s” brief but glowing description of the fishing and the “horse-boat,” I travelled one afternoon in this delightful ‘conveyance three miles down the brook; but as I did not reach the celebrated pool at the confluence of the two streams, and only found one or two places of any depth, my catch, with the exception of one fish of two pounds, was rather small. Without mooting the question of the late Mr. Perley’s proficiency in ichthyology, he was, besides being a genial, warm-hearted gentleman, an ardent sportsman. In proof of the latter qualification, I quote his spirited account of taking this fish :-— “Tt is to be understood that the whole Gulf of St. Law- rence abounds with White Trout from one to seven pounds in weight. They proceed up the rivers as far as the head of tide in each, but they never ascend into purely fresh water. In the salt water they are caught only with the ‘Prince Edward’s fly,’ so called, the body of which is of scarlet with gold tinsel, or of gold tinsel only, with four wings from feathers of the scarlet ibis—the ‘curry curry’ of South America. “Tn the estuaries of rivers where the water is only brackish, they take the Irish lake-fly with gay colors; the scarlet ibis seems the most attractive, however, in all cases. In fresh water the Trout are quite different; they are much longer, very brilliantly colored, with tricolored fins of black, white, and scarlet, and numerous bright spots over the body. When the fish are in good condition, these spots are nearly as large as a silver penny. They rarely exceed three pounds in weight, but are very sporting fish; they take most of the Trish flies, but the red hackle, in all its varieties, is the 944 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. favorite. A brilliant hackle, over a yellow or fiery-brown body, kills everywhere, all the season through. “The Sea Trout fishing in the bays and harbors of ‘ Prince Edward’s Island,’ especially in June, when the fish first rush in from the gulf, is really magnificent; they average from three to five pounds each. I found the best fishing at St. Peter’s Bay, on the north side of the island, about twenty- eight miles from Charlottestown. I there killed in one morning sixteen Trout, which weighed eighty pounds. “In the bays and along the coasts of the island, they are taken with the scarlet fly from a boat under easy sail, with a ‘mackerel breeze,’ and oftentimes a heavy ‘ground swell.’ The fly skips from wave to wave, at the end of thirty yards of line, and there should be at least seventy yards more on the reel. It is splendid sport! as a strong fish will make sometimes a long run and give a good chase down the wind.” There is also a glowing description of what’ the author calls “Sea Trout” fishing, in a book by Dr. Adamson of Quebec, “Salmon-Fishing in Canada,” which will no doubt interest the reader :— “Tn writing of flies for the Canadian rivers, I ought not to omit to state, that in every stream where I have found Salmon, except the Jacques Cartier, the Sea Trout are to be met with in extraordinary abundance, and that they rise freely at any of the usual Salmon flies, provided they are made of a small size, but that the most attractive I know of is a small-sized fly, with a scarlet body, gold twist, red hackle, and stair’s wing. “The avidity with which these fish take, their great size, beautiful shape, and exquisite flavor, must all be experienced before any account of them can be implicitly believed. Sometimes they become a source of annoyance to the nervous and excited fisherman, who, having prepared a seductive fly THE SALMON FAMILY. 945 is about to fish a favorite pool, and sees, at his first throw, five or six of these rush at it furiously—in which case there is no alternative but to change the fly and kill them all off— then you may fish in peace for your Salmon, but not till then. I confess I never found this to be a very great punishment. I am fond of all sorts of fishing, and never could consider it to be any great misfortune to hook and play eight or ten beautiful fish, vying with molten silver in their brightness, and varying from one pound to seven pounds in weight, to say nothing of their flavor when broiled for breakfast, all the time having the conviction on my mind, that as soon as I had done so I should in all probability kill two or three noble Salmon in the same pool. “The best time for fishing for these beautiful fish is when the tide is flowing, and the best place is that part of the stream where the salt water unites with the fresh; they come up with the tide into the stream, and continue to roam and play about it in immense sculls until the ebb comes on, when they return to salt water; in the mean time, however, they take with much avidity, and afford most excellent sport if fished for with light tackle. They are frequently accompanied in their ascent of the rivers by the more weighty and more cautious Salmon, who is often tempted in such circumstances to take the fly. “T remember one morning in July, 1849, the yacht Iro- quois was lying in the river Moisie, when about six o’clock my friend the major came down from the deck, where he had been performing his ablutions, and calling me a lazy dog because I was still lying in bed engaged with a book, asked me to accompany him on shore, as the tide was making, and assist in getting some fish for breakfast. We started instanter, the captain telling us we had no time to lose, as breakfast was nearly ready. In less than an hour we returned, and 946 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. then we turned out our spoil upon the deck; the baron and captain admired them so much, that they insisted on weigh- ing them before one was committed to the gridiron, and their united weight was found to exceed eighty pounds. Of their exquisite flavor, fresh as they were, and immediately after the wholesome exercise in the invigorating air of the sea and of the mountains, it is only prudent to be silent.” In the month of May there is fine sport to be had in taking these fish in the Nipissiguit at the head of tide, three miles above Bathurst. In my visit to that river I was too late for them, and only took an occasional fresh-run Trout, but not of large size, in the pools above the “ Rough Waters.” In the “Basin,” a mile and a half below the Grand Falls, these fish collect in great numbers, at the mouth of a small brook which trickles in over a beach of gravel; but they are not large here, and, having been some time in fresh water, have lost their brilliancy and resemble Brook Trout, a few of which are also taken at the same place. I have taken thirty pounds here in an hour with a Salmon-fly of ordinary size, and only stopped because they were so easily caught that there was no sport in it. At the “Falls Pool,” a hundred yards below the Grand Falls, they are often a nuisance, seizing the fly which in a moment more might have induced arise froma Salmon. As they are not large there—seldom exceeding a pound and a quarter, and not valued much after they are caught, their frequent intrusion is vexatious. A red-bodied, red-winged fly, wrapped with gold tinsel, is the most captivating, and even when torn by their sharp teeth, as it soon will be, it is still preferable to a new one of plainer colors. I have no doubt that a piece of red flannel tied at the head of the hook would answer the purpose, and better than a well-dressed fly of less glaring hue. It is a source of regret that I was not early enough in my THE SALMON FAMILY. 947 visit to Bathurst to find these fish in brackish water, for there is no questioning the great sport they give when just from sea and of a large size; though I think Dr. Adamson, to use his own expression, does not “draw it mild,” when he mentions one of seven pounds as being at all common. Amongst the most amusing chapters of the amusing book just alluded to, is one (the eighth) devoted to a review of Mr. Lanman’s book, discussing his merits as an angler and author. a il ae ati file i) ‘ My we AX 948 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE SCHOODIC TROUT, OR DWARF SALMON OF THE ST. CROIX. Salmo Glovert: GirarD. The only scientific account I can find of this fish is given by Girard; it was brought to his notice by Mr. Townsend Glover, of Fishkill Landing, New York, in compliment to whom the specific name of Gloveri was bestowed on it. The characteristics of interest to the angler I have taken from Mr. Girard’s description, and give them below. “The body of the male is subfusiform and rather slender, particularly the caudal region. The female is stouter, with the peduncle of the tail shorter. The eye is very large. The caudal is deeply emarginate posteriorly. The scales well developed. The upper surface of the head and dorsal region are blackish-brown, the sides are silvery white, and the belly yellowish. The region above the lateral is densely spread all over with black, irregular spots, some of which are confluent ; a few scattered ones may be seen beneath that line on the middle of the abdomen. Four to six of these spots well defined are always observed on the operculum. A few reddish orange dots individually situated in the middle of a black spot, are occasionally observed along the middle and upper part of the flanks. Whether these dots are peculiar to the female or proper to both sexes, I am not prepared to say, from want of sufficient information upon that point.” There is much obscurity as to this fish. Some suppose it to be a species produced originally from Salmon which were prevented by some obstacle from making their annual visits THE SALMON FAMILY. 249 to the sea, but continuing to breed under such restraint, produced dwarfed fish, and apparently a new species. Others think it a hybrid, the produce of the Salmon and Brook Trout, which isimprobable. It is permanent in the St. Croix and in the Schoodic and Grand Lakes, which are the sources of that river. A friend who examined a specimen presented to the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, says it has much the appearance of a Grilse. It had, however, been in spirits some time, and the spots described by Girard were not visible. The number of fin rays are almost identical with those of the Salmon. An angler of Philadelphia, who enjoys the pleasure of taking the Schoodic Trout with the artificial fly nearly every summer, uses a stout one-handed fly-rod and strong Trout- tackle; he describes the sport as being very exciting. Some- times a brace of them are taken at a cast, pulling hard, and making desperate leaps above the water. He has given me from his journal the following memoranda :— “June 1856. Three rods, six days, 634 Trout; 872 lbs. “June 1857. Three rods, six days, 432 fish; 642 lbs. “June 1858. Two rods, eight days, 510 fish; 725 lbs. One rod, six hours, 65 fish; 94 Ibs. “ Average time of fishing, four and a half hours per day.” He also says that these fish are not found as low down as Calais. The Schoodic Lakes are reached by means of the steamers, which leave Boston for St. John, New Brunswick, twice a week, and stop at Eastport, Maine; from whence there is a daily boat for Calais, and a railroad to within ten miles of the lower fishing-places. At Calais the angler must procure his canoe and stores, and make other preparations for camp- ing out. 250 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE GREAT LAKE TROUT. Salmo naymacush : RicHaRpson. The Naymacush can scarcely be enumerated amongst what are strictly called “sporting fish ;” but as it possesses several points of interest to the angler, besides its enormous size, a work of so general a character as this would be incomplete without a notice of this monster Trout. It is purely a fresh- water fish, and exceeds in size any species of Salmon known. Its average weight is nearly double that of the true Salmon. In the waters of the United States, it is found in Lakes Superior, Michigan, Huron, and Erie; the Falls of Niagara preventing its passage into Lake Ontario. Dr. Richardson describes this fish under the above sci- entific name, giving it the Indian appellation, and says it is found in Winter Lake. I have no doubt it also inhabits Winnipeg, Athabasca, Great Slave, Great Bear, and other lakes which discharge their waters into Hudson’s Bay and the Arctic Ocean. With us they are most abundant in Lake Superior, though they are taken in quantities in Lakes Huron, Erie, and Michigan. They are generally caught in gill-nets sunk at the bottom, on set lines, and by fishing with hand-lines in deep water, as well as by trolling at certain seasons of the year. In winter they are taken by spearing through a hole in the ice. In stopping for a few days at Mackinaw some years ago, I saw a Trout of this species weighing forty pounds. It was THE QREAT LAKE TROUT. THE SALMON FAMILY. 253 iaken on a set line in the straits opposite Bois Blanc Island. The fisherman assured me it was not a very unusual size. Its proportions were rather shorter than those indicated by the preceding engraving. It has been taken in Lake Supe- rior weighing as much as a hundred pounds. The flavor of. this fish is nothing to boast of. They are seldom eaten when the delicate Whitefish, which inhabits the same waters, is on the table. It is said that the Naymacush spawns along the shores of the lakes in the month of November. I have never been able to ascertain whether they seek those places where the aerated waters of brooks or rivers flow into the lake, or that they enter the mouths of such streams for that purpose. They are doubtless fish of rapid growth, although there is no reliable means of judging what size they attain in a given time, In returning from Sault Ste. Marie in July, 1844, in a “Mackinaw boat,” such as was then in general use among the voyageurs, I threw a line over, with two stout 00 Kirby hooks at the end of it, baited with a white rag and a piece of my red flannel shirt, and hooked several Trout of this kind near the “Detour,” but the hooks in every instance but one were straightened or broken, and the fish lost; the single | exception being a small one of about eight pounds, which was evidently a young fish, from the fact of its meat cutting nearly white, when we broiled it. The degree of skill attained by the Indians, half-breeds, and traders in spearing the Naymacush is wonderful; but it is only by early education, or long practice, that they become “adepts in the art. The usual mode is as follows :— The spearer provides himself with the necessary weapon fastened into the end of a long ash handle, and the leaden counterfeit of a small fish, six or seven inches long, which he 254 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. keeps bright by scraping with a knife, and ties it, evenly balanced, with a string, which passes through a small hole in the back. After making a hole of proper size in the ice for spearing and taking out his captives, he cuts another, through which he lowers the leaden imitation; then covering the larger hole and himself by means of one or more blankets - suspended on upright sticks, he is ready for operation, and proceeds to lower and raise the counterfeit fish to lure the great Trout within reach of his spear. As the large hole is darkened by the blankets, the spearer is not seen by the Trout below; as he rises in pursuit of the leaden fish and comes within striking distance, he is impaléd by the deadly spear and landed on the ice, where, after a few flaps of his tail, he dies a martyr to his voracity or curiosity. The wood-cut of this fish I have taken from Mr. E. Cabot’s representation, filling in the proportions somewhat between the anal and caudal fins to suit my own notions of its form. THE SALMON FAMILY. 265 THE LESSER LAKE TROUT. Salmo Adirondacus: Noss. This, the Lake Trout of Hamilton and Franklin counties, in the state of New York, is found in all the small lakes stretching along at intervals west of the Adirondack Moun- tains. It differs much in its proportions from the engraving of Salmo confinis, found in De Kay’s book, and reproduced by Frank Forester; the latter looks more like the huge misshapen Brook Trout, sometimes taken when trolling in those waters, than any fish found in Lakes Pleasant, Piseco, Indian or Long Lake, or in Tuppers or the Saranac Lakes, further north: still I have no doubt, from what I have heard, that there are other species, or at least varieties of Lake Trout found in those regions, and that De Kay’s representation may resemble an overgrown specimen of one of them. This fish, in form, is oblong; head one-fourth its length ; upper jaw slightly longer; no scales on opercles; eye one- third distant from snout. Color: back, bluish green; sides, silvery gray ; belly, white; lateral line straight; the body is mottled rather than spotted; branchial rays 12; dorsal 1-10; pectorals 18; ventral 9; anal 2°10; caudal (forked) 3:22, 3. There are two rows of teeth on each side of the roof of the 956 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. mouth, a row on the upper and lower maxillaries, and on the tongue, but none on the vomer. The teeth are curved inwards This Trout is sometimes taken as high as twenty-five pounds, though such instances are extremely rare, they seldom exceed six, and the general average is not over four pounds. They have one of the habits of large Salmon when . hooked, which is sulking at the bottom; but as far as sport goes, they bear about the same relation to the Salmon or the Brook Trout, as a wagon horse does to a full-blooded racer, or a vicious mustang. They are said to spawn in November, along the shores of the lakes, or the rocky margins of islands. They are found in May and June, or as soon as the ice has disappeared, near the outlets, where they are on the lookout for minnows and shiners, which do not venture into deep water. So in trolling, greater numbers, but smaller Lake Trout, are taken near the outlets ; and larger ones, and fewer, in the depths of the lakes. Deep places in the lakes are marked with buoys, and, after being baited a few days, are fished with hand-lines. In win- ter, a place thus baited is fished through holes cut in the ice; but this kind of: fishing affords poor sport, and, as a general thing, but few fish. I have never heard of Lake Trout rising as Brook Trout do, though they are sometimes taken when trolling, on a large gaudy fly, attached by a gut length to the line or leader, eight or ten feet above the minnow. The usual mode of angling for them is by trolling with a “shiner,” a small fish resembling a roach or dace. At the end of this article is a wood-cut representing a gang of hooks baited with a minnow. Stout Limerick hooks are generally used; the pair at the tail, as well as those in the middle, should not be smaller than No. 1; the lip hook, No. 8 or 4; the length of the gang is regulated by the size of the bait. The’ THE SALMON FAMILY, 257 bait is generally put on alive: the lip-hook being passed carefully through the upper and lower lips, effectually closes its mouth; one of the middle hooks is then passed through the back, just beneath the dorsal fin, and one of the tail-hooks through the upper part of the body, near the tail, in such manner as to bend the tail slightly, to insure its spinning, as pictured in the vignette. Two swivels are used: one joining the foot length, on which the gang is tied, to the leader; and another attaching the leader to the line. The rod should be stout, not over eleven feet long, and rigged with metallic guides and end-piece. The reel (a multiplier is best) should contain not less than a hundred yards of plaited silk line. The leader should be of the stoutest single gut, _ and seven or eight feet long. A single buckshot is used to sink the bait in water of moderate depth, and two or three when it is deep; and should be placed at the junction of the line and leader. In trolling, it is the custom of the angler to sit on a stool or low chair, with his back to the oarsman; I prefer sitting on the stern seat, facing the bow of the boat, as it is more pleasant, and enables one to see ahead. Forty or fifty yards of line are allowed to run off the reel. The most likely time for the “Laker” to seize the bait, is when the boat makes a turn, as the minnow is then apt to rest on the bottom, and will recover its animation, and swim about; and if there is a fish near, he is likely to seize it, when it starts again, as the boat gathers headway. There is a constant strain on the line and rod, though the boat may not move fast. But when a fish lays hold, it is known by a backward surge of the rod; when the angler strikes smartly, the headway of the boat is stopped, and the fish reeled up, gaffed, and lifted in. If the fish is large, the boat is backed towards him, or follows; and as he likely has 17 958 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. more than one hook in his mouth, there is small chance of his escape. When a large fish sulks or takes the bottom, his capture is a question of time only. I have known an angler, on such occasions, light his segar from that of his friend in another boat, and wait on his victim patiently for a half hour, humor- ing him in all his runs and sulks, and at last bring him within reach of the gaff. To increase the sport, I have some- times landed, and killed my fish from the shore. There is much difference in the condition of “Lakers.” I have had fish in the boat not weighing more than three- fourths as much as others of the same length, that were fuller fed. The flesh is of a much paler color than that of the Salmon; the meat of a fish of five pounds being a delicate pink, while that of a three-pound fish is almost white. A fish of four or five pounds is excellent when boiled; it is more remarkable for its delicacy than its richness. I have eaten them planked, but they are not to be compared to Brook Trout, cooked on a stick or under the ashes. I have also had them smoked to bring home, and think, on the whole, they are as good in this way as any other, though inferior, of course, to smoked Salmon. These fish are found in our markets, as far south as Phila- delphia, in the months of October and November. THE SALMON FAMILY. 259 BACK’S GRAYLING. THE STANDARD-BEARER. Thymallus signifer: Ricuarpson. Dr. Richardson, in his “ Fauna Boreali-Americana,” gives not only a glowing description of the exquisite beauty of this fish, but speaks with all the ardor of a true angler of its game qualities. He describes it thus: “Back dark; sides of a hue intermediate between lavender-purple and bluish-gray ; belly black-gray, with several irregular whitish blotches. There are several quadrangular spots of bluish-gray on the anterior part of the body. ... The head is hair-brown above ; the cheeks and gill-covers the same, combined with purplish tints, and there is a blue mark on each side of the lower jaw. The dorsal fin has a blackish-gray color, with some lighter blotches, and is crossed by rows of beautiful Berlin-blue spots; it is edged with light lake-red. The ventrals are streaked with whitish and reddish lines in the direction of their rays. The body is compressed, with an elliptical pro- Me ecidhe-ciats The greatest depth of the body is scarcely one- fifth of the total length, caudal included. The head is small, being one-sixth of the total length.” Dr. Richardson further says: “The Esquimaux title (Hew- look-Powak), denoting ‘winglike fin,’ alludes to its magnifi- cent dorsal; it was in reference to the same feature that I bestowed upon it the specific appellation of Signifer, ‘The Standard-bearer,’ intending also to advert to the rank of my companion, Captain Back, then a midshipman, who took the first specimen we saw with an artificial fly.” It appears from the same account that it is found only in cold, clear waters, and delights in the most rapid part of mountain streams. In this it differs from the Huropean 960 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. - Grayling, which loves the gentle current, and is generally found at the tail of a rift or “stream,” as English anglers call it. This naturalist, and keen angler—he must have been—also says: “In the autumn of 1820 we obtained many by angling in a rapid of the Winter River, opposite Fort Enterprise. The sport was excellent; for the Grayling gene- rally springs entirely out of water, when first struck by the hook, and tugs strongly at the line, requiring as much dex- terity to land it safely, as it would to secure a Trout of six times the size.” My experience in Trout-fishing is that large fish of any species are sluggish in comparison with those of an ordinary size; but I am not inclined to concede the superiority claimed by this author for the Grayling over the Brook Trout. Making all allowance, however, for the ardor of the angler, the “ Hewlook-Powak” must have given such sport as the fly-fisher seldom has the happiness to enjoy. It is often a source of regret to the angler, that the natu- ralist, in describing new species of game-fish, is indifferent or silent as to the sport they may furnish; and the fisher reads a scientific description as a story that is half told; and is apt to set the ichthyologist down as a humdrum bookman, more interested in specific distinctions than in the pleasure of catching fish. It is a great relief to find such an exception to the general rule in Dr. Richardson. There is a smaller species of Grayling (Thymallus thymal- loides) described by the same writer, which does not grow above eight inches in length; he says they are taken in company with the larger. The Grayling being a fish in the capture of which the American angler cannot participate, we give no account of the manner of angling for them; but refer the reader who may have interest or curiosity on that score to English authors. * 262 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE SMELT. THE SALMON FAMILY: bo oS: co THE SMELT Osmerus viridescens: Dr Kay. This is the beautiful, symmetrically formed, bright little fish brought from the north, and found in our fish-markets from December till March. s Ichthyologists say there is only one species of Osmerus found in the United States; notwithstanding the small Smelt taken in the Passaic, the Raritan, and of late years, in the Delaware, are claimed by anglers and epicures to be different from those brought from Boston. On discovering the smaller variety in the Schuylkill, where it had not before been found by ichthyologists, I thought it a matter of sufficient interest to present specimens with some written observations* to the Academy of Natural Sciences. * At a meeting of the Academy of Natural Sciences at Philadelphia, held March 26th, 1861, on report of the respective committees, the follow- ing paper was ordered to be published in the proceedings :— “ Remarks on a species of Osmerus taken in the Schuylkill, below Fair- mount Dam, by THap. Norris:—Form. Elliptical, elongated ; section oval; breadth compared with its length (exclusive of caudal) as 2 to 11, and head from tip of lower jaw to posterior angle of opercle as 5 to 22. “Lower jaw projecting, with an upward curve; scales on all the gill covers, largest on preopercle ; five large recurved teeth on the tongue, the largest on the extreme point; two of the same kind on the front of the upper jaw; no teeth on the vomer, but a patch of small ones on the palatine bones and maxillaries. “Qolor. Silvery steel above, with light greenish reflections ; a distinct streak of bright roseate purple extending immediately above and along 264 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Afterwards I ascertained from good authority that it is some- times taken in the Brandywine, at Wilmington, Del., and at Trenton, N. J. the lateral line; sides silvery; belly brilliantly white. Branchial rays 8; D. 11, C. 20; P. 11; V. 8, A. 15.—The second dorsal has about twenty minute but distinct cartilaginous rays; tail forked, upper lobe slightly longest. “The points of difference between this and the O. viridescens are the more southern habitat of the new species, its smaller and more uniform size, and the distinct roseate purple of the streak above the lateral line. O. viridescens (the northern Smelt) attains the length of 12 inches. I have seen the new specié& here described in quantities at New Brunswick, New Jersey, but never exceeding 6} inches exclusive of caudal. “Storer enumerates 14 rays in the pectorals of O. viridescens, but on a recent examination of that species I found only 11, as in the new species, and that the fin rays of both are identical. ‘There are several circumstances of interest connected with this little fish. It is the smallest of all the Salmonide, except the two genera of Scopelus and Mallotus. It is the only fish of the Salmon family, besides the Brook Trout, found in our waters, and the only species of anadromous salmonide that visits the Delaware and its tributaries. Whether this fish enters any fresh rivers south of Cape Henlopen, is a matter of conjecture, but I have no doubt, if properly sought for, it may be found very early in the spring, in many streams falling into the Delaware, particularly in rapids or near the falls of a dam which obstructs the upward flow of the tide. “It appears to visit our waters only for the purpose of spawning, and is found at the falls below Fairmount Dam for a few days in February or early in March. In those I examined a few days since, I found the milt partly discharged from the male and exuding in a semi-fiuid state from the vent. Many of the females had cast their spawn, in others it was partially discharged, and the ova were found sticking to the sides of the fish as they lay in a heap. “T have been told that these fish can be taken occasionally in February along the wharves and in the docks of the Delaware with a cast-net. They are taken with cast and scoop nets at Fairmount Dam. They are common and abundant at New Brunswick, New Jersey, on the Raritan, THE SALMON FAMILY. 265 As an article of trade the Smelt is of some importance. It is said that a firm in Boston, who, it appears, monopolizes the trade in this delicate little fish, sells no less than a hundred thousand dollars’ worth of them during the season, which commences in October or November and lasts till March. They are taken in large numbers along our coast north of Boston, and are still more abundant along the Gulf of St. Lawrence, where they come up the rivers as far as the head of tide to spawn. In the month of May, just above the head of tide-water, immense schools of them are directed in their course so as to pass through a narrow opening, formed by piling stones in two oblique rows nearly together at the upper ends. As the Smelts rush through in a continuous stream, they are dipped up with scoop-nets. A hundred barrels of them are sometimes taken in a week on the Nipissiguit by a man, assisted by a half-grown boy. There they are used for manure, selling for fifty or sixty cents a barrel at Bathurst. The usual price in the New York market is from ten to fifteen cents a pound. and it is said also in the Passaic, though during some winters they even there are comparatively scarce. “Tt is evident from the size, shape, and arrangement of the teeth, that this fish is extremely predatory, and in that respect more closely allied to the true Salmon than either of the genera of Coregonus or Thymallus. “Tn the examination of this fish I have ascertained a fact which is also worthy of note: it is, that the second dorsal or adipose fin (which in this fish is transparent), has about twenty minute cartilaginous rays; they are quite distinct, and the question arises, are there not rays in the adipose fin of all the Salmonide, though it may be covered with thick skin or fat, concealing the rays? The adipose fin was given for use by the Creator, ‘and not as a useless appendage, and without the rays how else could it be contracted or expanded, or moved from one side to the other? It may be said that they are merely cartilaginous, but so are many of the rays, especially near the ends or border of the fins. Dr. Bridges could not discover these rays on examining this fish, as it had been dipped in alcohol, and the fin rendered opaque.” 966 AMERICAN ANGLBHER’S BOOK.. In England Smelts have been transferred to fresh-water ponds having no communication with the sea, and have con- tinued to thrive and breed abundantly. A like instance is said to have occurred on Long Island. There is not the least doubt that much sport may be had ‘in angling for Smelts with fine tackle and a light pliant Trout-rod, and that they would take the fly on a favorable day, for they are caught at the north with hook and line in all the harbors; generally from the wharves by boys, who catch large strings of them during the autumn, and even in winter, when other fish refuse a bait. This is the case with an inferior fish, the Roach, which is taken in the docks along the Delaware in winter. A Smelt of ten and twelve inches, to which length the northern variety sometimes grows, would be no mean prize, if caught in winter, by those who feel that angling is almost “one of the necessities of life.” Small minnows or pieces of fish would, no doubt, be good bait. On examination I have found small shrimp in the stomachs of those brought from Boston. When.taken from the water, Smelts have a fragrant smell, resembling that of a fresh cu- cumber. They are certainly the most delicate fish that is eaten; the roe, which is very large for their size, is pecu- liarly so. The best way of cooking them, after having drawn the entrails out by clipping them at the gills and vent with a pair of scissors, is to roll them in coarse corn-meal or grated cracker, and fry them in salad oil, or fresh sweet lard. There should be sufficient lard or oil to keep the fish from the bottom of the pan. When served up, open a Smelt while hot, and spread a little butter on the inside to melt; pepper and salt it, and lay a piece of the fish on a slice of buttered bread, and take a mouthful of each at the same time. THE SALMON FAMILY. 267 CAPELIN. Mallotus villosus : Cuvier. This, with the exception of the genus Scopulus, is the smallest species of Salmonide found in American waters. Dr. Richardson says it is nearly allied to the Osmerus (Smelt). It is of small size, seldom exceeding six inches in length. They are said to be a delicious little pan-fish, not excelled by the Smelt itself, and that they resemble that fish in the peculiar smell for which it is noted when taken from the water. Capelin are found in immense numbers on the coast of Labrador, and in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, where they are used as bait for the Codfish. One sweep of the net at night as they come in shore, is said to secure as many as will serve a fishing-smack for the next day. They are only mentioned here for their value as pertaining to the Cod-fishery of the northern coast. The following notice of the taking of these little fish is from the April number (1861) of Harper’s Maga- zine; the article is entitled “Three Months in Labrador” :— “ At early evening, after the labors of the day, the seine- boats go in quest of Capelin (bait), carefully searching the little coves and inlets, and creeping along the shores; three men pulling in the usual way, an oarsman in the stern standing up and pushing, while he scans the surface of the water for the ripple of passing schools, and a lookout in the bows, motionless as a figure-head, resting upon his elbows, and peering into the depths before him. Now one gives 268 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. warning, and over goes the seine smoothly and noiselessly, and with a rapid circuit the bait is impounded and quickly hauled on board. One cast is generally sufficient, for the Capelin swarm in millions, swimming so densely that often a dip-net can be filled from a passing school. They keep near the shore to avoid their finny pursuers, and are left flounder- ing upon the rocks by every reflux wave. The Cod often leap clear of the water in their pursuit, and at such times may be taken by the hook almost the instant it touches the water. The Capelin is a delicate fish, about six inches in length, and not unlike a Smelt; his back a dark olive green, sides of changing rainbow hues, and belly silvery white.” Great numbers of these little fish are, no doubt, devoured by Salmon, as they come in from sea and enter the bays and mouths of rivers they ascend. THE SALMON FAMILY. 269 THE WHITEFISH. Coregonus albus. There are not less than thirteen distinct species of Corego- nus described by ichthyologists. Dr. Richardson, in his Fauna - Boreali-Americana, mentions seven: C. albus, the Attihawmeg; C. tulibee, the Tulibee Coregonus; C. artide, Le Sueur’s Her- ting Salmon; @. quadrilateralis, the Round Fish; C. Labrado- ricus, the Musqua River Coregonus; C. lucidus, the Bear Lake Salmon Herring; C. Hurongus, the Lake Huron Salmon Herring. De Kay describes three species: C. albus (the large Whitefish brought to our markets from the great lakes during the autumn months, and identical with the Attihawmeg of Dr. Richardson); C. Otsego, the Otsego Lake Whitefish (now almost extinct); and C. clupesformis, the Lake Herring. On the continent of Kurope there is the Laverett (in the lakes of Westmoreland, England); the Gwynaid (in the lakes of Dumfrieshire, Scotland); and the Vendace, and another species, in Ireland. The Round Fish mentioned by Dr. Richardson is as large as our Whitefish; the remainder, both on this continent and in Europe, do not exceed in size a large Herring, and are mostly known as Lake Herring. The geographi-~al range of the Whitefish in the United States, extends fiom the Falls of Niagara through the great lakes up to the head of Lake Superior. They are of larger size in their more northern habitat, the average at the Sault Ste. Marie (the outlet of Lake Superior) being four or five pounds; while those brought to our markets from the more southern lakes do not average two pounds. The largest 1 270 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. ever heard of being taken in Lake Superior was one of fifteen pounds; but such instances are rare. At one time they were exported largely from the great lakes, being salted and barrelled, as Shad are with us. The usual mode of taking them is with gill-nets sunk in deep places in the lakes; but in autumn they come in large schools into shallow water along the lake shores, to spawn, when great numbers of them are taken with the ordinary seine. Whole tribes of Indians subsist entirely on them in the Arctic regions. I found a considerable portion of the tribe of Chippewas permanently encamped at Sault Ste. Marie about twenty years ago, whose only means of living were the. Whitefish found there. To take them, the Indians go, two in a canoe, to the lower part of the rapids; one in the stern, with pole or paddle, keeps the prow steadily heading up the current, while another, with a dip-net, the long handle bent backwards near the bow of the net, stands in the bow of the canoe. The latter, by a sudden dip, apparently pressing the fish towards the bottom, turns the net dexterously, lifts it, and throws the fish into the bottom of the boat, sometimes taking two at once, and never failing to secure his prey. The flesh of this fish is snowy white, and, though delicate, it has a gelatinous richness which entitles it to all the lauda- tion bestowed on it by epicures. Dr. Richardson says it never cloys, but rather grows in favor with those who eat it, and that one never feels the necessity of bread as an accompaniment. It is said that it is seldom found with food in its stomach, and then only a few small crustacea. Still its conformation shows it to be a fish of rapid growth, and of course a gross feeder. What the food is, that gives it such fatness, or where it is found, has never been ascertained. In the fall of the year, before spawning, it loses all reasonable proportions, looking as if it was deformed. The head, not much larger than a THE SALMON FAMILY. 271 \ Herring’s (attached to a body as deep, and thicker than a Shad’s), appears to sink into its shoulders; and it becomes so fat at that season, that a very large portion of its substance is lost in frying; or if broiled, it is difficult to keep it from taking fire on the gridiron; though, in the early summer, as I have seen it at Sault Ste. Marie, it is symmetrically formed ; but even then it is remarkable for its small head. From its outward appearance, the Whitefish would hardly be taken for one of the royal family of Salmonide, its adipose dorsal fin appearing to be the only characteristic in common. Its thin head and small toothless mouth, so different from the powerful jaws and formidable dentition of species belonging to the genus Salmo, shows it to be an inhabitant of the quiet deeps, earning its living peaceably, and not as the great predatory trout of the same waters. Any attempt by Frank Forester, Mr. Brown, and “ Barnwell” to make it out a game- fish is ridiculous. I have never heard of its being taken even with hook and line on the bottom, let alone its rising at an artificial fly. Nor do I believe that either of the above- named writers has any reliable authority for holding out such an idea. The following description of its specific character is from a specimen obtained in our fish-market last fall:—B. 8; D. 2, 11; C.16; P.15; V.11; A.12. The roots of the ventrals are immediately beneath the middle of the dorsal; the ter- minus of the adipose dorsal perpendicular to that of the_ anal; anterior of adipose dorsal with minute scales. The specimen weighed twenty-eight ounces, was 16} inches long and 44 inches broad. 272 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. BAIT-FISHING FOR TROUT. The manner of angling for Trout with bait, depends much on the kind of water one fishes, or the bait used. In a rapid stream, a light, pliant cane rod, with a tip somewhat stiff, and without a reel, is to be preferred; a fine line of silk and hair, with a gut bottom of three feet; a weak-trout hook of No. 25 or 26 is better than the short-shanked Kirby; split shot should be used for sinkers, one or more, as the current may require. With such tackle and in water as above mentioned, let me describe the manner of baiting the hook. Take a whole worm—not mutilated—of medium size, and enter the point of the hook about midway or rather nearer the tail, and passing it along bring it out a half inch or so from the head; the tail will then move as well as the head, showing signs of life; and when it loses its vitality, it is still attractive when drawn against the current. Whether wading or from the bank, cast in at the head of the rift, and let the bait drift along near the bottom, drawing it back occasionally to make it show plainly. When a minnow is used for bait in still water, the hook should be passed through its back; if in rapid water, through the upper and lower lips; or it should be bridled as described in Rock- fishing. After fishing the main current, try the sides of the rift. On feeling a bite, draw away a little, coaxing the fish to lay hold more vigorously; by his resistance and pulling hard you can ascertain when he is securely hooked; then draw THE SALMON FAMILY. 273 him towards the shore and lift him out, or by slipping your hand down the leader, grasp him by the nape of the neck, and stick your thumb under his gill to make your hold more secure. Allowing your bait to trip along under bushes that over- hang the bank, or to float off towards the end of the rift, sawing it backwards and forwards, is an effective way of bait- fishing. When fishing with a grasshopper, the sinker may be dis- pensed with; and with this bait the still parts of the stream may be fished, where a Trout would be less likely to take a worm than in brisk water. There are several ways of scouring earthworms; the sim- plest is to put them in a flannel bag, discarding those that are mutilated, and parts of worms, and allow them to purge themselves for five or six hours. They may be kept a day or two in moderately cool weather ; the mouth of the bag should be closed at night to prevent their escape. When fishing, the bag may be pinned or buttoned to the waistband of one’s pantaloons, with the mouth of the bag open. Four or five inches of the toe of an old woollen stocking will answer in place of a flannel bag. In fishing the ponds of Long Island, I have seen a float used by some anglers. There is little need of a landing-net in bait-fishing, for by Siving time enough, and a little coaxing, a Trout will hook himself very securely. Having said thus much on bait-fishing, I leave the subject of fly-fishing for another chapter, assuring the beginner that it is no abstruse science, notwithstanding all the learned essays on the subject, and promising him, that after an honest endeavor to master the rudiments, that he will lose confidence in ground-bait, and resort to it, not for sport, 18 274 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. but only in time of a freshet to get Trout for his dinner or a roast; and that the only use he will find for his bait-hooks, will be to give away to the little barefoot boys and girls he may meet on the stream, trying to catch a string of Trout for their supper. CHAPTER X. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. “UNOHANGEABLE, save to thy wild waves’ play, Time writes no wrinkle on thine azure brow— Such as creation’s dawn beheld, thou rollest now. “Thou glorious mirror, where the Almighty’s form Glasses itseif in tempests; in all time,— Calm or convulsed—in breeze, or gale, or storm, Icing the pole, or in the torrid clime Dark heaving—boundless, endless, and sublime, The image of eternity, the throne Of the Invisible.” —— Byron. CHAPTER X SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. Inrropuctory Remarks. Tuer SHEEPSHEAD. Tue WraxrissH, or Saut-Water Trovt. Tue Bars, or Kinertsu. Tus Spor, Pierisu, or Goopy. Tue CROAKER Tue ReprisH or tHe Guir or Mexico. Tue Buverisn, or Snapping MackEREL. Tue Spanish Mackere.. Tue Pompano (SourHern). Tue DrumFisH, Tue FLOUNDER. Tue Sra-Bass. Tue BuiackrisH. Tae Mouter. Tue Tom Cop, or Frostrisn. Tue Porey. ~ THE topography of our coast shows long stretches of low sandy beach, which beat back the waves of the Atlantic, from Sandy Hook to Cape Florida. nable sounds, creeks, and quiet bays, abundantly stocked with Bluefish, Weakfish, Blackfish, Rockfish, Sheepshead, Barb, Croakers, Pigfish, Porgies, Sea-Bass, &c. angler may listen to the waves beating against the ocean side of the barrier, and see the white breakers; and at times may even feel the salt spray which flies over the narrow Inside of these are intermi- Here the (277) 978 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. strip of sand, sprinkling his face, as he sits in his boat and makes havoc amongst the fins. Along our seaboard there are places of summer resort, where hotels and boarding-houses are kept for the accommo- dation of those who come to shoot ‘and to fish; the visitors frequently bringing their families to enjoy the bathing and invigorating sea air. To almost any of these let one who is fond of fishing repair between the middle of July and first of September. Let him provide himself with a stout rod, good flax line, large hooks, a felt hat, a red flannel shirt, and a few “store clothes” for Sunday and dress occasions, and he will have fishing to his heart’s content—big ones, and plenty of them. If he takes the advice of old fogies, or the man who furnishes his boat and bait, he will fish with a hand-line. If he follows the instinct of the true angler, he will fish with rod and reel, and as a consequence his enjoyment of the sport will be enhanced. Of all places within easy distance of our city, commend me to Long Beach, where the accommodations are good (barring the butter), mosquitoes few (if the wind is not off land), and the landlord one of the most obliging and appreciative men in the world, as to the requirements of the angler or shooter. And moreover where Sammy Shourds is always on hand. Sammy can find soft crabs when no other man can; besides he knows all the fishing-grounds, and when the tides suit at each ; when to go on the flats for Weakfish, when in the Cove for Barb, when in the channel for Sheepshead, when to the flat, sedgy islands for Rockfish, and when to squid for Blue- fish. Here, according to the adjudication of the aforesaid Sammy, a friend and myself caught with our rods in three mornings (fishing four hours at each time), over five hundred pounds of Weakfish and Barb, and touched up the Rockfish in the afternoons at the islands. SALT WATER FISH AND FISHING. a9 THE SHEEPSHEAD. Sargis ovis: Mrrcai. Form: Body compressed; back arched, rising abruptly from the snout; nearly straight on the belly from the lower jaw to the first spine of the anal, thence rounding to the last ray of that fin, where the body is small to the caudal. Color: dark gray on the back; sides silvery; belly white; six or seven dusky bars, reaching from the top of the back nearly to the bottom of the belly. Teeth: four or six incisors in front of both upper and lower jaw, with obtuse crushing conical molars in the roof of the mouth and inside of lower jaw. Fins: there is only one dorsal, which has twelve formidable spines and twelve rays, all of which close, at the will of the fish, in a groove on the back; the anal has three stout spines and eleven rays, which close also (but not entirely) - in a groove; the pectorals are very long, and have sixteen Ttays; ventrals have one spine and five rays; and the caudal, which is forked, has seventeen. These fish arrive in the bays and inlets on the coast of New 280 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Jersey as early as the middle of May, and are frequently found in large schools. As a general rule, they bite more freely at a bait as the season advances. They are emigrants from southern waters, and all adults, the average weight being six or seven pounds, though sometimes they are taken even as high as fifteen pounds. According to my theory, which is fotinded on personal observation, those found in this latitude are the surplus production of more southern waters; for most of the Sheepshead in the Mobile and New Orleans fish-mar- kets are small, from a half to two pounds in weight, and sub- jects for the gridiron rather than the pot. The restaurants of New Orleans are famous for Sheepshead, where they are broiled whole or split, and served up to a charm; and with a modicum of claret after his gumbo, a moderate eater is apt to get no farther into the bill of fare than “ fish.” The food of this fish consists almost entirely of molluscs ; the soft-shell clam is therefore the usual bait. It is said, by the “’longshore” men of New Jersey, that it can even crush a hard clam; this can hardly be doubted, when the immense muscular power of its jaws, and the peculiar arrangement of its incisors and crushing teeth, are considered. The teeth in the throat are similar to those of the Drumfish. The sheep- like teeth in front, from which it has received its name, are well adapted to nipping off the barnacles and shell-fish that adhere to sunken rocks and timbers. In fishing for Sheepshead, it is a common practice in lower Virginia and other southern waters where they are found, to drive down stout stakes, forming an enclosure; to these different species of molluscs will attach themselves in a few months, and attract the Sheepshead. When they have made it a place of resort, the fisher ties his boat to a single stake on either side, at a convenient distance, and throws his bait towards the pen. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 281 In fishing with a hand-line, which is the usual mode of taking him, the Sheepshead gives one or two slight premoni- tory jerks, and then a steady pull, when the fisherman gathers in his line as fast as possible, the fish coming along with a heavy drag. When he approaches the boat, there is a desperate contest; there is much probability of his breaking the hook, or his quick downward lunges are apt to snap the line; then the fisher takes in slack, or lets the line run through his fingers, as the action of the fish dictates, and, when a proper opportunity offers, throws him into the boat, where he flounces ‘until the transfer to a new element deprives him of life. . Along the coast of the Gulf of Mexico, they are frequently taken with rod and line, as they are by New York anglers in the vicinity of that city. About rocks and precipitous banks, when there are no obstructions to a fair contest, a stout rod of eleven or twelve feet, a strong hemp line on a good mullti- plying-reel, gimp snoods, and stout Virginia hooks, are used. His pull is at first strong and steady, but as he comes to the surface, his lunges are quick and desperate; still, by keeping a steady strain on your opponent, and yielding to his down- ward plunges as he approaches the boat (which is done better with the spring of a rod than with a hand-line), he at last gives in; and when he is lifted aboard, and in your basket, he weighs something. An accomplished angler of New Orleans, whose hospitality I have partaken of at his summer residence at Pass Christian, — on the Gulf coast, says he has taken Sheepshead frequently at the mouth of Wolf River, in company with Black Bass, with a float on his line, and that they lie about the thick branches of trees that have fallen in. From this it would appear that they habitually come into brackish water, in search of crustaceous animals or molluscs, which fasten them- selves to any stick or branch in the water along the southern 289 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. coast; and that Bass, whose natural habitat is fresh water, meet them here on common feeding-ground. Mr. Bull, a noted angler of New Orleans, assures me he has taken fourteen Sheepshead, whose average weight was seven pounds, in the course of an afternoon’s fishing at the break- water, not over a mile from the steamboat landing, at the ter- minus of the Ponchartrain Railroad. The bait he uses are large shrimp, fiddlers, young crabs, and muscles. After the prevalence of strong south-easterly winds, large schools have been known to come in shore along the piers of the above- mentioned landing, and numbers of them have been taken for some days, when they suddenly disappear in search of other feeding-grounds. The excellence of this fish is so universally conceded, that I do not deem it necessary to say a word in praise of it, whether boiled or baked. It is considered by some equal to Salmon, but, like “Midshipman Easy,” I am disposed to “argue that point.” a | SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 233 WEAKFISH. SQUETEAQUE. SALT-WATER TROUT. Otolithus regalis: Cuvizr. The most striking characteristic of the genus to which this fish belongs, is its doglike teeth. There are four species: Regalis, Thalassinus, Nothus, and Carolinensis, described by Dr. Holbrook as common to the coast of South Carolina; the second and third species were established by that ichthyolo- gist. The first two closely resemble each other in appear- ance, and the second (0. thalassinus), if taken in the waters of the New Jersey coast—as doubtless it is—may be easily confounded with the first (O. regals), which figures at the top of this page. Though closely resembling each other, Dr. Holbrook says they differ in their habits; that O. thalassinus is found only in the ocean, that it approaches the bays and inlets along the coast, and that it is a larger animal. Otolithus nothus is described by Dr. H. as entirely white and silvery, and wanting the markings or spots of other species. Otolithus Curolinensis is marked with numerous spots on the upper half of its body, as well as on the dorsal and caudal fins; which doubtless suggested the name of “Salt- Water Trout” at the South. The species of our coast differs from those of the same genus 984 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. i found in Europe; the former having canine teeth only in the upper jaw, whilst the latter have them in both upper and lower. The subject of these remarks—Otolkthus regalis—is a fish of great beauty as regards its colors and proportions. The tints are difficult to describe; there is something of a green tint with carnate gleamings above and along the lateral line, pearly or bright metallic reflections about the throat and head, and irregular dusky markings, inclining to the forma- tion of oblique lines, on the back and sides; the belly is white; head sharp and long; mouth large, upper jaw armed with long, sharp, recurved teeth. Form elliptical, slightly compressed; back somewhat arched. Fins; first dorsal, nine spines; second, one short spine and thirty rays; pectorals, sixteen; ventrals, one spine and five rays; anal, one spine and thirteen rays; the caudal has seventeen rays, and is very slightly convex. WEAKFISHING.—No salt-water fish of this latitude affords more sport than this big-mouthed denizen of our bays; and it is only the freedom with which he takes the bait, and the great numbers that are caught, that causes Weakfishing to be undervalued. Though he has not the strength and endurance of the Rockfish, his first rush is not less vigorous; and as his mouth is somewhat tender, it is necessary to give a fish of two pounds some jine. His first dash is from the boat, and ten yards of line will be run out in a “jiffy ;” he fights well and at long range if you allow him line, but bear well on him, as the least slacking of the line gives him a chance to disengage the hook, which he sometimes attempts to do by jumping above the water and shaking his head. If angling with a float it should not be at more than three- fourths the depth of the water. With a large float, anda quarter or half ounce bullet for a sinker, you may allow your SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 285 line to be carried out by the tide some distance from the boat ; thus fishing over more ground than when angling at the end of your rod with only a sinker; your chances of a bite are still more increased as your line is reeled in. An excellent plan when the fish are scattered, is to cast as far as you can, and reel your line in slowly, allowing your bait to rest awhile, and then giving two or three turns of your reel- crank, drawing the bait home by degrees. This plan, though, is objectionable if there are weeds or much prass floating about. TAacKLE.—A stout, pliant rod of twelve feet, with a stiffish tip; an easy-running reel, with fifty to a hundred yards of fine flax line, and stout gut leaders; the hooks should be as large as 00. Baits.—Soft crabs beyond all comparison are the most certain; though a white piece of fish-bait,* with the skin adhering to make it stay on the hook, or even the eye of the fish will answer, if they are well on the feed. ‘Great numbers of these fish are taken with the hand-line by what is called “drifting :” that is, to sail into a school of them in a tideway, and letting the sheet go, allow the boat to drift while you fish over the sides at half depth. If the boat drifts faster than the school, she is put about and the fish found again. The flesh of the Weakfish is not held in much esteem when other fish are to be had, and soon spoils after being taken, though it is rich and gelatinous if it is eaten soon. They are generally fried or broiled. * T have had occasion to mention this bait frequently in my remarks on angling for different kinds of fish, and would here say that it is not gene- rally appreciated. Most of our game fish are predatory in their habits, and the first impulse is to seize the bait if it is attractive in its appearance ; they do not wait to taste it, as some persons suppose. 286 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE BARB OR KINGFISH. Umbrina nebulosa: SrorEr. There are two species of Barb or Whiting described by Dr. Holbrook, with various synonyms to each; the specific name of the northern species, however, signifying cloudy, adopted by Storer, in his report on the fishes of Massachu- setts, will strike the angler as the most appropriate for the animal figured above. . Umbrina littoralis, described by Dr. Holbrook, is peculiar to the waters of the South Carolina coast, and said to be seldom taken with the hook. It is entirely white and silvery, without the clouded markings of the northern species. The fish he describes as Umbrina alburnus, is identical with the animal pictured above; both species are called Whiting at Charleston. This fish (Umbrina nebulosa) has a body elongated and taper- ing, the section nearly sub-triangular; back gracefully arched; belly nearly staight; color gray, with purplish reflections. There are six or more oblique bars over the back and sides; belly clouded white; head small; mouth small, and beneath: SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 287 a single wattle or cirrus under the chin, which is no doubt an organ of feeling or touch in procuring its food. Its average weight is a pound, though sometimes taken as high as two pounds. Fins: first dorsal, ten spines, of which the third is much attenuated, terminating in a filament; second dorsal, one weak spine and twenty-five rays; ventrals, one spine and five rays; pectorals, twenty rays; anal, one spine and eight rays; caudal, eighteen rays. Professor Baird says the young of this fish have been taken at Beesley’s Point, near Great Egg Harbor. Their almost total disappearance from our bays for successive sum- mers, and then their sudden reappearance, has led me to the belief that most of them are emigrants from the south. Like most of the Scienoids, they are evidently mollusc-eating fish ; for they are always found near muscle-beds. The smallness of the mouth, however, and the absence of crushing teeth and incisors, suggest the belief that they feed entirely on seedling muscles and clams, and small crustacea. They are found mostly in the coves, and on the sand-bars and flats, where there is little current, and not often in the channels or deep tideways. BarB Fisoine.—In angling for this fish, a good bass rod of twelve feet is best; a light sinker is sufficient, say a bullet of a quarter or half ounce, which should be placed at the bottom of the reel-line, where two snoods, one of twelve and one of twenty-four inches, with No. 1 or 0 Kirby hooks, should be attached. The sinker should touch the bottom, where the fish generally seeks its food. When on the feed, it seizes the bait without nibbling, but frequently there is a premonitory shake, then a vigorous pull, and under goes the tip of the rod; after a stout resistance, your prize is brought to the surface and alongside the boat, but the least slacking of the line, and he is off again, and in the second round is 988 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. almost as game as at first. As he has leathery lips, and the hold is generally strong, he is lifted in with small risk of losing him. When fishing for Barb, it is well to use a No. 1 hook at the bottom, and loop on one of 00 size to a gut length, eighteen inches or two feet above the sinker, for Weakfish, as the angler sometimes takes both at the same time. Soft’ crabs or soft-shelled clams are the best bait. This fish is much lauded by the epicures of New York, where it has sometimes been sold at as high a price per pound as Sheepshead. It is seldom boiled, and is better cooked in the pan or on the gridiron. It has a peculiar sweetness of flesh and a richness of flavor; as all fish that feed on molluscs and crustacea have. When on a visit to Long Beach in August 1855, a brother angler and myself had great sport with Barb in the cove just below the Hotel. They had not been taken in numbers for some years, and had become comparatively a rare fish, until we met with them. In a few hours on the ebb we took upwards of three hundred weight with two rods, and left off from mere satiety, for the certainty of hooking them as fast as our bait found the bottom ceased to be sport. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. Ysu SPOT, PIGFISH, OR GOODY. Letostomus obliquus : Cuvisr. Body compressed, oval; back arched anteriorly; belly straight to first ray of the anal fin; head large. Color: back gray, shading to a yellowish-bronze at the lateral line; sides brownish-yellow; belly light yellow. There are twelve or more oblique bars extending from the top of the back-to a small distance below the lateral line, which is concurrent with the back. It has a distinct dark-brown spot above the posterior point of the opercle. Fins: first dorsal, ten spines; second dorsal, one short spine and twenty-nine or thirty soft rays; pectorals, eighteen; ventrals, one spine and four branched rays; anal, two spines and twelve rays; caudal, eighteen. The mouth is small; the upper jaw is set with small, obtuse conical teeth ; so also are the pharyngeal bones. De Kay gives this fish the local name of “ Lafayette Fish,” from its having first been found in the waters about New York, at the time of General Lafayette’s visit to America. Holbrook, in his Ichthyology of South Carolina, calls it by the common name of Chub, which of course will strike any fresh-water angler as a misnomer. The most common name 19 290 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. along the New Jersey Coast is “Goody.” It is known at Lewes, Delaware, where it sometimes appears in great num- bers, as the “Spot,” from the mark near the gill-cover. It frequently happens that its annual visits are almost, or totally suspended for a season or two. Like all emigrants from the southern part of our coast, it is more abundant during some summers than others. : From the description received from Southern friends, of the “ Pigfish” or “ Hogfish,” so renowned in the lower waters of the Chesapeake for its flavor, and its grunting or croaking noise when caught, it is doubtless the same. Few salt-water anglers fish for them as a matter of choice, preferring the Jarger and less edible fish, for their size, as they give more sport; while the little Goodies frequently linger around and nibble off one’s bait, when the Weakfish or Barb cease biting. At such time it is well to be provided with small perch-hooks, which can be substituted for the larger, and tied on, one a foot and the other two feet above the sinker (a half-ounce bullet), and baited with small. mites of fish or soft crab, and the float dispensed with. If they are frightened away by the reappearance of larger fish, they will return as soon as the school passes on, and bite as freely as before. In angling for Weakfish, I have often made a profit- able operation by thus changing my hooks, catching dozens of these delicious little fellows expressly for the pan. For richness and flavor, no pan-fish surpass them. The hooks should not be larger than No. 2 or 3 Kirby; the long-shanked or what is called “weak-trout hooks” are best. They strike hard, pull vigorously, and bend the rod well, for fish of such small dimensions. They are often taken in company with small Porgies and with the same tackle. They are frequently found in July and August, on the flats between the hotel at ~ Long Beach and Tuckerton, New Jersey. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 991 THE CROAKER. GRONIER. Micropogon undulatus: Cuvier. My acquaintance with this fish commenced twenty-five years ago, in Lake Ponchartrain. I have never seen it north of that water, though Dr. Holbrook says “it is known to inhabit the waters of the United States from Virginia to Lake Ponchartrain, near New Orleans.” Form elliptical, tapering towards the tail; back arched; belly straight. Head large, rather long; minute cirri under the chin. Color, silvery gray on the back and sides, with undulating or irregular lines of dark spots, or rather mark- ings, reaching below the lateral line; belly white. Fins; the first dorsal has ten spines, the second twenty-eight rays; pectorals, fourteen; ventrals, one spine and five rays; anal, two spines and eight rays; caudal, eighteen rays. There are two or three longitudinal rows of spots, or minute blotches, on the dorsal and caudal fins. Croakers are taken in great quantities in the bays and lakes which connect with the Gulf of Mexico. In Lake Ponchartrain, Lake Borgne, Mobile Bay, at Pascagoula, and Pass Christian, they are found in great abundance. In 292 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. fishing for them, a slight, pliant rod, with a stiffish tip, should be used, with or without a reel (though the reel is preferable, as his giant congener, the Redfish, may take a fancy to your bait), a float or not, as the depth of water, the wind, or current may dictate; hook, No. 2 or 8 Kirby; bait, shrimp, crawfish, or soft crab; the first is preferable, peeling the shell off, and baiting with the white body. . At New Orleans anglers expect them generally from the middle of April to the first of May, and catch them in Lake Ponchartrain until autumn. I have anchored off the lighthouse at the end of the Shell Road a mile from shore, and with a pleasant breeze to soften the heat of the sun, a light fifteen foot cane rod, a pitcher of ice-water, a good segar, and a quiet companion, I have passed a pleasant morning and had fine sport. The most approved way of cooking Croakers, as adopted by the New Orleans restaurateurs, is to fry them in sweet oil; the vessel being so large as to float the fish, not allowing them to touch the bottom or sides; cooked thus they are highly and deservedly prized. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 298 REDFISH OF THE GULF OF MEXTCO. Corvina ocellata. Holbrook, in his Ichthyology of South Carolina, says, of this fish, “it is of a beautiful silvery color and iridiscent when taken from the water.” In the gulf it is invariably red, and retains that color until it is cooked; but, from the above, appears to assume an entirely different tint in the neighborhood of Charleston. These fish are exceedingly numerous in the waters of the gulf; at Charlotte harbor, they come into shallow water in such numbers that they are easily speared. Although many persons esteem it a good fish for boiling or baking, or in a “cubrion” or chowder, I have always found its flesh stringy and lacking flavor, and in no way comparable to its little kinsman of frying-pan celebrity, the Croaker. They are angled for with the same tackle, and much in the same way, as for Barb or Weakfish; they generally take the bait near the bottom. As those taken with the hook and line are usually large—sometimes as long as twenty-four and even thirty inches—they afford fine sport. They strike boldly, and run off thirty or forty feet of line at the first dash; as the mouth is fleshy, they are seldom lost when fairly hooked. A rod of fourteen feet, fifty yards of good silk or hemp line, No. 00 Kirby hook, and a large float, are generally used. 294 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. BLUEFISH. SNAPPING MACKEREL. SKIP-JACK. TAILOR. Temnodon saltator. Body oblong, compressed, thicker above, and almost as sharp below as the Shad, though the belly is not as completely carinated. Head large, profile slightly convex ; mouth large, lower jaw slightly longer than the upper; both jaws are armed with straight, compressed, lancet-shaped teeth, the upper jaw having also an internal, but less extensive, row; the vomer, palate, and pharyngeal bones have minute brush- like teeth. Branchial rays, seven. Fins: the first dorsal has eight weak spines, which Holbrook says are enclosed in a sheath or groove; this I have failed to observe; the second has twenty-seven rays; pectorals sixteen rays; ventral, one spine and five soft rays; anal, twenty-eight soft rays; the caudal is deeply forked, has twenty rays, and is covered three- fourths of its length with minute scales. Color, green on the back, shading gradually to a silvery white on sides and belly. This fish sometimes reaches the extreme length of three feet, though the average of those taken in our inlets and bays is not over two or three pounds. Bluefish are found all along the Atlantic coast from Maine to Florida; the smaller fish frequenting the bays and inlets; the larger are found outside, but within soundings. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 295 This is one of the most active and unyielding fish that swims. 'T'o use the words of Nimrod Wildfire, “he can jump higher and come down quicker, dive deeper and stay under longer,” than any other salt-water fish of its size. Look at his clean build, and it is accounted for; his narrow waist and depth of hull falling off sharply as it approaches the keel, enabling him to keep well to windward, as if he had his centre-board always down. See his immense propeller behind! No fish of its size is more wicked or wild when hooked. I have sometimes struck a three-pound Bluefish, and thought I had a six-pound Weakfish on, until he commenced jumping, and after giving him considerable play, have at last (with full confidence in my tackle) drawn him in by sheer force, with his pluck not the least abated. Though the Bluefish is seldom angled for “per se” (as President Tyler used to say), with rod and line, he frequently comes into the swim of the salt-water fisher when he is angling for Weakfish or Barb. Then look out for your snood! one nip with his sharp incisors, and it is cut off “clean as a whistle.” On such occasions, brass wire or gimp snoods are your only security. | SQUIDDING FOR BuusFisa.—The usual mode of taking this fish is by squidding. The squdd is generally a white bone with a hook at the end, or a piece of pewter, which is kept bright by scraping it occasionally; the line is of strong hemp or cotton. With a good breeze when crossing a school of these fish, the sport is highly exciting, and great numbers of them are sometimes taken. The Bluefish is not esteemed as food. It is extremely predatory in its habits, swimming in schools, and causing great-havoc amongst Mossbunkers. Barb and Weakdfish, even, are not secure against the attacks of the larger ones. 296 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. SPANISH MACKEREL. BAY MACKEREL. Cybium maculatum: Cuvier. No adequate idea of this graceful and brilliant fish can be conveyed by description or engraving, to one who has not seen it. Its body is an elongated ellipse, somewhat compressed ; its section oval; head small and long; mouth large; each jaw armed with long pointed, but compressed, teeth, inclining forwards. There are very small teeth on the vomer, palatine, and pharyngeal bones, as well as on the tongue. Color: greenish-blue on the back, shading away into a grayish pearly hue, but slightly roseate along and below the medial line; belly white, like molten silver or mother-of-pearl. It has a series of rows of dark but shining spots extending along the.back and sides, from the pectorals almost to the caudal. The first dorsal fin has eighteen short weak spines; the second has one spine and fifteen rays; pectorals, nineteen rays; ventrals, one spine and five rays; anal, two spines—not sharp—and fifteen rays; caudal, twenty or twenty-two rays. The tail has a carinated projection on each side, extending along the peduncle to the anterior curve of its caudal, which is deeply lunate, or crescent-shaped. SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 297 A Spanish Mackerel which cost me the moderate price of sixty-two and a half cents, on the last day of August three years ago, weighed just four pounds. It was twenty-two inches long exclusive of the caudal, and eleven in girth. I found several small Mossbunkers in its stomach in various stages of decomposition; the tails of those last swallowed had scarcely disappeared down its throat. This fish attains an extraordinary size on our coast and in the Gulf of Mexico. It is considered one of the greatest delicacies of the fish kind amongst us, equalling even the Shad or Pompano. Yarrell, in his work on British Fishes, says that the Spanish Mackerel taken off the coasts of England and France does not exceed fifteen inches, and is an indifferent fish on the table. The Spanish Mackerel is truly a pelagian fish, and seldom enters even our salt-water bays for any distance. It is comparatively scarce in this latitude, and is found here only in August and September, but it is more common towards the south. In the Gulf of Mexico it is sometimes taken with the shrimp for bait, at the end of the long piers where steam- boats land, in going from Mobile to New Orleans. I have heard southern anglers say that on a pliant native reed pole it furnishes rare sport. If they could be found in any great numbers, and were fished for with fine tackle and all the necessary appliances, they would no doubt afford splendid angling. A Salmon-rod and a good casting-line, with a fly of red and white feathers at the end, would take them with- out fail, T have eaten Spanish Mackerel boiled, but it bears no com- parison with one of the same when broiled; by the latter mode, the juices which impart so delicious a flavor are retained. It should be split on the back, as the Shad, when broiled; and the dish garnished with bits of fresh lemon when it is served up. 298 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE POMPANO. CREVALLE. Bothrolomeus pampanus: CuviER. This fish has not been described in any previous American work on Angling, and is unknown to the piscine epicure of the north, unless he has had the good luck, in some southern tour, to test its exquisite delicacy and flavor. For these reasons I take pleasure in giving it a place. The Pompano is a species of the Mackerel family, and no doubt a free-biting fish; though the fact of its feeding at the bottom must make it a fish of less interest to the angler than its congener, the splendid Spanish Mackerel, which lives on the small fry that swim near the surface. I have often desired, but never had the good fortune, to examine a specimen just taken from the water, as those brought to New Orleans, where I have seen them, had been caught some hours. I have therefore given a reduced copy of Dr. Holbrook’s representation of this fish, without his scientific description, believing that the wood-cut will convey a more correct idea of the Ponipano to the angler than a scientific account of it. The naturalist just mentioned says: SALT-WATER FISH AND-.FISHING. 999 “The Crevallé or Cavalli makes its appearance in the waters near Charleston in the month of April or May, and remains during the summer or late in October, and even longer if the summer is warm. It feeds on various kinds of molluscous as well as crustaceous animals, and takes the hook greedily when baited with clams, shrimp, &c., &e.” _ This fish sometimes grows to the length of twenty inches, though fifteen is as long as the average. THE DRUMFISH. Pogonias chromis: Cuvier. The prominent characteristics of this “big fish” are the number of cirri under the chin, and a black spot near the base of the pectoral fin. It attains an immense size, fre- quently a length of four feet, and a weight of seventy pounds. It is sometimes taken in the surf at our Atlantic bath- ing places, the fisher casting his line in a coil, beyond the breakers, and drawing it in. When a Drum is hooked, there is a stubborn contest, the fisherman gathering in or giving line as the occasion demands, and it is only after an exciting and tiresome combat that the fish is subdued and brought to the beach. THE FLOUNDER. The Flounder can hardly be called a sporting fish; still, when other sport cannot be had, it affords some pastime to one who angles with a stiff tip. Its flesh is close, firm, and of excellent flavor. The large ones are best when broiled. 300 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. THE SEA-BASS AND THE BLACKFISH. These are taken mostly with the hand-line, and are only sought for by the angler when fish of gamer qualities are not to be found. The Sea-Bass and Blackfish are both plucky fish. They are good in the pan, being firm of flesh. A rod with a stiff tip is required; they are angled for without a float. A sinker or dipsy suitable to the force of the current is required ; the hooks, No. 1 or 0 Kirby, made of stout wire; clams, either soft or hard shell, are used for bait. THE MULLET. De Kay mentions four species of Mullets: the Striped, the White, the Spotted, and the Rock Mullet. The Striped Mullet found in Lake Ponchartrain is the only species I have ever taken with hook and line. It is a shapely fish, elong- ated, with the line of the belly more curved than the back. Bluish on the back, silvery sides, with rows of dusky spots extending from the opercles to the tail. It has two dorsal fins, the first with four weak spines. It is found only in salt or brackish water. The fresh-water fish known as the Barred Mullet, which never takes a bait, is a species of the Sucker family. In the Gulf of Mexico and contiguous waters, Mullets swim in large schools, and are generally taken with a cast-net. Sometimes they appear near the surface of the water, when they will frequently jump at a white rag or cotton wrapped SALT-WATER FISH AND FISHING. 301 around the hook; at such times they would doubtless take a white or light-colored fly. As an article of food they are not generally esteemed, though the roe, which is very large, is prized by some persons. THE TOM COD, OR FROSTFISH. This fish is very abundant along the New England coast inautumn. After the first frost they become almost torpid in shallow water, and can sometimes be taken with the hand; they have even been thrown ashore with a common rake. They are sometimes taken in deep still holes, by those who persist in using a rod in all kinds of fishing. The tip of the rod should be rather stiff; and one should strike sharp and quickly, as they do not seize the bait with much avidity. The flesh is very tender and delicate, and resembles that of the Codfish in its flaky whiteness; they are generally fried, but this should be done with care, for if overdone they are dry and unpalatable. THE PORGY. Pagrus agyrops: Cuvier. Body ; compressed, oval, arched above anteriorly. Color; bluish-green on back, shading lighter on sides; belly, silvery white. Head large; mouth small, with incisors and rounded molars inside. The dorsal fin, which is continuous, has thirteen stout spines and twelve soft rays, which close com- pletely in a groove; the caudal is forked, and has seventeen rays; pectorals, seventeen; ventrals, one spine and five 302 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. branched rays; anal, three spines and twelve rays, closing in a groove, though not so entirely as the dorsal. This sedate-looking little fish is taken with bottom tackle, The hooks should be small to suit the mouth, as they are great nibblers, and often annoy the angler when fishing for Barb or Weakfish. The Porgy is an excellent pan-fish, and would be more in ‘ favor if it was not so common. CHAPTER XI. FLY-TACKLE. “ Sine, sweet thrushes, forth and sing! Have you met the honey-bee Circling upon rapid wing Round the angler’s trysting-tree? Up, sweet thrushes, up and see! Are there bees at our willow tree? Birds and bees at the trysting-tree? “ Sing, sweet thrushes, forth and sing! Are the fountains gushing free? Is the south wind wandering Through the angler’s trysting-tree? Up, sweet thrushes, tell to me! Is there wind up our trysting-tree? Wind or calm at our trysting-tree?” Sroppart. “ AND the pleasant watercourses You could trace them through the valley, By the rushing in the Spring-time, By the alders in the Summer, By the white fog in the Autumn, By the black line in the Winter.” LONGFELLOW. CHAPTER XI. TROUT FLY-FISHING.—OUTFIT AND TACKLE. Wading-Jacket. — Trousers. — Boots.—Creel or Basket. — Landing-Net.— Rods.—Reels.—Lines.—Leaders.—Flies.—The Whip. Wavine-JACKET—This article of dress, though it may not contribute to the angler’s success, will, when made with an eye to convenience and comfort, add much to his satisfaction in fishing. It should not reach lower than his hips, and should be sufficiently loose for a top-coat in travelling. It should have pockets on the inside and outside of the skirt, also an inside and outside breast-pocket, the latter sufficiently large to hold a fly-book. In the choice of his dress, the angler should avoid any glaring color, emulating rather the gray mists of the morning, or the “ gloamin’” itself. WaDING-TRousERS should be of heavy, strong woollen material, to stand the usual wear and tear in wading rough streams. Wavine-Boots.—Avoid, by all means, those abominable long India-rubber boots that come up to the hips; they are cumbersome and slippery, and limit the depth of one’s wading. They are certainly water-proof, if they are not cut through by sharp stones; but in the event of a fall, which is likely to occur to the wearer, or wading an inch deeper than the height of his boots, their imperviousness to water becomes an objection, and it is as hard to get the water out as it was for it to get in. I have seen an angler, who insisted on using 20 (305) 806 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. them, after getting a fall, lie on his back and elevate his heels into the air, forming a humanized letter 4, and the water which ran out of his boots, ran down, or rather up, his back. Do not be persuaded to try a pair of them; if you do, to use the expression of an Irish friend, “you will come to grief;” but go to your bootmaker, and get him to make you a stout pair of donble-soled lace-boots, to come above and fit snugly around the ankle; have only one heel-tap, and stud the soles (not too thickly) from toe to heel with soft iron hob- nails, such as are used by foundrymen and forgemen to pro- tect the soles of their shoes when treading on hot iron. The soft iron of which these nails are made gives a firm hold on slippery rocks. Stout woollen socks or stockings should invariably be used to wade in; they are softer and feel warmer than cotton when wet. Tue CREEL or BaskeET should be of the usual shape, to fit one’s side, and of capacity for fourteen pounds of trout; this size is convenient for stowing wading-shoes and trousers in, and a bottle of claret or anything else may be securely rolled in the trousers, when packing up for an excursion. The “top-tile’ should be a drab or light-gray mixed felt hat, with a twisted string, as well as a band (or in place of a band), which is convenient to tuck flies under, when one is changing them, and does not wish to return them wet to his book. Lanpine-Net.—I have tried many nets that were recom- mended as handy and easily carried, and, after many experi- ments, at length hit on the following simple expedient, which I will try to describe: When preparing for an excursion, put into your rod-bag, or lash on the outside of it, a piece of rat- tan the size of your little finger, and about four feet long. On arriving at your quarters, bend it in the middle, and, after slipping the net 7n, bring the two ends together so as to form TROUT FLY-FISHING. 307 a handle, as represented in the larger figure of the annexed illustration, and then take a few turns of waxed twine near the bow, and again at the end of the handle, fastening in a leather tab with a button-hole. It is to be suspended by a button sewed on the back of your coat below the collar. It does not annoy or impede your progress, and is ready for use when required; a bow ten or twelve inches in diameter, and a handle six or eight inches in length, is sufficient. Where the two surfaces of the rattan come in contact, pare off a thin strip from each, to make them lie together snugly; but do not take off enough to impair the strength of the handle. A more sightly net can be made as follows [see the figure to the right]: Bend a piece of rattan thirty inches long into a circle, sticking the two ends into a brass tube, which has a screw on the outer circumference; this screw is fitted into a nut in the end of a ferule fastened on the end of a short han- dle. The handle can be unscrewed, and the net may be packed in the creel by slightly compressing the bow. It is ‘carried, when fishing, in the same way as the net before described, buttoned to the wading-jacket by a tab. For fear I may fail to mention it elsewhere, I would here impress on the angler the convenience, and, as it frequently turns out, the absolute necessity, of having fine and coarse silk and twine in his pockets, as well as the indispensable lump 808 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of shoemaker’s wax pressed between the folds of a stout piece of leather, for it may be that he will have to splice his line or rod, or repair other damage. Fiy-Rops.—There is as great a diversity in the size and flow of the waters where Trout are found, as there is in the size of the fish found in them; it is therefore expedient for.an angler who fishes all waters, to have two rods for casting the fly. For the rivers and lakes of Maine, the streams of Canada, and wherever Trout are found in large waters, a good stout rod of not less than twelve and a half or thirteen feet is best; it should weigh at least twelve ounces. Though withy, it should have a stiffish tip; the line, leader, and flies required in such waters being larger than the fly-tackle in general use. For the lively tributaries of the Susquehanna, Delaware, and Hudson, the streams of New England, and for brook-fishing generally, where wading is necessary, a rod from seven to nine ounces in weight, and from twelve to twelve feet four inches long, is most suitable. A rod of this size is so light, that incessant casting does not weary one, and the size of the fish does not make a rod of greater power necessary. Having a preference for such streams as last mentioned, I give my notion of what a rod for such fishing should be, from one made for my own use. Using a scale with minute fractions of an inch and a pair of callipers, I find the diameters at various distances from the lower end of the butt, as follows:—The grasp of the rod, say at eight inches from the lower end, is one inch; at eighteen inches, $3; at twenty-four inches, 13; at four feet (the first ferule), 44; at six feet, 2; at eight feet (the splice, or upper ferule), 34; at ten feet (the middle of the tip), x4; at the extreme tip, 3%. The butt of a fly-rod should be of well-seasoned white ash, the middle joint of ironwood, and the tip of quartered and TROUT FLY-FISHING. 509 spliced bamboo. The manner of making tips of this kind is explained in an article on “Rod Making,” found in a subsequent chapter. The tip would be as efficient, though not so stiff, if twelve or eighteen inches of the stouter part were of the same wood as the middle joint. The groove which holds the reel should be below the re where the rod is grasped by the hand. I prefer its extending beneath the ferule at the extreme butt; the “balance” of the rod is thus thrown nearer the hand, and its weight “ out- board”—to use a nautical phrase—is reduced, and the fatigue of the wrist and forearm in casting is thus lessened, or scarcely felt. To avoid the difficulty of taking off the reel, which so often occurs from the swelling of the wood, and the conse- quent tightening of" the reel-bands, I have adopted the plan of having no sliding band, but to secure one end of the strip to which the reel is fastened by slipping it under the butt ferule, and binding down the other end with a neat braid or buckskin string, three or four turns being sufficient to hold it tight. To provide also against a similar inconvenience, I make each joint of my fly-rods without the usual wooden socket at the lower end of the outside ferule, and consequently without any projection of the wood below the end of the male ferule, which fits into it; for the reason that wood wil/ swell on becoming damp, and the plug—if I may so call it—expand- ing inside the wooden socket, will stick fast; and the angler is under the necessity of taking his rod home unjointed, or doing some violence to the ferules. In fly-rods, the ferules which join the different pieces together are generally unnecessarily long, and interfere with the play and spring of the rod. There is no necessity for having the ferule which joins the middle piece to the butt more than two inches long, and that which joins the middle 810 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. piece to the tip more than one and a half inches. It is better, if the angler has the knack and patience, to join these two pieces by a neat splice about three inches long, which should be closely wrapped with coarse waxed silk, This. splice will be all the more secure by rubbing each surface where they are brought in contact, with shoemaker’s wax. In the days of stage-coaches, a rod of four pieces was most convenient in travelling, but of late years, when most fishing-grounds can be reached by rail, one of three pieces is easily and safely carried, and is preferred by most anglers, on account of its having fewer ferules. The rings through which the line passes should be as light as possible, gradually lessening in size towards the end of the tip, where they need not be larger than to allow the free passage of the line. Under the head of “Rod Making,” I shall endeavor to impart to the reader whatever knowledge of suitable wood and materials I may have acquired as an amateur rod-maker; being well satisfied that the angler who has leisure, and aptness for mechanism, will derive additional pleasure from fishing with a rod of his own make. English writers recommend that the last six or eight inches of a fly-tip should be of whalebone. The objection to this is, that when this material is reduced to the requisite size, it becomes soft and inelastic from moisture, and brittle from cold or dryness; in its former condition it is too limp to lift the line from the water with a proper spring. Some authors also recommend hollow butts, on account of their convenience for carrying extra tips; they are now as obsolete as hazel tips and wooden reels. Such a rod as I have recommended might not stand a long day’s fishing without warping, where the average size of Trout are such as Sir Humphrey Davy speaks of taking from his noble friend’s preserves in the Coln or Wandle, or such as ‘ TROUT FLY-FISHING. 311 are to be found occasionally in the lakes of the Adirondack Mountains or Maine; but for lightness, spring, and pleasant casting, a rod of this kind is generally preferred to a heavier or stouter rod, and will meet every demand made on its strength by the usual run of Trout found in a stream that requires wading. Few anglers, after having accustomed themselves, though only for a day, to casting with a light, pliant, one-handed rod as here described, are ever satisfied to resume a two-handed rod, or one of greater length and weight. There are many highly-finished one-handed English fly- rods imported and sold by tackle stores, but they are too stiff, besides being heavier by one-third than is necessary, and so elogged with unnecessary mountings, reel-fastenings, ferules, wrappings, and varnish, that the purchaser is apt to abandon them after a few seasons’ experience, for a rod of his own designing, or his own make. The more weight or force applied to the tip of a well- proportioned fly-rod, the more the strain is thrown on the lower part; exemplifying the principle of Remington’s bridge, in which the strain is longitudinal where the timbers are small, and transverse at the abutments. The color of a rod, if not too light, is of little importance ; it may be stained black or yellow; the latter color should never be produced by strong acids, which are apt to impair the strength of the wood. Dark woods, of course, require no staining. A neutral tint is imparted by one or two coats of common writing-fluid, of bluish tint. Shellac, which is soluble in alcohol or ether, is generally preferred to copal varnish; it should be applied thin; the glare of the last coat should be removed from a new rod by sprinkling a little segar ashes on a wet rag, rubbing gently, and then wiping it off with clean water. 312 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK A good plan for protecting a rod from moisture, is to give it a thin coat or two of boiled linseed oil, after staining it. The oil should be applied warm, and rubbed well into the grain of the wood. It should dry thoroughly before var- nishing. In a rod for my own use I prefer a tip reasonably stiff, and the middle piece somewhat slight below the ferule that joins it to the tip. This is what some anglers call a “top-heavy” rod, which makes casting easier; the tip being stiffish, lifts the line more readily from the water. ReEts.—A small light reel, which will hold twenty-five yards of line, is best for Trout-fishing. One with a short axle, which brings the plates of the reel close together, is to be preferred; as it winds the line more compactly on the spool. I have a simple click reel of this kind, which is two inches in diameter and only three-quarters of an inch between the plates. John Krider, at the north-east corner of Second and Walnut streets, Philadelphia, generally keeps them on hand, or will have them made to order. Lines.—A plaited or twisted line of hair and silk, tapering for the last five or six yards, is by all odds the best for Trout-fishing. LEapers.—A leader should taper gradually from the end where it joins the line, to the end to which the stretcher-fly is attached, and should be two-thirds or three-fourths the length of the rod. I prefer making my own leaders to buying them at the tackle stores. It is very easily done by soaking the gut well, and using the angler’s double knot. An illustration of this knot will be found in another chapter. Fiizs.—In giving a list of flies best adapted to American waters, I have done so without reference to the opinions of English writers, considering many of their rules and theories regarding flies inapplicable to our country. The observations 1. Ginger Hackle. 2. Grouse Ilackle, 3. Dotterel. 4. A Palmer, 5. Red Spinner. TROUT FLIES. 6. Coachman. 7. Alder Fly. 8. Yellow Sally. 9. Gray Drake—A May Fly. TROUT FLY-FISHING. 313 here jotted down, are rather the result of my own experience, as I have learned them on the stream and from members of our little club the “ Houseless Anglers.” Much, perhaps most, of the theoretical knowledge of flies acquired by the reading angler, when he begins, is obtained from the writings of our brethren of the “ Fast-anchored Isle.” Every fly-fisher can read Chitty, Ronalds, Rene, “Hphemera,” and others, with interest and profit. Though Ido not pretend to condemn or think lightly of their pre- cepts, drawn from long experience of bright waters and its inmates, yet if followed without modification and proper allowance for climate, season, water, and insect life here as contrasted with England, the beginner is apt to be led into many errors, corrected only by long summers of experience. So he will come at last to the conclusion, that of the many flies described and illustrated in English books, or exhibited on the fly-makers’ pattern-cards, a very limited assortment is really necessary, and many totally useless, in making up his book. He will also find, after the lapse of some years, that of the great variety with which he at first stored his book, he has gradually got rid of at least three-fourths of them, as he has of the theory of strict imitation, and the routine system, (that is, an exact imitation of the natural fly, and particular flies for each month), and settles down to the use of a half dozen or so of hackles and a few winged flies; and with such assortment, considers his book stocked beyond any contin- gency. An extensive knowledge of flies and their names can hardly be of much practical advantage. Many a rustic adept is ignorant of a book ever having been written on fly-fishing, and knows the few flies he uses only by his own limited vocabulary. One of the most accomplished fly-fishers I ever met with has told me that his first essay was with the scalp 314 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of a red-headed woodpecker tied to the top of his hook. Notwithstanding all this, there is still a harmonious blending of colors or attractive hues, as well as the neat and graceful tying of a fly, that makes it killing. With these few preliminary remarks, I shall describe only the flies which I have used successfully, and refer the reader to the English works on angling just mentioned, for a descrip- tion of the great variety known by so many different names. HackLEes AND PaLMsrRs. The Red Hackle—This is what the renowned Mr. Conroy, of Fulton St., New York, calls a “ Journal-Fly,” which we suppose to mean a fly for general use. It is one of the indispensable hackles. All fly-fishers, from the country bobkin to the most experienced angler, have constant use for it; few make their whip for the first cast of the season without it. It is particularly killing when the water is discolored by a freshet, at which time it is best asa stretcher on a No. 4 hook, and dressed Palmer* fashion. When used as a drop-fly, it should not be dressed on hooks larger than No. 6 or 7. It is a good fly from April to the 1st of September, after which, as Dr. Bethune righteously says, no “true-hearted angler” will wet a line in a Trout-stream. The body of this fly is made of red mohair or the ravellings of red moreen or floss silk; sometimes with yellow floss; or the hurl of the peacock, the tail tipped with gold tinsel. If dressed as a Palmer, the body is wound with gold or silver thread; gold is best. The hackle should be of the darkest natural red, not dyed. The Soldier Hackle, from its high colors, is attractive on dark waters and deep pools, though not generally as killing as the Red Hackle; hooks, from No. 2 to 6 for stretchers,t and from 6 to 9 for drop-flies.+ It is better dressed as a Palmer, * For an illustration of a Palmer, see figure 4 on plate of Trout-Flies. t For explanation of “stretcher” and ‘“drop-fly” or “dropper,” see article “‘ The Whip,” a few pages further on. TROUT FLY-FISHING. 315 tne body of red or crimson mohair, wrapped with gold or silver thread; hackle dyed crimson. It is seldom used as a drop-fly. The Brown Hackle is scarcely inferior to the Red. I have used it with great satisfaction on the subsiding of a freshet, when the water had become rather bright for the Red Hackle, on the same sized hooks, and especially as a stretcher, from 9 A.M.to4 P.M. The hackle of most appropriate color for this fly is not easily obtained. I have sometimes found it on the necks of capons, which are brought to our market picked, with the exception of the neck and head. What is termed a furnace-hackle is frequently used m tying this fly, for a cock with brown hackles on his tail-coverts is seldom found. I invariably dress the body of the Brown Hackle with the darkest eopper-colored peacock’s hurl, the tail tipped with gold tinsel. The Ginger Hackle—The hackle used for this fly is a yellowish or a very pale red; it is frequently taken from the neck of a cock whose tail-coverts are of a tint deep enough for the Red Hackle. The Ginger Hackle is better used as a drop-fly than as a stretcher; the body should be of dubbing of the same color as the hackle, and wrapped with silver thread if it is used for a stretcher. When it is used fora dropper, the body may be of orange or lemon colored floss silk; the latter tint is preferable towards sundown. The hook used should not be larger than No. 7; No. 9 or 10 is not too smal] on still, smooth water. Where the hackle is very pale, this fly will kill as long as you can see it on the water. It is sometimes dressed Palmer fashion, though I do not like it so well as when it is tied simply as a Hackle. I generally tie itas I do most Hackles—on a Kirby hook, on account of its superior hooking qualities. Black Hackles are better for drop-flies. As they are used 316 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOK. chiefly on fine water, or on bright days, or at midday, they should be dressed on small hooks, say from 8 to 10 or even 12 (Kirby). I prefer the bodies of copper-colored peacock hurl, though black mohair is generally used. The bodies of this fly are also made of orange 4nd red floss silk; ‘they are sometimes dressed as Palmers, and ribbed with silver or gold thread or tinsel, or with coarse red or orange silk. A Grizzly Hackle is a good drop-fly on a bright day towards noon; it is best on a body of black floss or mohair. The hackle for this fly is a mixture of black and white—the darker the better. It is obtained mostly from the neck of the cock, It is good on bright water, and more appropriate for a dropper. A pale yellow mottled, or barred Hackle, with light yellow silk body, is a good evening fly. I sometimes tie it on a No. 10 or 12 Kirby hook. It comes into play with great effect, with the Yellow Sally at sundown, and as late in the evening as Trout will rise. A White Hackle, with white or very pale yellow body, it is thought by many, will kill later in the evening than any other fly, though I think it not superior to the pale yellow mottled hackle just described. The Dotterel is one of the flies described by Hofland—“body of yellow silk, legs and wings from the feather of a dotterel.” This feather is not known to American anglers; my imitations are made from the light barred feather of the partridge or snipe, and the body of light yellow floss: silk. It is easily made, and on small Kirby hooks it is killing on well-shaded waters, especially towards sunset. The Grouse Hackle has a body of orange floss, or peacock hurl ; I prefer the latter. A suitable feather for this fly can be had from the wing-coverts and rump of our common TROUT FLY-FISHING. 317 prairie fowl; a cock partridge’s feather is still better ; a snipe’s or woodcock’s will do. This is a good fly on clear water, as well as on a full stream; if for the latter, it is better to have the body tipped with gold tinsel. It is better used as a drop- fly ; the hook should never be larger than No.6 on full water, and 8 or 10 when it is fine. _ A light mottled lead-colored Hackle may be made from the feather that hangs on either side of the rump of an English snipe; it is slightly barred. The body may be made of lead-colored floss, or a pale but distinct yellow; it is a good drop-fly on hooks from No. 6 to 9. It is almost identical with the Dotterel. The last seven of the aforementioned Hackles are better without having the bodies tipped with tinsel, and are good ones to induct the beginner in the art of tying his own flies. Most of them should be used exclusively as droppers. The Red, Brown, Soldier, and Ginger Hackles are quite as suc- cessful as stretchers. The Red Hackle, I am in the habit of dressing on hooks from No. 8 to 5, made of stout heavy wire, so that it will sink somewhat below the surface of the water; which mode of fishing I have frequently found necessary, especially after a freshet; the Trout in the rifts appearing to take it as bait, carried. along by the current beneath the surface, rather than as a fly. WINGED Fiizs.—Of the great variety described in English books on fly-fishing, I place foremost of all, the Great Red Spinner, which Hofland says is made, “body of hog’s wool dyed red brown, ribbed with gold twist; tail, two long whisks of red hackle; wings from the feather of a star- ling’s wing; legs, bright amber, stained hackle.” This is the Red Spinner found in the tackle stores. As we have no starling with us, I generally make the wings of a brown mottled feather from the wing-covert of the mallard; body 318 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of red mohair. If there are Chub in the stream, and they are troublesome, I substitute a dubbing of bright orange, gene- rally of hog’s down, to avoid them, for red is very attractive to those pests. A Brown Spinner is made by using a brown mallard’s feather for wings, brown mohair or hog’s wool for body, and a brown hackle for legs. This is considered by many a better fly than the Red Spinner, and is used mostly as a stretcher. The same fly is sometimes made by picking out the hog’s wool dubbing under the wings, to represent legs, instead of using a hackle for that purpose. The March Brown, and Cowdung, I have never taken a fancy to, nor the Stone Fly; they are useless when one has a supply of Spinners in his book. There are several small flies with light yellow or slate bodies and lead-colored wings, described by Ronalds, which resemble each other closely; they are good for the evening, or on well-shaded waters at midday. These are the Cockwing, Golden Dun Midge, Yellow Dun, Skyblue, Whirling Blue Dun, and Little Pale Blue Dun. None of them should be on hooks larger than No. 7. The Jron Blue Dun is used with effect at almost any time of day. It is preferable as a drop-fly. The Grannom has a body of hare’s fur; wings of a partridge feather, made full; legs of a pale ginger hackle, and a short tuft of green floss silk at the tail, to represent the bag of eggs which this insect carries at the extremity of its body. In this country, the Grannom is found on the water towards the latter part of June, mostly towards sundown; this imitation of it is a killing fly as a stretcher on a No. 8 hook. The Jenny Spinner (this is a Hackle)—I have seen this diminutive fly used with great success as a dropper, on the same whip with the Grannom; body, white floss silk, wound TROUT FLY-FISHING. 319 with a light dun hackle, or a dirty white hackle will answer in the absence of the former; the head and tail of brown silk ; hooks No. 9 or 10. The Black Gnat is a small fly, and a pretty good imitation of a gnat; it is best on bright waters after ten o’clock ; hooks 8 to 10. The Yellow Sally has yellow wings, body, and legs; some- times it is tied as a hackle. It is a good fly at sundown, and as long as the angler can see where it falls on the water. The Fern-Fly is attractive, with its bright orange body and lead-colored wings. The Alder-F'ly—Next to the Red and Brown Spinners, this is the best stretcher-fly on Hofland’s list. I have used two of them on fine low water at the same time, with great effect, one for dropper and the other for stretcher. The body of this fly should be made of copper-colored peacock’s hurl, and the wings of a feather from a brown mallard, or brown hen. This fly can be varied by having a black mohair body, picked out near the head to represent the legs, as in the Brown Spinner. May Flies (the Green and the Gray Drake are the chief representatives), as killing as they may be on English waters, are seldom used successfully in this country. The Mackerel-F'ly is supplanted by the Brown Spinner. A Fancy Fly, with red or brown hog’s wool for body, picked out beneath near the head, for legs; a dark brown mallard or hen’s feather, with a few fibres from the feather of the scarlet ibis and green parrot thrown in for wings; a tail of two fibres of a red macaw or ibis feather, and the end of the body tipped with tinsel, is sometimes a good stretcher. I have used it successfully on the rifts of the Beaverkill, in Sullivan County, N. Y.; it also does well on the still waters of the Adirondacks. The hook should be No. 2 or 8. 320 AMERICAN ANG@LER’S BOOK. The Scarlet Ibis, as much as it is lauded by some, I have never had much success with, except for those splendid Canadian fish known as Sea Trout. With a red or bright yellow body ribbed with gold twist, it is very killing in angling for them. The Governor, though a beautiful fly, I have not tried successfully. It closely resembles the Fern-Fly. The fly-fisher who keeps a varied assortment should not be without a few small dark Camlet-Flies. The Irish fly-makers excel in these. I have found, however, that small dark Hackles, and the Alder-Fly, when tied on a No. 10 hook, with wings from a dark mottled brown hen, to raise Trout when anything artificial could induce them to come to the surface. At the Sault Ste. Marie, and on the lakes of Maine, and on some of the rivers about Lake Superior, small Salmon-flies are more killing than Trout-flies; hooks smaller than No. 2 (Trout) are seldom used there. After having gone into a somewhat lengthy description of the flies I have found to take well, I will refer to a few which I tie for my own fishing, and with slight variation of color and size, I find them ample for all seasons, weather, and water. I do not pretend to say that other flies may not be-as killing on the whip of other anglers, but the constant use of these for the last five or six summers, has given me (it may be) a kind of blind faith in them, which has led me to adopt ‘them to the exclusion of nearly all others. Of winged flies I use only the Brown Hen and the Coach- man; of Hackles, only a brown, a black, and a ginger. There is no variation in the bodies of my Coachmen; they are always of copper-colored peacock’s hurl, tipped with tin- sel, the legs invariably of red hackle. The wings are of four tints: first, white; second, a light lead color, generally from a tame pigeon; third, a shade of lead color rather darker—a TROUT FLY-FISHING. 321 gull’s feather is very appropriate ; fourth, a decided lead color —say from a blue heron. I tie those intended for droppers on hooks from No. 6 to 10; for stretchers, I use Nos. 2, 4, and 6, and in fishing with them, vary the/color of wings and size of hooks according to the weather (bright or cloudy), the water (full or fine), and the time of day. The white wings are best when the water is full and the sky overcast, or late in the afternoon. The Brown Hen I tie without varying the colors: body of copper-colored peacock’s hurl, tipped with gold tinsel; legs of dark brown hackle; wings from a dark brown hen’s feather, mottled or speckled with yellow at the outer ends of the fibres. This feather, which I have mentioned so often, is taken mostly from hens known as tle “golden pheasant breed,” and is not generally appreciated by professional fly- makers. On a No. 8 hook for a stretcher, this fly kills splendidly on fine still water, and on a bright day. I generally use with. it, a brown or black Hackle on a No. 10 hook, as dropper. A Ginger Hackle, with a light yellow body, is my favorite evening fly. Any of these flies are tied to order, and by the angler’s own pattern, if he wishes it, by Mr. George, at Philip Wilson’s gun and tackle store in Chestnut above Fourth street, or by ' Mr. Jackson, in Gold below Dock street, or John Worden, at Krider’s, corner of Second and Walnut streets, Philadelphia. Tae Wuip.—tThe leader, with its flies attached, is generally termed the Whip, the neatness and proper arrangement of which is of much importance. The fly at the end is called the Stretcher, Drag-Fly, or Tail-Fly. Those above are the Drop Flies. Sometimes they are termed “ Bobbers” or “ Droppers.” The stretcher, as a general rule, should be larger than the 21 322 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. drop-fly ; the greater size and weight being at the end of the leader, enables the angler to cast further, and with more pre- cision. And the consequent greater resistance in drawing it over the surface, keeps the leader taut and the dropper more at right angles with it, than if the reverse was the rule. The distance between the stretcher and drop-fly should be proportioned to the general length of the cast. In fishing where it is more convenient to cast a short line—say of eighteen or twenty feet—the flies should not be more than thirty inches apart. This distance between the flies is more suitable to the beginner; but as practice enables him to throw a longer line, the dropper may be moved further up the leader, until four, or even four and a half, feet may intervene. The stretcher should be tied to the end of the leader by the common water-knot, which is illustrated on page 409, and the dropper fastened, as shown:by figure 8, on the same diagram. The pieces of gut on which droppers are dressed, should be stiff, and not more than five or six inches in length. If the angler fishes with two drop-flies (though more than one is seldom used), the upper should be twelve inches or so above the first dropper. The leader should not be more than three-fourths of the length of the rod, 7. ¢, nine feet for a twelve-foot rod. With the beginner it should not exceed six feet, for a short line, if light at the end, is not as easily cast by the novice as a heavy one. A good large-sized hook also will make casting easier, in his first attempt. He should not commence with more than one dropper. Frank Forester recommends a leader of fifteen feet. This length would make it impossible for the angler to reel up his fish within reach of his landing-net, as the knot which fastens the line to the leader, and those by which the different gut- lengths are joined, would catch in the wire loop at the end of the tip, or in the rings, and, as a consequence, the fish could not be brought near enough to put the landing-net under it. CHAPTER XII. FLY-FISHING FOR TROUT. “J Never wander where the bordering reeds O’erlook the muddy stream, whose tangling weeds Perplex the fisher; I, nor choose to bear The thievish nightly net, nor barbed spear ; Nor drain I ponds, the golden Carp to take, Nor trowle for Pikes, dispeoplers of the lake. Around the steel no tortured worm shall twine, No blood of living insect stains my line; Let me, less cruel, cast the feathered hook, With pliant rod, athwart the pebbled brook, Silent along the mazy margin stray, And with the fur-wrought fly delude the prey.” Gay. “LNOUL V 10 GvaH CHAPTER XII. TROUT FLY-FISHING.—THE STREAM. Casting the Fly—Theory of strict imitation —Striking and killing a Fish.—Likely places, how to fish them. CasTINe THE FLY.—So much has been written on this subject, that the learner who consults the authorities, not only finds that “doctors disagree,” but that he is bewildered with what may appear to him unnecessary detail; and he is thus impressed with an idea that Fly-Fishing is a science to be attained only with much study and practice. It would therefore be much better to learn the rudiments from some skilful friend on the stream, and afterwards read such autho- Tities as Chitty, “ Wphemera,” and Ronalds. As it is likely, however, that some of my readers who may wish to try their hands, may not be able to avail themselves of the practical instruction of friends of experience, or may not have access to English authors on fly-fishing, I will, with some misgivings as to my ability to profit them, describe the usual manner of casting the fly, as practised by our best anglers. Advising the beginner not to be ambitious at first of accomplishing what he may deem a difficult feat, that is, to cast a long line, but rather by patience and diligence to acquire the knack of delivering one of moderate length straight out and lightly; by perseverance he will in due time find “how use doth breed a habit in a man.” On a favorable day the learner, with faith and industry, (327) 328 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. and no preconceived notions of the difficulty of fly-fishing, may find at his nooning that he has made a catch which does not compare unfavorably with that of his more skilful brother. If the contrary be the case, let him not lose heart, as there may have been many circumstances against him; as inexperience of the waters, the arrangement of his whip, landing his fish, &c., which he has yet to learn, and that it is not his casting which is altogether at fault. Some writers have objected to the accepted term “ whip- ping,” contending that casting the fly is different from whip- ping with a long staff and lash. I acknowledge that in the main it is. Still the first motions of the arm and rod are not unlike the motions of the arm and whip-staff of a stage-driver. The latter intends that the end of his lash shall reach a certain part of the horse’s body, while the angler intends that his flies shall fall on a certain part of the stream; but here the similitude ends. The driver, by a sudden backward motion of the arm, causes the lash to strike the horse with force, and rebound; while the angler avoids the quick backward motion, and allows his flies to fall lightly; and then, not hastily, but by a gentle movement of his rod, draws his flies towards him or across the water. ‘But to commence.—Let the beginner draw out as much line as he can conveniently cast. If he uses a twelve foot rod, eighteen feet (that is, from the tip to the stretcher-fly) is enough. Then with a backward motion of his rod, let his line go well out behind him, and before it has time to fall to the ground, by a forward motion of the forearm and wrist, cast his flies to the desired place on the water. The backward motion of the line is chiefly imparted by the spring of the rod, as the flies are lifted from the water, and if it does not go to its full length behind, it will come down clumsily on the water before the angler, when he casts TROUT FLY-FISHING. 329 it forward, and short of the place aimed at. The same bad effect is produced by using too much force. The beginner should bear in mind that it is not strength, but an easy sleight, and the spring of the rod, that effects the long and light cast. The arm should be extended slightly, and the motion imparted to the rod by the forearm working as on a pivot at the elbow, and the hand turning as on another pivot at the wrist. The motion of the hand and wrist only is required in a short, straight cast. The angler should not cast at random over the water, but each portion of it should be carefully fished, the nearest first. He should always aim at some particular place; he will soon learn to measure the distance with his eye, and exert the exact amount of force to propel his flies to the desired spot. In drawing them over the water, the primary object is to have the drop-fly to skim or dap along on the surface; the stretcher which follows in its wake may be allowed to take care of itself, for, as a general thing, it matters little whether it is on or beneath the surface. When the flies first fall on the water, they should ‘be al- lowed to rest a moment, and the slight motion imparted by tightening the line, or in recovering the full grasp of the rod on the instant, should be avoided. If in the current, they should be left for some moments to its will, then guided gently and sometimes with a tremulous motion across or diagonally up against it. After the learner (and he will always be learning) has acquired the first principles of the art, necessity, ingenuity, and observation will teach him how to cast in difficult places. Our streams and lakes are generally fished, the first by wading, the latter from a boat, and seldom from a high bank. It is therefore less necessary to cast a long line than many suppose, or English writers describe it to be. But our 330 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. rugged forest streams, overhung by bushes and branches of trees, and other obstructions occurring, make it requisite that the angler should acquire tact and skill, to meet these difficulties. In casting under branches which hang within a few feet of the water, the motion of the rod and course pursued by the line is necessarily horizontal. For instance, in wading down a stream, if you intend whipping under the branches on the right, a back-handed cast is necessary; the backward pre- paratory motion of the rod being across the stream to your left, and the cast horizontally from the left to your right. When the branches you wish to cast under are on your left, the course of the line is vice versa, that is, from the right to the left. The largest Trout love the shade of trees and bushes which overhang the bank, and it is only by the means just described that you can present your flies. It is customary to fish down stream, and there is much difference of opinion as to whether the general rule should be to cast directly down or across the water. In this the angler must be governed much by cir- cumstances, and his own judgment. I prefer the diagonal cast, as presenting the flies in a more natural way, although the drop-fly may appear to play better, and set more at right angles with the leader, when drawing up against the stream. When the wind is blowing up the stream, it becomes in a good degree necessary to fish across, if possible casting below the desired spot, and allowing the wind to carry the flies to the right place as they fall on the water. If, however, it blows strongly in the direction of the cast, care should be taken when putting on a fresh fly to moisten the gut to which it is attached, if it be a stretcher. Many flies are cracked off by neglecting this precaution. The advice of English writers to fish up stream, or with the TROUT FLY-FISHING. 331 wind at one’s back, in most cases cannot be followed; for our rough rapid streams in the first instance, and the thickly- wooded banks in the other, which make it necessary to wade, ignore both rules. The force of the current in many a good rift would bring the flies back, and, as I have seen with beginners, entangle them in the legs of his pantaloons. It is only in a still pool, or where the current is gentle, that one is able to fish up stream with any degree of precision. A word or two here about the flies coming down “Light as falls the flaky snow,” and that the flies only should touch the surface, or that they should touch it before the leader. The first idea isa very poetical one, and may be carried out in a good degree, if the line is light, the leader fine, and the cast not too long. The second is impracticable with a long line, unless from a bank somewhat elevated above the water. But in a day’s fishing on our streams, the miraculous casting or falling of the flies, which some writers speak of, and their skill in this respect, are things we “read about.” My experience is, that the falling of the leader—which is almost transparent when properly dyed—does not frighten the fish, but it is the incautious approach or conspicuous position of the angler. In casting over a piece of water, the flies always precede the leader and line, and, as a matter of course, fall where the fish lie before the line does, as the fisher advances or extends his cast. As the line will swag more or less in a long cast, it must necessarily touch the water. I would not give the impression from the foregoing that it is not necessary that the flies should fall lightly, for in fishing fine it is important that they should. To accomplish this, as I have already said, no sudden check should be given to the 332 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. flies, but they should be eased off (if I may so express it) as they fall, by the slightest downward bending of the wrist. There is a great deal of poetry also, as well as fiction, in the stories told about casting a very long line. Experience will teach you to cast no longer line than is necessary, what- ever proficiency you may acquire. Still it should be borne in mind, that the higher your position above the water, the more visible you are to the fish, hence the greater the necessity for fishing far off when occupying such a stand. But with such elevation, it is easier to cast a long line. When a person is wading the stream, he is less visible to the fish than if he was on the bank, as the medium through which the line of sight passes is more dense than the atmo- sphere above, and the rougher the water the more the line of sight between the angler and the fish is disturbed. Nicer casting is, of course, required on a still pool than on a rift; a careful angler, when he wades such water, will always go in softly, without floundering or splashing, fishing it by inches, scarcely making a ripple, and creating so slight a disturbance, that he will find the fish rising within a few yards of him; then he should cast with not too long a line, and lightly. If he sees a large Trout rising lower down the pool, he does not fish carelessly, or hurry on to get to him, but tries to take those that may lie in the intervening water, and approaches him slowly and imperceptibly, knowing that he will be found there when his time comes. I may add here that in such water a landing-net is indispensable, as it would disturb the pool to wade ashore with every good fish, and that here also you have a better opportunity of using your net and securing your fish, than in a rift. In casting a long line, or even a short one, particularly on a windy day, it is better to wet it occasionally by holding the leader and flies in your hand, and let it swag in the water; TROUT FLY-FISHING. 333 the weight of the line thus increased, helps the cast. If it could be accomplished, the great desideratum would be, to keep the line wet and the flies dry. I have seen anglers succeed ‘so well in their efforts to do this by the means just mentioned, and by whipping the moisture from their flies, that the stretcher and dropper would fall so lightly, and remain so long on the surface, that a fish would rise and deliberately take the fly before it sank. One instance of this kind is fresh in my memory: it occurred at a pool beneath the fall of a dam on the Williwe- mock, at a low stage of water—none running over. The fish were shy and refused every fly I offered them, when my friend put on a Grannom for a stretcher, and a minute Jenny Spinner for a dropper. His leader was of the finest gut and his flies fresh, and by cracking the moisture from them between each throw, he would lay them so lightly on the glassy surface, that a brace of Trout would take them at almost every cast, and before they sank or were drawn away. He had tied these flies and made his whip especially for his evening cast on this pool, and as the fish would not notice mine, I was obliged to content myself with landing his fish, which in a half hour counted several dozen. Here was an exemplification of the advantage of keeping one’s flies dry, and the fallacy of the theory of not allowing the line to fall on the water, for in this instance I noticed that a fourth or a third of it touched the surface at every cast. It seems to me that there is no more appropriate place than this to say a few words about the “routine” and “strict imi- tation system,” which some English writers: advocate so strenuously. The former, that is, certain flies for certain months, or for each month, is now considered an exploded theory by practical anglers who wish to divest fly-fishing of all pedantic humbug; for the fly that is good in April is 334 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. killing in August, and the Red and Brown Hackle, the Coachman, Alder-Fly, and Brown Hen, will kill all summer. For the theory of “ strict imitation,” there is some show of reason, but I cannot concede that Trout will rise more readily at the artificial fly which most closely resembles the natural one, for the fish’s attention is first attracted because of some: thing lifelike falling on the water, or passing over the surface, and he rises at it because he supposes it to be something he is in the habit of feeding upon, or because it resembles an insect or looks like a fly, not that it is any partecular insect or fly; for we sometimes see the most glaring cheat, which resembles nothing above the waters or beneath the waters, a piece of red flannel, for instance, or the fin of one of their own species, taken greedily. The last time I had positive proof of this was some years ago, when I happened to spend a quiet Sabbath in the “Beech Woods” of Pennsylvania, with a cheery Irishman who had made a clearing on the Big Equinunk. Towards noon I missed my creel, and on inquiring what had become of it, was told that the boys had gone a-fishing and taken it with them. In the afternoon they returned with the creel full of Trout, which far exceeded my catch of the day pre- vious. J asked them if they had taken them with worms— no; with the fly—-no, they had none; and then I remembered the “dodge” I had practised myself in my early Trout-fishing days. They said they had “skittered” with the belly fin of the Trout. A worm to catch the first fish was the only bait they wanted, all the rest of the Trout were taken by drawing this rude counterfeit over the surface of the water. They did not know—happy little fellows—that their practice was in oppo- sition to the theory of learned professors,—Hofland, Blaine, Shipley, Ronalds, and others. TROUT FLY-FISHING. 335 STRIKING AND KILLING a Fis. Striking.—-Various direc- tions have been given about striking a fish when it rises at the fly. Some maintain that it is unnecessary, or even wrong, to strike at all, if the line is kept taut. Others say that you should strike as soon as you see the fish or the swirl he makes as he turns to go back. Hither is wrong, if adopted as a rule without exceptions. : In most cases when Trout rise freely, and are in earnest, they will hook themselves, for the yielding of a pliant rod, as a fish takes the fly, allows him to bear off his prize; but when he attempts to cast it from his mouth, the spring of the rod fixes the hook in his mouth, as he relaxes his hold. So it frequently happens that the rise is seen and the strain on the rod is felt at the same moment. A fish may even miss the fly, and make another effort to seize it, if not drawn away too hastily. When a fish, therefore, takes the fly vigorously, it is only necessary to keep the line taut. A mere turn of the wrist may be given to fix the hook more firmly in his mouth. On the contrary, when the water is subsiding after a freshet, and the fish have been feeding on worms and insects which have been washed in, they will frequently tug at your stretcher, taking it for such food. Then it is necessary to strike sharply. I have sometimes fished all day in this way, allowing the stretcher (generally a red hackle) to sink a little, and trolling as with a bait, and striking when I felt a bite. Again, on warm days, when Trout lie beneath the shade of trees which stretch their branches over deep still pools, they will rise almost without ruffling the surface, or softly arrest the stretcher beneath, as if to ascertain if it is really some- thing to eat; then a slight but quick stroke is necessary to secure the fish before he casts it from his mouth. Killing a Fish—Many Trout are lost by the beginver, 336 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. from excitement or a lack of judgment in managing them. It is always the safer plan to handle a fish as if he was slightly hooked, and in fishing a rift, to get him out of the rough water and towards the margin where it is comparatively still, as soon as possible. For in his efforts to escape, you have the force of the current, as well as his strength and agility, to contend with. If the water is still, and the fish indisposed to show fight, tow him gently to one side and then to the other, as you reel in the line. If there is a sloping shore without obstructions, and you think he is securely hooked, you may sometimes get a little headway on him, and, by a steady pull, lead him ashore before he overcomes his astonishment at being hooked, or has realized his danger. If in landing a fish in this way, though, you allow him to come in contact with a stone or other impediment, it will arouse all his fears, and in his desperation he may tear loose. When a fish of unusual size is hooked, and you can do so without disturbing the lower end of the rift or pool, it is safer to lead him down stream, for this increases the difficulty of his breathing, while you are assisted by the current, and the strain on your tackle is diminished. English writers direct us, after hooking a fish, to keep the rod in a perpendicular position, or the point well back over the shoulder; this is very well if he is securely hooked and swims deep. If he struggles and flounders on the surface, though, the point should be immediately lowered, and the rod held nearly horizontally across the stream, giving him the whole spring of it, thus keeping him under. It is better not to raise his head above the water until he is somewhat ex- hausted, or until you are ready to slip the landing-net under him. If your reel has a moderately stiff click, and the fish is large TROUT FLY-FISHING. 337 enough to run the line off, he should be allowed to do so, bearing on him with the line unchecked by the slightest pressure of the fingers. As he slacks in his resistance, reel in the line, giving when you must and shortening when you can, “butting him,” as some persons call it, or bearing hard, only when he approaches some dangerous place, and leading him away from it. After you have ventured to raise his head above water, give to any strong effort he may make to get beneath, or to his humor to take another run, but bearing on him all the while with a taut line. When you can ven- ture to bring him near, reel in until the end of the leader, where it joins the line, has reached the end of the tip; he is then, if the leader is three-fourths the length of the rod, and the rod pliant, close enough to slip your net under him. This should be done not with a swoop, but gently; seize him with the left hand, sticking your thumb under his gill, and taking the hook out of his mouth put him tail-foremost into the hole of your creel. There is much less strain on one’s tackle in playing a fish than is generally supposed. In killing a Salmon, if he is properly handled, it does not exceed a pound, and with a Trout, it is not over an ounce or two. I have known anglers handle fish so well as to make a vommon practice of slipping the hand gently down the leader, and seizing them behind the gills, sometimes wearing a thread glove to insure a firmer grasp. Few, however, have sufficient skill and coolness for such dangerous practice. A landing- net is almost indispensable when there is no convenient place for leading your prize to the bank, or when wading ashore would disturb the quiet of a pool. LixeLy PLACES, AND HOW TO FISH THEM.—The success of the fly-fisher depends almost as much on what might be called 22 338 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. an intuitive knowledge of likely places, as his skill in casting, or in killing a fish. The beginner generally prefers a lively rift, where there is an open cast, for the current takes a good hold on his stretcher, and bears it down stream, while it keeps his leader taut, and his dropper dapping prettily on the surface. But he should remember that in most cases, at such a cast, he is likely to be exposed to the view of the fish, which always lie with their heads up stream. He should therefore approach cautiously, fishing the slack water on each side at the head of the rift, with as long a line as he can well manage. Coming nearer step by step and casting as he advances, he will fish the near, and then the opposite side lower down, drawing his flies lightly across the rough water, and submitting them in some degree to its will. Still approaching he will cast ob- liquely across, then straight down and over the water where the current abates. Asa general rule the larger fish take precedence, and lie nearer the head of a rift and rise first. If found at the lower end, it will be where the water is deeper and where there are rocks or an overhanging bank. Trout are not often found in a rift or pool with a smooth even floor of rock, or small pebbles, as it affords them no harbor or hiding-places. Where a large rock projects above the surface in water of sufficient depth, the angler should cast near its edges on both sides, then above where it repels the force of the stream; or he may have a rise in the eddy just below, where the divided current unites again. A deep bend in the stream where a caving bank over- hangs, affords a likely cast, especially where stumps, logs, or drift-wood lie about. If the stream has a long still reach, one generally fishes from the shallower side, finding his cast opposite where it is TROUT FLY-FISHING. 839 deeper, casting close to, or under the pendent boughs, or in the shade of the bushes or trees—drawing his flies diagonally or directly across. It is not a bad plan when fish have risen and refused one’s flies, in such a pool, to sit patiently down and change them for smaller ones of different colors, and after a little while “try back,” that is, fish from the lower to the upper end. Different flies cast from another direction will sometimes induce fish to “reconsider the motion,” and adopt your amendment if properly presented. When the season is well advanced—say July or August, Trout will assemble in pairs or little communities in some suitable place for spawning, and remain there if there is no excessive rise in the stream, until it is time to spawn. This is frequently beneath the overhanging alders; there chuck your flies under, if you cannot present them more civilly, and if you take a good fish, try again, for the rest are likely to be as hungry. If the sun be bright, use the Alder-fly on such occasions, for either dropper or stretcher, or both. The same kind of a shallow side-rift is a likely place early in June when the Suckers congregate there to spawn, and the Trout are on the lookout a few yards below, to catch their roe as it is carried down stream by the current. Immediately below a mill-dam, if there be any depth of water, is invariably a good place; but you should never stand conspicuously above on what is called “the breast” of the dam, or on a high rock; such a position is to be con- demned even in a bait-fisher; but get below, and if there is no way of fishing from the sides, go to the tail of the pool, and cast upwards. This, if there be but little water coming over the dam, is the best place to fish from. Trout will not take the fly immediately under the fall or in the foam, bnt a little below. In a deep still pool much exposed to the sun, if there is a 840 AMERICAN ANGLEB'S BOOK. tree or two on the bank with drooping boughs, Trout are apt to collect there, for they love the shade. Here, if the weather is warm, they are not apt to rise with a splash, as I have just remarked, but will suck in your fly with a mere dimp- ling of the water, or you may have a vague sense of its being arrested beneath the surface. Then strike sharply, but do not be violent, and you have him; try again, there are more there, and good ones. Never pass a piece of still water of reasonable depth where a fresh spring brook, however diminutive, comes in, particu- larly in warm weather. I have in my memory such a pool bordered on one side with hair-grass and duck-weed, which I had frequently passed heedlessly by, supposing it to be back- water from the main stream, or left in the old bed of the creek, from the overflow of the spring freshets. But one day, seeing a quiet dimpling of the surface, I waded lazily in, and threw my flies carelessly on the water, when a thirteen-incher laid hold, and was away in the duck-weed before I recovered from my astonishment. After many turns, however, and much contention,-the pliant little rod exhausted him. Thus encouraged, I fished the shaded pool its whole length as noise- lessly as an otter, and the result was a dozen very handsome Trout. I never passed that pool again without giving it the attention it merited. Sometimes on the subsiding of a freshet, Trout will sur- mount a long rapid, and rest in a pool, or the smooth flow of water above, where it is not a half yard in depth. Fish such water with as long a east as possible, and so as not to throw your shadow over the swim. A brisk clattering little brook, as it rushes along over rocks and logs, through the woods, washes out many a pretty hole in its sharp turns, and amongst the big stones, where the laurel and alders render casting impossible. The only way TROUT FLY-FISHING. 341 here is, let the current carry your flies down stream, until the dropper bobs enticingly on the water. Play them on each side of the little rift, drawing them towards you and allowing them to drift off again. If there are fish in the hole they will be jumping at the dropper, or tugging at the stretcher. Three to one they will hook themselves; if they don't, strike gently at each tug or jump, as if you were fishing with a bait, but not drawing your fhies entirely from the water. I have taken good fish in the small tributaries of a larger stream in this way, the monarch of the rift always first, and his succes- sors in order, according to size. The head of a mill-dam, where a rapid meets the back-water, is invariably a good place. I have already said or intimated, that on a bright day Trout will always rise better in the shade. Therefore when a pool is of equal depth across, one side of it may be better in the morning, and the other side in the afternoon. There are many good pools also which are not shaded on either side, or where persons pass frequently, or show themselves to the fish; here they scarcely rise until after sundown. Swch places are often fished without success by an angler, and ina very short time one who follows him may have good sport. The largest fish are nearly always taken after the sun is down, or at least off the water. * But of all places commend me in the still of the even- ing, to the long placid pool, shallow on one side, with deeper water and an abrupt overhanging bank opposite. Where the sun has shone all day, and legions of ephemera sported in its declining rays; the bloom of the rye or clover scenting the air from the adjoining field! Now light a fresh pipe, and put on a pale Ginger Hackle for your tail-fly, and a little white-winged Coachman for your dropper. Then wade in cautiously—move like a shadow—don’'t make a ripple. 342 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Cast, slowly, long, light; let your stretcher sink a little. There he has taken the Ginger—lead him around gently to the shallow side as you reel him in, but don’t move from your position—let him tug awhile, put your net under him, break his neck, and slip him into your creel. Draw your line through the rings—cast again; another, and another. Keep on until you can see only the ripple made by your fly; or know when it falls, by the slight tremor it imparts through the whole line down to your hand—until the whip-poor-will begins his evening song, and the little water-frog tweets in the grass close by.—Not till then is it time to go home. If you have dined on the stream, it may be that the Trout you roasted were too highly seasoned and you are thirsty; if so, stop at the old spring by the roadside. CHAPTER XIII. SALMON-FISHING. “T Love to see a man forget His blood is growing cold, And leap, or swim, or gather flowers, Oblivious of his gold, And mix with children in their sport, Nor think that he is old. “‘T love to see a man of care Take pleasure in a toy; I love to see him row or ride, And tread the grass with joy, Or throw the circling Salmon-fly As lusty as a boy. “The road of life is hard enough, Bestrewn with slag and thorn; I would not mock the simplest joy That made it less forlorn, But fill its evening path with flowers, As fresh as those of morn.” CHAPTER XIII. SALMON-FISHING. TACKLE USED IN SaLMON-FIsHING. Rods.—Reels.—Reel-lines,—Casting- lines.—Salmon-flies.—Materials required for Salmon-flies for American rivers.—Salmon-Flies for the rivers of New Brunswick and Canada.— Theory and practice of Salmon-fishing.—Salmon-fishing compared with Trout-fishing.—Casting the fly.—The straight-forward cast, casting over the left shoulder, casting in difficult places, explained by diagrams.— Casting in an unfavorable wind.—Striking.—Playing a Salmon.—What a Salmon will do or may do.—Gafing. Campinc on THE River. Camp equipage.—Protection against mos- quitoes, black-flies, and midges.—Clothing, &c.—Cooking utensils.— Stores. Cooking Salmon on the river.—To boil a Salmon.—To broil a Salmon.—Cold Salmon.—Soused Salmon.—To bake or steam a Grilse under the coals and ashes.—Kippered Salmon.—Smoked Salmon.—Law and Custom on the river. TACKLE FOR SALMON-FISHING. Rops.—A Salmon-rod should be of the toughest and most springy wood that can be procured. It should taper so truly, that its elasticity, or rather its tendency to bend, will be dis- tributed over its whole length, though in a diminishing ratio —from the point of the tip to the place where it is grasped above the reel. In a rod of true proportions, the greater the power applied or the weight it has to bear, the nearer will the apex of the curve caused by lifting the weight approach . (345) 346 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. the butt, and, as a consequence, the more the upper part will be relieved of the strain. To demonstrate this theorem, let any person who is curious on the subject, place a two or four ounce weight in his tobacco- pouch, and suspend it to the end of his line, after passing the line through the rings of a well-proportioned Salmon-rod, and he will find that the tip will bend, while the lower part of the rod will remain comparatively straight. Let him increase the weight to eight ounces, and the curve will be transferred to the next joint below,'the tip assuming more the direction of a straight line. Then, by increasing the weight succes- sively to twelve and sixteen ounces, he will find that there is little or no curve in the tip, the additional weight having drawn it nearly or quite straight, and transferred the trans- verse strain proportionately towards the lower part of the rod, where it is strong. A rod of sixteen feet, which I deem sufficiently long, need not weigh over two pounds two ounces; and one of seventeen feet should not exceed two pounds six ounces. Of the two, I prefer the smaller, on account of the ease in casting with it, for it is no boy’s play to wield a heavy Salmon-rod for hours, The smaller has power enough to kill any Salmon. The dimensions of such a rod, if in four pieces of equal length— measuring the diameter of the inside or “male” ferules as they come in order from the butt outward—should be eleven, eight, and five-sixteenths of an inch, and the diameter of the butt half way between the ferule and lower end, seven-eighths of an inch; the thickest part, where the reel-band is placed, sy nine inches above the end, should be an inch and five- sixteenths. A seventeen-foot rod—supposing the butt and second joint each to be four feet six inches long, and the third joint and tip four feet—should have the two upper ferules the same SALMON-FISHING. 347 size as the smaller rod, and the lower ferule the sixteenth of an inch larger. The butt should be of the best coarse-grained white ash; the second joint of hickory or ironwood; the third of lance or irénwood; and the tip of the best Malacca cane, rent and glued. The strain on a tip caused by the oft- repeated lifting of a long line from the water, makes it neces- sary that it should be of material of the closest and hardest fibre; for the weight of the line is not sufficient to throw the strain on the lower portion of the rod, as in killing a fish; but the constant lifting of the line from the water preparatory to casting it, gives the top a downward swag in a week or two, which makes it necessary that the angler should provide himself with one or two extra tips. The advice of English authors, to have the rod-rings very large, that the line may pass through freely, shows a want of proper consideration; for if there should be a knot or kink in the line, it would be certain to catch in passing through the wire loop at the end of the tip. The large size of the rings, therefore, would not provide for the contingency, while they are awkward and rattle in the wind, augmenting the resistance to the air in casting, and increasing the leverage on the rod when killing a Salmon. In making a couple of Salmon-rods for my own use, I went in direct opposition to this antiquated notion, and put on metallic guides like those on American bass rods, but lighter, and find them far preferable to rings. In fastening on the reel I use but one reel-band, which is stationary; under this I slip one end of the brass plate to which the reel is fastened, and secure the other end with a string, so as to avoid the contingency of the sliding- band becoming tight by the expansion of the butt of the rod from moisture, as already explained in my remarks on Trout- rods. 348 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Rezis.—A Salmon-reel should be large enough to contain a hundred yards of line without filling the spool so full that it will clog. A simple reel is to be preferred to a multiplier, for several reasons; an important one is that it is less apt to get out of order from the rough usage to which it is some- times subjected. One with the outer plates about three and three-quarters inches in diameter, and an inch and a half between the plates, is large enough. The click or bearing, which is arranged between one of the inner plates dnd the small outer plate next to it, should offer resistance enough to require about six ounces to draw the line from the reel. Of course there is an additional friction when the line passes through the rings of the rod and out through the tip; and this is all the bearing that is required or safe to offer in con- trolling a Salmon, even when you are butting him to press him from a dangerous place, or towards the gaff as he becomes exhausted. The best Salmon-reels have a smooth conical crank fastened in an outer plate, which revolves against the SALMON-FISHING. 349 one next to the spool, the object being to prevent the line becoming entangled in the handle, which is apt to occur in one of the ordinary kind. The best*reels of this kind I have ever met with, are those made by Farlow, of London. The figure on the opposite page gives a perspective view of one. Reet-Lines.—Those made of plaited silk, and prepared in linseed-oil, notwithstanding the original cost, are to be pre- ferred to all others. Those of silk and hair are liable to rot when exposed to the dew, if they are left out at night, or when they are wound up wet and allowed to.remain so. With care, an oiled silk line will last three or four years. After fishing, as much of it as has been wet should be drawn off the reel, and coiled or wound in such a manner as to dry. When one end of an oiled line becomes soft from casting. and passing through the rings of the rod after a summer’s fishing, it may be taken off the reel, and the end which has been used wound next to the axle, the stiff fresh end being outwards, next to the casting line. An unoiled plaited-silk line can be bought for half the price of an oiled one, and the angler can prepare it himself by the recipe, found in the note below, which I copy from Chitty.* I found, however, that the last * “To a quarter of a pint of ‘ doubled-boiled cold-drawn’ linseed-oil, add about one ounce of gold-size. Gently warm and mix them well, being first careful to have the line quite dry. While the mixture is warm, soak it therein until it is fully saturated to its very centre; say for twenty-four hours. Then pass it through a piece of flannel, pressing it sufficiently to take off the superficial coat, which enables that which is in the interior to dry well, and, in time, to get stiff. The line must then be hung up in the air, wind, or sun, out of the reach of moisture, for about a fortnight, till pretty well dry. It must then be redipped to give an outer coat, for which less soaking is necessary: after this, wipe it again, but lightly ; wind it on a chair-back or towel-horse, before a hot fire, and there let it remain for two or three hours, which will cause the mixture on it to ‘flow’ (as 350 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. drying requires three or four times as long as the time he mentions. The gold-size mentioned in the note can be had of those who sell painters’ materials; I have bought it of Mr. C. Shrack, in Fourth street above Cherry, Philadelphia. Castine-Lines should be of treble twisted gut, for the three gut-lengths next to the reel-line; the next two or three lengths should be of double twisted gut, and the remainder of stout single gut, each length finer than the preceding one as it nears the end. Single gut is strong enough to hold any Salmon if properly handled, but the treble and double lengths and then the single length, graduate the line to a proper taper, thus increasing the ease and lightness in throwing the fly.. When the water is discolored after a rise in the river, a casting-line of ten feet is long enough. As the water becomes clearer, the length should be gradually increased by adding lengths of single gut at the lower end, until it is nearly or quite as long as the rod. By doing so, one can cast a lighter line, and, of course, the probability of raising a Salmon will be greater than it would be by allowing the heavy reel line to fall or swing near the fish. SaLMon-F L1gs.—There is an endless variety in the combi- nations and colors of the feathers, dubbing, and tinsel, that zo to make up the Salmon-flies described in books and sold in tackle stores. Of the latter, many are made by persons who never saw a live Salmon, and are tied more to please the eye of the purchaser, than with any idea that they will entice japanners term it), and give an even gloss over the whole. It must then be left to dry as before; the length of time, as it depends on the weather and place, observation must determine upon. By this means it becomes impervious to wet and sufficiently stiff, never to clog or entangle—the oil producing the former quality, and the gold-size (which is insoluble in water) the latter; while the commixture prevents the size becoming too hard and stiff.” SALMON-FISHING. 851 the fish. Notwithstanding the minute directions given for tying any particular fly, it must not be inferred that an imita- tion that lacks some of the tints, will not take fish. The main thing is to have the prevailing colors as near those of the fly described as possible; if there is a slight difference in regard to the feathers that compose the wings or tail, when the exact feather cannot be had, it may still be a killing fly on the same kind of water, and on the same kind of a day, that the original is. Fresh-run Salmon are not over nice, and if the colors are at all suitable to the water, they will lay hold; as to.a certain fly being the fly for any water, to the exclu- sion of all others, it is sheer humbug. The first Salmon I ever killed was on a fly I tied before leaving home, from some idea I had of the water I was to fish, and from a general knowledge of the proper colors for Trout-flies. It was not intended as an imitation of any I had seen or read a descrip- tion of; and I continued to tie my own flies, and killed Salmon with them all summer, being guided in selecting the colors by the state of the water and the day, omitting the unimportant detail of a tag or feelers; and frequently not putting on a head when indolent, or pushed for time. Very few of the flies imported from England and Ireland are suitable for the rivers of New Brunswick, being generally too large and showy for those clear waters. The gaudy Irish flies tied for the Shannon would frighten the Salmon on this side of the Atlantic, while others would not be noticed by them. The profuse variety of beautiful but useless flies imposed on some of our verdant countrymen, with full pockets, by London and Dublin tackle-makers, is astonishing. An accomplished Salmon-fisher of St. John, with whom I had the pleasure of fishing for two weeks last summer, had only two standard flies for the Mirimichi and Nipissiguit ; one the “Blue-and-brown,” the other the “ Silver-gray ;”—the 352 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. latter for high water. The Blue-and-brown, by tying with darker-tinted hackles and bodies, as the water clears, he uses almost entirely. He told me he fished the Lakes of Killarney, and the clear rivers of Ireland, with the same flies in his boy- hood, and he still adheres to them: his favorite, the Blue-and- brown, has become so famous amongst the anglers of the province, that it has taken his name, the “ Nicholson fly.” Flies for American rivers—except when the water is dis- colored by a freshet—as a general rule, should be of darker and more sober tints than those used in Scotland and Ireland. The feathers to be preferred for wings, are taken from the wing-coverts of the male mallard, the tail of the wild turkey, and the second joint of the wing, and tail of a dark-brown mottled hen, or spruce grouse; the two last are for small flies, and will raise a Salmon on fine water when nothing else will. For full water, or when it is discolored, wood-duck and gray mallard are used, mixed occasionally with a few fibres of red ibis, or a single topping of golden pheasant. "The bodies of those that have dark wings should be of red, brown, and purple dubbing, of different shades, varied occa- sionally with orange, yellow, and black, and wrapped with hackles of the same colors. Sometimes two hackles of differ- ent color, as red and blue, are used. The bodies and hackles of flies for high water should be of light colors to correspond with the wings: of these, pale yellow, pearl color, and light gray are most suitable. ; This limited assortment of feathers for wings, and hackles and dubbing for bodies, is all that one requires on the rivers of New Brunswick. Add to these, black ostrich and copper- colored peacock hurl, for the heads; a dozen or so of golden pheasant ruff-feathers for tails; gold and silver tinsel—flat and twisted; tying silk, wax, and a little varnish to put on t SALMON-FISHING. 353 the heads to protect them, and the list of fly-materials for a trip is complete. Tying Salmon-flies is an art which is easily acquired by tLuse who are at all proficient in making Trout-flies; they hardly require as delicate manipulation. I saw some very rudimentary-looking flies tied by the natives about Bathurst, that were killing at the “Rough Waters” on the Nipissiguit, last summer. The annexed plate was drawn and engraved on wood, under my direction, by Mr. Wilhelm of this city. It repre- sents four flies; the killing qualities of the first two I tested last summer. No. 1 represents the Brown Fly. It is a plain little fly, on a No. 9* hook, and intended for low water. Wings of the dark mottled feather of a brown hen, or wild turkey’s tail; body of copper-colored peacock hurl (four plumelets twirled and twisted around the wrapping-silk to make it secure), wound with gold thread, and a dark brown or purple hackle, and tipped with gold tinsel; tail a few sprigs of the same feather as the wings; head of black ostrich hurl. No. 2 represents the “Nicholson.” Hook, No. 8. Wings of brown mallard; body of blood-red seal’s fur, wrapped with gold tinsel, and a blue, and a blood-red hackle, and tipped with gold tinsel; tail of mallard, and a few sprigs of golden pheasant ruff-feathers; head, black ostrich hurl. The dubbing and hackle of this fly should be of deeper tint, as the water becomes clearer. The angler, whose name it bears, in tying it gives the tail and wings an upright set, which it retains to the last, giving it a peculiarly gay appear- ‘* The standard of sizes for hooks here mentioned, correspond with the numbers on the plate of Hooks, page 65. 23 ‘ 354 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. ance, as the reader will observe. The figure is an exact drawing of one tied by Mr. N. himself. The Silver Gray, which Mr. N. ties on hooks No. 7 and 8, is intended for high water, or when it is discolored after a freshet. It has wings of gray mallard and a few sprigs of wood-duck; body of lead or pearl-colored seal’s wool mixed with a little yellow, and wound with silver tinsel and a gray or barred hackle; tag and head of ostrich hurl. It is not represented by either of the four figures, but in form resem- bles No. 2. Nos. 8 and 4 are exact copies of Nos. 11 and 12, found in the “ Book of the Salmon.” I have introduced them here to show what is meant by “feelers,” and to explain what a “topping” is. The former are intended to represent the pair of long antenne found in a natural fly; they are folded back- ward in the artificial fly, extending above and beyond the wings. The tail and upper portion of the wings of the third figure are “toppings,” that is, feathers from the crest of the golden pheasant. In addition to the flies I have described, there are several tied by John Chamberlain that are in great repute on the Nipissiguit. Amongst them is one which I will describe as the “Chamberlain.” In tying it (commencing at the bend of the hook) the body is first tipped with gold tinsel, the tail is then tied on, and the lower part of the body, say one-fourth of the way up, is wrapped with bright yellow floss, when a blood-red hackle, and purple or maroon-colored floss are fastened in, and the dark floss wrapped on for the remainder of the body, followed by the gold tinsel and the hackle (four turns are enough). Brown mallard or wild-turkey wings are then put on, and it is finished with a head of black ostrich hurl. The first fly I tied of this kind, was according to “STITA NOWITYS SALMON-FISHING. 355 John’s directions as he sat by. I have been quite successful © with the “Chamberlain.” Dr. Adamson, in “Salmon-fishing in Canada,” gives the following list of flies used on the rivers emptying into the St. Lawrence :— “The Louise is an extremely beautiful fly, having the wings composed of fibres from the golden pheasant’s topknot, lgeast-feather, and tail, with sprigs from the green parrot, blue macaw, and kingfisher; the body is of fiery brown mohair with gold twist; the head of orange mohair ; the tail a single feather from the golden pheasant’s topknot, reddish- brown hackle, and jay legs. “The Edwin is a much more simple fly, and often equally efficacious amongst the fins, the wings being composed of the golden pheasant’s tail-feather, with a dash of yellow macaw ; the body yellow mohair, ribs of black silk, head black mohair, tail golden pheasant topknot, hackle yellow, and scarlet silk tip. “ The Forsyth— Wings of yellow macaw with a slight dash of mallard wing at each side; yellow mohair body with black tibs; head black, tail golden pheasant topknot, hackle yellow, with light blue silk tip. “The Stevens—Wings of golden pheasant breast-feather, with a slight mixture of mallard; body of reddish brick- colored silk gold twist, head black ostrich; tail golden pheasant topknot; hackle red to match the body, tip blue silk. : “The Ross—Wings of mallard and peacock’s hurl; body cinnamon-colored silk gold twist; no head; tail, green parrot, red and black hackles, and black tip. “The Parson—This is a beautiful and efficient fly. The Wings are mixed, and very similar to those of the Louise, but have a slight mixture of wood-duck in them; the body is 356 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. of very dark claret silk with gold twist; head black ostrich; tail golden pheasant topknot, hackle dark claret; legs blue, with a tip of yellow and gold. “The Strachan.—Mixed wing chiefly of golden pheasant tail, yellow macaw, and jay’s wing; body of crimson silk with gold twist; head black ostrich; tail golden pheasant; black hackle with jay’s wing; legs tip yellow and gold. “The Langevin—Wings, body, tail, hackle, legs, tip al yellow; made of the dyed feathers of the white goose; the head of black ostrich, and the twist of black silk.” CasTING THE FLY.—As bait-fishing or trolling can scarcely be called a sportsmanlike way of killing Salmon, I shall confine my observations to angling for them only with the artificial fly. In my remarks on Trout-fishing I have alluded to the im- possibility of learning how to cast the fly well from written directions alone. One may get the theory ever so well in his head—and good theory too—when he comes to try his hand, however, there are so many things he must remember to do just at the nick of time, and so many contingencies which he did not look for, constantly arising, that he will likely recollect no more of the lessons he has learned from books than some general directions, and will depend rather on his own judgment and native aptness. This is more the case in Salmon-fishing even than in casting the fly for Trout. I do not mean to convey the idea that the written directions are useless; on the contrary, they are of much service when combined with some practical knowledge of the art. It would, therefore, be well for the beginner to learn all he can from books, and not discard his theory entirely, if not approved of by anglers, whose instruction he may have the benefit of on the river. A little experience will show him that he may combine the teachings of the two, and profit by both. SALMON-FISHING. 357 Although I had been a Trout fly-fisher for a quarter of ‘a eentury and had gained, as I thought, much knowledge from Chitty, Scrope, and “Ephemera” (and there is no better authority than the last), I must confess that I received more instruction last summer in a few days from the hints and suggestions of John Chamberlain, an unlettered canoe-man, than I had from books in many years; though still adhering to the teachings of “Ephemera” in opposition to John, on points which were in accordance with my own notions. I have heard anglers say that Salmon-fishing is only Trout-fishing on a grand scale. There is much truth in the remark, for a person who can cast well for Trout, will soon acquire the knack of throwing the fly for Salmon. But in several important points there is a difference, for Salmon do not often lie in that part of a pool where the angler would look for Trout. He moreover fishes for Salmon with only one fly, and displays it differently—mostly beneath the surface. I offer these hints not with a view of enlightening Salmon- fishers of experience, but with the hope that they may be of some service to beginners who have not access to the authors T have mentioned, or who may not fall into as good hands in their first attempts as I did. A few words in the first place as to holding the rod—A right-handed man will naturally grasp it with the right hand above the reel, and with his left hand below at the end of the butt; and will throw from over the right shoulder. The left- handed man will do the reverse, that is, grasp with his left: hand above the reel and cast from the leftshoulder. A right- handed man will advance his right foot in casting, and a left- handed man his left foot. Supposing then that the great majority of men are right-handed, I will shape my hints accordingly. The first thing is to get out as much line as one intends 358 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. making his first cast with; this is done as in Trout-fishing. To describe it, we will suppose that the angler approaches the stream, the hook clasping one of the bars of the reel (the usual way of carrying it), his line consequently (or as much as has passed through the rings) the same length as his rod, or nearly so. He disengages his fly, throws it on the water, and draws a few feet of line off the reel; the line falling in a loop between the reel and the ring next above it. Now by switching his rod to the right or left—his fly dragging the mean time in the water—the slack line which hangs in a loop is pulled through the rings, and out at the end of the tip, lengthening the line, by so much. This is repeated until he has drawn the point of the rod around so far to one side that he is obliged to lift the line from the water and throw it further out, in order to continue the operation. Thus by pulling the line from the reel, and consecutively switching the rod, the required length is obtained. Of course this pre- liminary operation is not done in the direction in which the fish are supposed to lie. Now, with a smart spring of the rod, the angler lifts his fly from the water to make the first cast, and directs its course backwards over his right shoulder until he thinks it has © nearly reached the distance the line will allow it to go behind him; then with a steady forward motion, succeeded by a switch of the rod, he sends it on its errand across the smoothly- gliding water, that it may float or swing over the current and ‘entice the silver-sided Salmon with its sheen and life-like look. In this plain, straightforward throw, the top of the rod describes nearly an arc in its backward course, and the chord of the same arc in its forward course; in other words, the backward course is a curve, and the forward a straight line. The left figure of the cut on page 362, gives a bird’s-eye SALMON-FISHING. 359 view of the line the point of the rod describes; the dotted line is the course the fly takes, O the place where the angler stands, and the large arrow the course of the river. It is hard to fix the exact time that the particular spring which sends the fly far and straight, is imparted to the rod; it is somewhere about the time it is vertical, or perhaps just before that time, in its forward movement. A person, though, as he acquires the knack of casting, will find it out, though he may not be able to describe it. As in Trout-fishing, the learner is apt to labor hard in casting, using much more force than is required, until he gets the habit of making the rod perform neatly, what he, by mere physical effort, would do clumsily. Another thing that he has learned in Trout-fishing will also be of service to him; it is that lowering of the point of the rod the least bit, by the mere downward bending of the wrist of his right hand, as the fly reaches its destination, causing it to fall lightly on the water, instead of striking it with a splash. There is a way of sending the fly straight out, as if aiming at something above the surface, say on a level with one’s shoulder, and easing it off in the manner just described, which is the per- fection of casting. It requires much practice to acquire it. The manner of getting more line out as one successively increases the length of his cast, is by drawing a few feet from the reel before raising his fly from the water, and as the rod is drawn backward, the slack goes out through the wire loop at the end of the tip. The fly is generally cast directly or obliquely across the stream, the current, or a proper inclination of the rod, or the two combined, bringing it over the place where the fish lie. After the fly has fallen on the water, it is acted upon by two opposing forces—the tendency of the current to take it down stream, and the raising of the point of the rod to restrain or 360 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. direct it; the result is, that the fly swings across the stream towards the side on which the angler stands, describing in its course the segment of a circle, and sweeping along in front of the fish. By increasing the length of the cast directly or obliquely across, as just described, the radius is lengthened, and the segment enlarged and of course extended down stream, as well as across. In this manner, that portion of the pool within reach of the angler is gradually covered; then, by advancing a step at a time, or by short successive pushes of the canoe, he fishes the whole of it, or as much as can be covered from the side he is on. The fibres of the feathers of which the fly is composed, are made to contract and expand as it passes through the water, by the least possible raising and dropping of the point of the rod, in order to show the fly attractively. This, however, cannot be done effectually, if the current is so strong as to press the fibres continually against the body of the fly, not allowing them to open when the top of the rod is lowered. The general rule laid down by “Ephemera,” in bis Book of the Salmon, for fishing a pool “upwards in the direction of its source,” appears to me entirely wrong. It is impracti- cable on many American rivers, from the rapidity of the cur- rent. He ignores his own rule, however, in a remark ona preceding page of his book, when speaking of the motion to be given to the fly in drawing it through the water. He says, “the Salmon-fly is always to be worked or humored against the current, never with it.” How the angler is to humor the fly against the current, when drawing it with the current, I leave him to find out. As to fishing wp stream, it may do where the current is slight, but in swift water it should only be when there is no cast but from the lower end of the pool. SALMON-FISHING. 861 THE LEFT-SHOULDERED Cast.—It frequently occurs, in fishing down either side of a river, that an abrupt bank rises immediately at the angler’s back. If on the right side of the river, such an obstruction makes it necessary to cast from over the left shoulder ; for in making the ordinary right-shouldered cast, the high bank would prevent the backward motion of the rod and the backward sweep of the line. In casting from over the left shoulder, it is not necessary, as “Ephemera” directs, to shift one’s hands; that is, to grasp the rod above above the reel with the left, and the end of the butt with the right hand, and make an awkward attempt, for the time, to become a left-handed man. A much easier plan is not to shift the hands at all, but, keeping them as they are, to bring the line backward over the left shoulder, and cast from the left side. This way of casting, though it may appear awkward at first, will become quite easy after a little practice, especially to one who is used to whipping over the left shoulder for Trout. The middle figure of the diagram on the next page shows the line described by the top of the rod in the left- shouldered cast; the dotted line represents the course of the fly; O is the stand of the angler. A greater difficulty than that just described is to be over- come, when one wishes to cast directly across the stream, and a precipitous bank or cliff rises immediately behind his back, and, it may be, also on his left hand. In this case he has first to get his fly out, down stream; the current will assist him somewhat. Then lifting it with a smart twitch of the rod, he brings it back (but not too far) over the left shoulder, and suddenly facing the desired spot, casts with a short abrupt spring of the rod in that direction. A bird’s- eye view of the course described by the top of the rod in this throw is represented by the right-hand figure of the cut. The largest arrow points down stream. B is the point from which the fly is picked up, and A the direction in which it is cast. 362 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. After practising these two casts for some years whenever the emergency required it in Trout-fishing, I was agreeably surprised in reading Chitty’s (“Theophilus South’s”) “ Fly- Fisher’s Text-Book,” to find them illustrated, and have intro- duced the above diagram, which is somewhat similar, to show that the same casts can be used in Salmon-fishing. There are other obstacles and impediments the Salmon- fisher meets with, which he will have to bear patiently or overcome as well as he can. Amongst these, there is nothing so annoying as an unfavorable wind. At one time it may blow obstinately in your very teeth, requiring a deal of “elbow- grease” to get the fly out. At another time there is a spank- ing breeze astern, and if you can get your line out behind you, there are many chances of cracking your fly off. Then *there is a side-wind blowing up stream or down stream, requiring a nice calculation as to how much you must allow tor leeway, when aiming above or below the spot, as the case may be. At such times, unless the fish are very much dis- posed to rise, “the game does not pay for the candle,” and the fisher had better get into some sheltered nook and light his pipe, instead of thrashing the wind and getting up a feeling of animosity against old Boreas or Atolus. SALMON-FISHING, 363 Salmon frequently leap above the water as if in play or to inhale an additional quantity of atmospheric air; at such times they are not disposed to take your fly. But when one is observed to rise at a natural fly—and there are very few of these on a Salmon river—the angler may expect a rise also at his counterfeit. The length of line that can be cast depends much on the length and spring of the rod; three times its length is the limit that most writers on the subject give as the distance that can be cast with precision and lightness, but with a moderate fair wind, twenty-five yards can be covered with a rod of sixteen feet. A Salmon-pool is generally different from the water in which Trout are found. Not in the shade of trees overhang- ing a still pool, where a cooling spring branch trickles in; not in the tossing, troubled head of a rift; nor often in the eddies that whirl in circles at its sides; nor in its backwater. But in the deep smooth rapid, generally occupying but a small portion of the breadth of the river; or close to the rock that juts boldly up from the deep swift water; sometimes on the brink of the pitch, as it leaps over a ledge of rock. Then again where a moderate deep current terminates in a glassy rapid, called a “tongue” or a “sled-run,” or just above the rocks on either side which force the current into these fancied shapes. In such places as the last mentioned, Salmon gene- rally rest after the labor of winning their way up the strong rapid, Although an experienced Salmon-fisher may go to a new river and point out most of the good pools, there are many casts he would overlook until one who has fished the stream before, or an attendant, who is acquainted with the river, points them out to him. SrRixine.—There is a great difference of opinion amongst 364 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. Salmon-fishers as to striking a fish, most of them contending that you should strike as soon as you see the fish, or the swell it makes in its attempt to seize the fly; others that it should not be done until the fish has turned to go back. Some maintain (see Scrope’s “Days and Nights of Salmon- fishing,”) that you should feel a tug, or in Scotch parlance “a rug,” before you strike. This deliberate way of dealing with a Salmon is advocated by “Ephemera.” The novice in his agitation will be apt to forget any written directions, and strike violently, or too quickly, or not at all. The negative action is the least objectionable of the three; for if the fish is at all eager he will generally hook himself, and the strain on the rod is frequently felt before the angler has time to raise the point of it. So in most cases one can take little credit to himself for hooking the Salmon, for it is rather the act of the fish than his own. The hook may be struck deeper in its hold by a dexterous movement of the wrist, and this is advisable if the fish does not strain the rod sufficiently to do so. PLAYING A SALMON.—A person who is accustomed to the use of the reel in playing other large fish, will soon acquire a reasonable degree of self-possession and skill in killing a Salmon. In doing this, three important things are to be observed: one is to keep up the point of the rod so as to bring its whole spring to bear on the fish, and by no means allow him to “straighten” on you (7. e, to get the line and rod in a direct line between you and him). For if you do, and there should be the slightest catch, or undue pressure on the line to prevent its running freely, he will have a dead pull on you, and will be almost certain to break the hold that the hook has in his mouth, or carry away your casting-line. The reel-line itself would hardly be strong enough to hold a large Salmon under such circumstances, particularly if by coming SALMON-FISHING. ‘365 towards you, he should get some slack in the line, and then suddenly turn and rush down stream. By undue pressure, I mean other resistance to the line passing out, than is caused by a moderately stiff click in the reel, or by that slight uniform pressure of the finger on the line, or of the thumb on the reel, which only an angler of experience with perfect self-possession can give. Some Salmon-fishers use reels without a bearing of any kind, depending on this acquired delicacy of touch; but the only safe plan is to have one with a click, for the click bears continually and without variation ; and this is all the resistance that it is prudent for the angler to offer in playing a Salmon. And it is wonderful how slight this resistance is, when we consider what it accomplishes, for combined with the unceas- ing bearing of a springy rod, it wearies out and completely exhausts a powerful fish, even when assisted by a strong current. I have stated on a preceding page, that the resist- ance of the click, with the friction on the line in passing through the rings, does not exceed twelve ounces, and men- tion the result of the simple experiment here, to show how small a strain there is on the rod and line when a Salmon is properly managed, and to convince the novice how violence lessens the chances of securing his prize. When a Salmon takes the fly, he generally goes to the bottom, and on the instant evinces little or perhaps no alarm, pausing for a few moments as if astonished, or moving off slowly and generally a little way up stream. During this brief space of time the angler has opportunity to put on that self-possession which he will require before the fight is over. If the fish swims against the current, the point of the rod should be turned in the opposite direction. Presently he may drop down stream, not usually with head- long speed, but gradually, when it is necessary to wind up, 366 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. keeping a taut line on him as he passesdown. When he gets below and becomes thoroughly aroused to a sense of his danger, he commences a series of desperate leaps or long runs, or both alternately. If he takes the current, he may ‘run off a third of the line at a dash; then the point of the rod should be turned to one side, butting him stoutly to get him into the still water on the side of the rapid. If this can- not be done he must be followed down stream, recovering line when you can, and giving it grudgingly when you must, keeping the rod in the mean time as nearly perpendicular as possible, and giving him its whole spring. When he leaps, if he is near you, the point of the rod is raised; if far off the point should be lowered. In either case though, after a leap, if there is any slack line it should be immediately recovered, and the usual tension given. Whether fishing from the shore or from a canoe, there is not as much danger of losing a Salmon as one might suppose when it goes over a pitch. For, as I have just said, it does not rush headlong over, but drops down tail foremost, or sideways. At such time the rod should be kept well up, to ease the fish over with its spring. After guiding the fish carefully through the safest channel, another tussle should be had at the first favorable place to get it in shore, or out of the current. In bringing a fish within reach of the gaff, it is not safe to press him harder then, than at any other time of the contest. For by this time the hold of the hook may have nearly worn out. Many a fish is lost by rough usage, or even a little additional force, at such time. I have had the mortification on more than one occasion, of seeing a good fish, after he was fairly conquered, rid himself of the hook by a lazy wollop, or a wave of its broad tail, and sink to the bottom or move slowly away. Some writers give directions as to what part of the body SALMON-FISHING. 367 a Salmon should be gaffed in. The first object should be to gaff it somewhere, and even this is not always easy; though it sometimes happens that a fish is brought near shore, or within reach of the gaff, before it is half killed, and in a lull of the contest or in some quiet moment it may be gaffed, when a prolonged contest might lose it. On American rivers, although one is compelled in many places to cast from a canoe, he should fight his fish from the shore if practicable. It is always necessary to land either on the shore, or on a rock at some convenient place in the river, to bring him within reach of the gaff. In the foregoing, I have supposed a case—a common one— as to how a Salmon may act, and endeavored to give the unin- itiated some idea how the case should be treated ; but there is no telling what a Salmon when fully alarmed will do. At one moment he may be jumping, at the next running towards you, towing the slack line as it bags behind him, when it is necessary to run backwards if he comes faster than you can wind up. Or he may turn his prow down stream, and with his powerful propeller, to which the flanges of the Ericsson screw are as nothing (when compared with the size of the body to be moved), and get headway enough to run out your whole line, if you do not follow fast. And then there is that desperate sawing and jerking of the head when the gentlest -hand is required; or, he may dart around a boulder and double towards you, getting a dead pull, or foul the casting- line in a drift-log, and snap it like a cobweb; or saw it against the sharp edge of a sunken rock, or go over a high pitch, while you have to run along the rocky bank, or shoot the rapid in a frail canoe; or he may sulk on the bottom, when you have to throw in stones, or the canoe-man poke at him with ais setting-pole. But why attempt to describe what a Salmon may or will do? 865 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. CAMPING ON THE RIVER. The next thing in importance to the angler, after sport, is his comfort on the river; he would therefore do well to bestow some thought on the subject before leaving home. His tent, his stores, his clothing, protection against mosquitoes, midges, and black flies, &., are all matters that require care and foresight. Camp Equipace. The Tent—The most convenient size for the accommodation of one person, though it might answer for two, is an eight-foot tent; that is, eight feet long, eight feet wide, and eight feet high, to the ridge-pole. There should be an opening at each end, to create a draught of air through it; it should also be provided with a “fly,” which, in addition to being a double roof to the tent, can be stretched over inclined poles, and used as a shelter for the canoe-men, when one’s stay is of short duration at a station where there is no bark-shed. To shed the rain well, the roof of the tent should have an inclination of not less than forty degrees; and to have room inside and allow a suitable elevation to the mosquito-bar, which is arranged on one side of it, the walls should be three and a half feet high. The best material for a tent of this kind is American cotton drill, weighing eight ounces to a yard, the goods being thirty-three inches wide. At most of the fishing-stations on Salmon rivers frequented’ by anglers, bark sheds have been erected at different times, and, as a matter of mutual interest, they are kept in repair by the canoemen. They are more suitable to sit or eat in, more convenient, with an impromptu table before you, to tie flies in, and even more comfortable to sleep in, with the usual log fire in front. ; Many persons prefer a bed of spruce boughs, and, to protect themselves thoroughly from the moisture of the ground, SALMON-FISHING. 369 spread over the boughs an India-rubber blanket or a buffalo- robe. If one wishes to sleep above the ground, a stretcher can be used. This is simply a piece of heavy linen canvas, six feet long by two and a half or three feet wide, with a hem of six inches on each side. A pole of suitable size and length is thrust through each hem, and the ends of the poles are supported by forked stakes, a foot or so above the ground, or by stout logs, one at the foot and the other at the head, with notches cut in them. When the camp is moved, the poles are drawn “out of the hems, and the stretcher packed with the tent. To support the mosquito-bar, stakes three or four feet long are driven into the ground at each of the four corners of the stretcher; and the bar is suspended by means of rings which slide along a stout cord extending from stake to stake on each side. The bar can be pushed to the head or foot of the bed by this means, when convenience requires it. As the nights are generally cold, even in summer, in the regions of Salmon, two thick blankets—one to sleep on, and another to cover one’s self with—will be required. One will answer if you have a buffalo robe. Protection against Mosquitoes, Black-Flies, and Midges—The angler frequently finds these pests of the wilderness so annoy- ing in daytime as to detract seriously from the pleasure of his sport. At night they are intolerable without a “smudge,” so long as he sits up, and a good mosquito-bar after he has gone to bed. In daytime, the best protection is a veil for the face, and gauntlets for the hands. The best material for a veil is a thin cheap stiffened cotton fabric called “tarleton;” it is much lighter than barege, more open than silk tissue, and cooler than either, as it admits the air freely. It is also more suitable for a mosquito-bar than the article in general use, as the spaces between the threads of this fabric are small enough to exclude even black-flics. 24 370 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. The veil should be made in the shape of a bag, but open at each end, about fifteen or eighteen inches long, and two or two and a half feet in circumference. A piece of fine gum- elastic cord is run in the hem at the top to clasp the body of the hat, while a similar cord in the hem at the bottom secures it around the neck; the rim of the hat keeps it out from the face. The bottom of the veil can be lifted somewhat, and the stem of a pipe stuck in the mouth when one wants to smoke. Gauntlets can be made by sewing linen cuffs to a pair of easy old kid gloves; a piece of gum-elastic cord run in a hem at the top of the cuff, clasping the arm under the coat-sleeve. Last summer, I found a veil and gauntlets of this description effectually to keep out these unwelcome visitors. Different lubricating compounds have been recommended as preventives: among these are tar and sweet-oil, coal-oil, creosote and oil, and oil of pennyroyal. The latter is the cleanest, is not offensive, and is most convenient to carry; it should be diluted with sweet-oil, as it is extremely volatile. The Canadians make a “smudge” to drive off the mosquitoes and flies, which is not only movable, but has a pleasant odor, not unlike that of the incense burnt in Catholic churches: It is made by beating strips of dry bark of the white cedar, and binding them into bundles four or five inches in diameter and two or three feet long. One of these bundles will burn for five or six hours, gradually smouldering away, and emit- ting a pretty stream of blue smoke. It is convenient to place by one’s side at mealtime, or when reading or tying flies. I will not endeavor to anticipate by description, the interest with which the novice will mark the skill and readiness of — the man of the woods, in the use of his paddle and pole, his axe and his knife, and the various materials and appliances he so aptly finds in the forest, for making rude tables, benches, « stools, beds, baskets, buckets, &c. SALMON-FISHING. 3871 Clothing, &c—One requires strong warm clothing on the river; he should not be without a good jacket to come to the hips, two pairs of heavy woollen pantaloons, two warm flannel shirts, two or three pairs of stout yarn socks (“ Shaker” socks are best), a change of such underclothes as he wears in this climate in winter, and two pairs of good lace-boots ; one pair of the latter should be sparsely studded with wrought-iron hob-nails, in case he may wish to wade at times. He should avoid glaring colors in his dress; light-gray is the most suitable. His wallet should include thread and needles, awl, waxed- ends, shoemakers’ wax, a few hob-nails, coarse and fine twine, a pair of small pliers, a file, a spring-balance to weigh his fish, court-plaster, a box of Seidlitz powders, shellac varnish, prepared glue, and boiled linseed-oil; the last three in vials as large as the end of one’s thumb. Cooking Utensils—The cooking utensils and table furniture are an iron pot and kettle, a coffee-pot, a folding wire fish-broiler, three or four tin plates and as many tin cups to fit into each other; pewter spoons, pepper-boxes, knives and forks, &c. If the angler has in view easy transportation and snug stowage, and would diminish the hard work to which his canoe-men are subjected in poling against a strong current, and in making difficult portages, he will not take barrels or cumbersome trunks into a birch canoe, but pack his provi- sions, as many of them as he can, in bags, his clothes in carpet or India-rubber wallets, and his camp equipage in bundles. StorEs—Camping out, to be enjoyed with zest, should be attended with as few home luxuries as a person can well do with; still, some of those that pertain to his table, ‘add greatly to the edibility of the food he gets by rod or gun, when continual feeding on it begins to cloy the appe- 372 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. tite. A moderate assortment of such things might include vinegar, Worcestershire sauce, salad-oil, essence of coffee or “caffeine,” solidified milk, a small quantity of desiccated meats and vegetables for soup and pottage, and a box of claret, if it can be carried, for, as I have before remarked, there is no beverage like it with fresh fish. The stores that go to make the real staff of life are pork, ship-bread, potatoes, onions, beans, salt, pepper, butter, tea, sugar, &c. It may be asked, Why such a profusion? or it might be said that fresh Salmon is good enough; and so it is; but one becomes satiated with it after a while, and longs for some of the common things he ate at home. The canoe- men will not forget their tobacco, and should be sure to have a pound or two of rosin to patch and stop up the cracks in their canoe. Cooxine SaLMon.—On the river there is a variety of ways of cooking or preparing Salmon for the table. The following are a few simple receipts :— To boil Salmon.—Have a sufficient quantity, but not too much water, boiling briskly with a good handful of salt in it. Cut off a piece of fish of suitable size, notch it to the bone, put it into the pot, cover it up close, and give it from ten to twenty minutes, according to its size. Serve it up hot, with some of the liquor left after boiling. To broil Salmon.—Cut steaks across the fish, or, if length- wise, let the pieces include some of the fat glutinous portions of the belly; lay them between the folds of the wire fish- broiler; turn it often, and be careful not to overdo them. When served up, the dish should be placed on a flat hot stone, and your plate also, if you prefer; butter the fish well while hot, and season it to your liking. Cold Salmon.—Put aside part of the fish boiled for dinner, and eat it cold for supper; it is extremely delicate. SALMON-FISHING. 378 Soused Salmon.—Take a piece of boiled Salmon, and put it in a pan with due proportions of salt, red pepper, vinegar, Worcestershire sauce or walnut catsup, and salad-oil; let it stand five or six hours, and eat it cold; it is very appetizing. To bake a Grilse—Scale and wash it outside, but let no water touch the inside. Score or notch it to the bone, season it by rubbing the inside and the gashes with plenty of pepper and salt, wrap it in a single envelope of buttered paper, and then in a half-dozen folds of coarse straw paper; saturate it thoroughly in water, press it slightly between the hands, and then lay it in a bed of hot coals and ashes, and cover it up. 3 animated commas, ’ ’ ’ or incipient tadpoles with tales attenuated— ry, y FP DF called spermatozoa, and described in your article as ‘‘ threads or filaments projecting themselves from the mass of the milt, trembling and oscillating in the water ;” finally to find their way to and into the air-chamber of the egg, through the orifice described.” I would here observe that the spermatozoa of the Trout, being, from the nature of its parent fish, fishy, would not voluntarily leap from its native element into the world of atmo- spheric air contained in this great cavity ; as trouts, to satisfy hunger, are not observed to chase grasshoppers about the pastures, or to tree the ephemera or stone-fly—so I should not expect the embryo fish in the milt of the male, of its own seeking, to venture into that air-cavity. And yet I have no doubt that it finds its way through the orifice as observed by your friend. The following query was started in my mind on reading his observations: Is the egg a passive recipient of the spermatozoa, or is it also living, and endowed with powers and instruments to attract, urrest, 684. AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. and appropriate the life-bearing atom from the impregnated waters? Some silly soul asserts that a fool can ask questions in an hour, which a wise man could not answer in a lifetime. Leaving the reader to classify the asker of the above question as is most conducive to his individual comfort, I mean to play the wise man in attempting an answer to the query. When the season and leisure suit—following the example of Simon Peter of blessed memory—‘‘I go a-fishing ;” but with the ripening of the grape, and the fall of the leaf, the old rod is hung in the closet, and the fly-book placed beyond the reach of “thieves to steal” or “moths to corrupt.” Then Trouts and brooks, and the solemn woods, become pleasant memories whereon to hang hopes of a “right serious fish” in the coming springtime. The great waters being closed, I then fish on the stage of the microscope, and in a single drop of water contemplate the unbounded resources of creative power. In a lake formed by a fraction of a drop of water placed on a slip of polished glass, and covered by a film of mica (to prevent immediate eva- poration), we may observe phenomena to aid in answering our query. In the water contained between these two surfaces, is verge and’ scope for a myriad brood to act out their brief play of love and hate. If your glass be good you may observe them to toy and play, to pursue and prey on each other, as humanly as their brother worms in tailed coats and epaulets. Now, it is no longer the simplicity of these atoms of animated jelly that surprises us, but the complication of their organization, which is wholly microscopic. And we need not long for the variety of the mountain lake or river side, as we gaze into this new world of being. For here we per- ceive moving bodies of varied and beautiful form, many presenting exam- ples of perfect harmony and proportion, and all richly endowed with the organs and faculties of animal life, and provided with all that can be needed for their happy existence, In size these vary from a thousandth to the twenty-thousandth part of an inch. They move across the stage, some gliding and slow, some with a velocity proportionately transcending man’s powers of locomotion even on the rail car. Mark this Uvella, at least the three-thousandth part of an inch in bulk; with twelve stomachs, each rendered visible by some score of green monads contained therein; with double proboscides, thrashing the water to scare up other prey to fill some stomach it may possess, other than the twelve already discovered. Imagine one of these animals, of which a cubic inch would contain twenty-seven thousand millions, and listen to that waggish old micro- FISH BREEDING. 685. scopist Ehrenburg, who facetiously informs us that each. has “two large ventricles.” This monster with two large ventricles and a round dozen of stomachs, capable of darting about with the incredible velocity of one- twelfth of an inch in four seconds, having clubbed to death a poor Chlamidimonas, settles into depths profound to gorge the precious morsel, and is lost to view as he passes from the focus of the instrument. We will also observe a class of beings which have hitherto defied all our powers of investigation, to determine whether they are animals or plants! no characteristic at present known has been found sufficient to satisfy both zoologist and botanist. It will be observed that a large proportion of the infusorial animalcula and rotatoria are furnished with vibratory cilia, or thread-like appendages, which are differently arranged according to the species; but all fitted and used to produce currents in the water, for the purpose of wafting within their reach particles of animal or vegetable matter on which they subsist ; thus grazing a great extent of pasture without a change of base. Pritchard remarks: ‘‘ The disposition of the bundles or clusters of cilia in Rotatoria, and their appearance when in motion, may be considered as one of the most curious and interesting spectacles in the animal creation. Their resemblance to toothed wheels, and their continual revolution, have been most fertile subjects for the exercise of the imagination ; indeed there are few which can excite more astonishment in the beholder.” Nor is this wonderful apparatus confined to the microscopic infusoria, but are furnished as an aid to the respiratory organs of animals incapable of motion, as observed in the gills of the oyster and mussel, where they serve to produce powerful currents, which bring aerated water to supply the needs of the immovable animal. Nor does this motion seem to depend immediately on the life of the animal, as their form and motion is best observed some hours after they have been detached from the oyster; when their movements become more sluggish. The epithelium cells abounding in the mucous membrane of the stomach and lungs of man and other animals, are also fringed with vibratile cilia, which may often be observed in rapid motion some time after the death of the animal; or when they have been detached from their source by scraping the membrane. In reading of an opening or mouth in the shell of a newly-laid egg of the Trout, and the action of the spermatic animalcula as detailed in the preceding article on fish breeding, the query arises whether the membrane lining the egg might not terminate around the edge of the orifice men- tioned, in the form of a fringe of vibratile cilia, with power to create 686 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK, currents in the water, for a period of time after separation from the living organism of the mother, even as the cilia of the epithelium cells from a living animal does continue to vibrate after being detached; and by this power bring within their range the spermatozoa necessary to the fecunda- tion of the egg, and that it may embrace and absorb the vitalizing ani- malcula. Remembering that Nature in her operations trusts nothing to chance, but proceeds by harmonious means until the end is accomplished, may we not infer that the egg of the beautiful Trout (as well as other fish) is as well provided to insure its vitality and fecundation, as is the sluggish oyster to maintain its existence? Both being alike immovable, may it not be by some like arrangement of parts, to act on a like element, that the egg can attract the filament within its reach, and is not abandoned to the chances of accidental impregnation by the milt of the male, discharged at random, and liable to be swept by the currents of the stream beyond the reach of a large proportion of the eggs, were they simply passive recipients of the fecundating element ? Your friend has observed an air-vessel in the egg, to float the orifice or mouth upwards towards the current, and I, reasoning from the foregoing observations, suppose that mouth provided with appendages observed in the very lowest order of animal life, and present likewise in the very highest, and a vitality in the egg, or its epithelium cells, to cause currents in the surrounding waters, that it may be enabled to perfect its existence by seizing upon, and appropriating, “the threads or filaments projected from the milt of the male, and brought within its reach by the currents described. And as the acorn is provided with all necessary elements to become a great oak, even so may this little germ contain all powers necessary to become a great Trout, to glad the heart of some honest angler, who dare trust in the Providence that careth for the egg of the Trout or for the least of the infusoria, as for the greatest of earth’s worthies. W. M. D. In connection with this subject, it is appropriate to remark that I have lately witnessed one of the beneficial effects of fish-breeding in its bearing on the stocking of Trout ponds on Long Island, and offer some suggestions as to the profit that might be made to accrue to the pisciculturer, although he may not be profound in his know- ledge of the science. It is well known that many merchants and professional men of FISH BREEDING. 687 New York have private Trout ponds on Long Island, or are members of clubs owing or renting ponds; and frequently during the fly- fishing season find a few days’ recreation in this quiet sport. Persons who have visited the island, away from the railroad, have also observed the frequency of the rivulets and spring branches running into South Bay. Most of these have dams on them, which in former days furnished water-power for saw and grist mills. The timber has all been sawed and the different parts of the island brought within such easy distance of the metropolis as to require but few grist-mills ; and these ponds have now become valuable for the sport which they may be made to afford in Trout-fishing, whilst other ponds, where natural facilities warrant it, have been established. These circum- stances have created a demand for young Trout for stocking new waters or replenishing those where improvidence, or over-fishing, or poaching has diminished the number of fish. A gentleman, whose hospitality I enjoyed at his fishing lodge on Long Island in the early part of April, furnished me a few interesting facts relating to ponds. He informs me that his was stocked two years ago with little fingerlings, but a few inches in length, and has since been replenished by young fish reared by artificial means in the neighborhood. The usual price of these small fry, brought and placed in the pond, is generally ten dollars a hundred. Now, observe that it will not require more than six well-grown spawners—say of a pound each—to produce twelve thousand eggs, and two or three males to fecundate their ova. Allowing a loss of one-sixth for accidents, their produce would be ten thousand young fish ; these, when a year old, at the moderate price of ten dollars per hundred, are worth a thousand dollars. How easy, then, would it be for a farmer, who has the facilities on his premises, to inaugurate a cheap fish breeding establishment, and thus add largely to his income! The angler above alluded to, wlo also rents an adjoining pond, that his guests may not be stinted in their sport, informs me that certain ponds are known for the uniformly large size of the Trout reared in them, while others are remarkable for those of small size ; and says that the small fry placed in his own pond attained to the 688 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK average size of a half-pound in a year. At* present (twelve months later) their usual size is not much less than a pound; many even exceed that weight by two or three ounces. He very naturally sup- poses that the small fish keep in the shallow water at the head of the pond or the rivulet supplying it. I noticed in angling that this was the case; and when the size was not satisfactory we would move our cast nearer the breast of the dam, where the water was of greater depth. I think I may safely say, that our catch of seventy- eight fish in the two ponds alluded to would have weighed seventy pounds—also that the growth of these fish was a third more rapid than they would have been in a brisk mountain stream. STOCKING PONDS AND LAKELETS WITI BLACK BASS. In my remarks on stocking ponds, in the article on fish breeding, on page 461, I have mentioned the fact that the Southern Bass (Grystes salmoides) was transferred from the James River in the vicinity of Richmond, and placed in mill-ponds near Warrenton, a hundred miles distant. It is gratifying to know that the gentle- man who contributes the subjoined observations has had the enter- prise to introduce its congener, the Black Bass of the Lakes (Grystes nigricans), into the lakelets around West Point. It is also strange that the State of New York, when the European Carp was intro- duced into its waters, should have endeavored to protect it by legal enactment, when this “native,” which furnishes an infinite deal of sport, while the Carp gives none, and whose flesh is so much superior to any fish of the Carp family, should have been left to take care of itself. The following article will show that our native should be encouraged to emigrate, and that, having established a pre-emp- tionary right to its new home, all it requires is “to be let alone ;” and that in a few years it will furnish sport which is not inferior to Trout fly-fishing on the lakes of Hamilton and Franklin counties in the same state ; besides giving people adjacent to its adopted waters a food, the excellence of which is not surpassed by any of the Perch family. FISH BREEDING. 689 Wasr Point, April 10, 1865. Taappevs Norris, Esq. Sir: The writer of these lines having perused ‘‘ The American Angler’s Book” with much satisfaction, and it having been intimated to him that you were about to issue a new edition, he has imagined that some account of the successful introduction of the Black Bass into several of the lakes in the Highlands, while not devoid of interest to the generality of readers, might induce others, having the opportunity, to try experiments of a similar nature, especially after a sketch of the modus operandi and the result obtained. In the mountainous region along the Hudson, known as the Highlands, there exist many quiet little lakes on the western shore; most of them injudiciously stocked with the voracious Pickerel, and all abounding in the indigenous Yellow Perch, the troublesome Catfish, and the Silver Eel. Residing within easy access of many of these lakelets, the writer had long regretted that some nobler species had not been introduced, and having determined to make the experiment, he very naturally fixed upon the Biack Bass of our northern waters as the fish most likely to succeed and afford the most satisfactory sport. Consequently, during a fishing tour in the summer of 1859, he fixed upon Saratoga Lake as the point whence to procure the fish. After spending a fortnight on the lake, experimenting aud watching the habits of this fish, he finally contracted with an old and experienced fisherman for sixty Bass, to be delivered in good condition at West Point during the ensuing autumn. The contract price for value of fish, transportation, and incidental expenses, was $90, certainly » mode- rate compensation when taking into consideration the transportation from the lake to the nearest railroad station, the subsequent care of the fish during the transit, and likewise the scarcity of the Bass in consequence of the great amount of fishing on the lake, the inducement being the sup- ply required for Moon’s fashionable resort. The fish, sixty-one in number and all weighing over a pound and a half, were carried in a large puncheon and delivered in fine order at West Point, in November 1859. Peter Francis, the fisherman alluded ‘to above, had them in charge, and being much interested in the success of the experiment, his impatience for their speedy transportation was quite equal to that of the writer. No time was lost, the puncheon was well secured in a wagon, and, in less than a quarter of an hour after their arrival, the strangers were on their way to Wood Lake, their new highland home. Three folds of carpet were strongly tied over the puncheon, to prevent 44 690 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. splashing over the rough mountain-roads; the water was renewed three times during the journey; and, the start having been made at 2 p. m., the lake was reached at dusk. The wagon being backed towards the lake, the fish were handed over in a bucket, and gently deposited by the writer in the clear limpid water, on a rocky shore. The ‘contrabands” did not, at first, seem to appreciate the recovery of their freedom, but remained huddled together in a narrow space, and in a state of apparent atupefaction, their fins slightly quivering. The last Bass having been safely deposited, Peter now jumped from the wagon, and, as a man accustomed to every phase of similar expeditions, said quietly, ‘‘ Now, sir, touch them one after another with a stick.” No sooner said than done— when it was really delightful to see each individual, upon a slight touch of the wand, dart off into deep water with that rush peculiar to the noble Bass. The last fish was touched, and all having now gladly sought the depths of the lake, the writer wended his way home with a feeling of immense satisfaction. During the ensuing summer, in the month of August 1860, the writer pitched his tent on the banks of Wood Lake, and began a minute search for signs of young Bass. None, however, gladdened his eye; and after more than a week or so, a sense of disappointment was fast stealing over his mind, when one day a neighboring farmer paid him a visit with his two urchins, begging they might be indulged with a couple of small bait- hooks for the purpose of taking a few Sunfish with worms. They were speedily accommodated, but had not been gone long before they returned shouting ‘Daddy, we’ve cotched two of the queerest fish you ever see !— they ain’t Sunfish, they ain’t Catfish, and they ain’t Yaller Perch, and we dunno what they be!’ Hereupon a highly interested individual sprang from out his tent, when lo! he identified two young Bass, each three and a half inches long and an inch wide. This was the result of the first spawning, probably in February or March; and the age consequently between five dnd six months. All doubt was now at an end, the problem was solved, and the success a triumphant one. By the way, the young Bass from one to two inches in length is easily distinguishable ly a spot of dingy white upon each side near the tail. When of larger growth, this spot disappears. Wood Lake is now well stocked, and having, within the last two years, become private property, is entirely protected from all manner of intrusion and poaching. The circumstance of the new species not taking a bait through the ice is an additional protection. The Bass now take the spoon FISH BREEDING, 691 readily, rise freely at a fly, and are often caught still-fishing with minnow or grasshopper. On the 10th of September, 1864, the writer killed one measuring 18} inches in length, the greatest breadth being 6 inches and the exact weight 4 pounds; this fish was undoubtedly one of the original stock. During the summer of 1863, avery interesting experiment was made in the way of forming a scale of sizes from the largest fish taken down to the smallest fry. The fish were stuffed and varnished on the spot, a neat frame was made of choice bark fantastically shaped, the whole presenting to the eye of an angler a highly satisfactory picture. While preventing general fishing on the lake, the writer has adopted the plan of keeping a large car in which he secures Bass of the middling size: these he gives freely to all persons wishing to stock ponds in the vicinity. The consequence is; that many ponds and small lakes are now stocked: from these others will be easily supplied, and there is no reason why the numerous lakelets throughout this region should not, in the course of a few years, abound with Black Bass, though unfortunately not to the exclusion of the logy Pickerel and the common Yellow Perch. Hoping that the above sketch of a successful experiment may prove of some interest to the readers of the forthcoming edition of ‘The Ame- rican Angler’s Book,” , I remain Your most obedient servant, H. R. Aenea. 692 AMERICAN ANGLER’S BOOK. CONCLUSION. Aaain I bring my task to a close, not without fear that some faults have crept into this Supplement, as into the body of my first edition. If so, and you should point them out to me, dear reader, in a spirit of candor and kindness, I shall consider myself your debtor. In recording pleasing recollections of scenes and persons | have met with in my wanderings, or in reciting or compiling what has been imparted to me by others, it may be that I have been for- tunate enough to renew a sunny glow of boyhood in some careworn heart, or fostered some germ of love for the innocent, the simple, the beautiful, or the grand in nature, in a mind possessed with absorbing projects of wealth or ambition; or implanted such love in some youthful breast. If so, [have my reward, and once more say — Farewell ! Ye! who have traced the Pilgrim to the scene Which is his last, if in your memories dwell A thought which once was his, if on ye swell A single recollection, not in vain He wore his hobnailed shoon, and scallop shell ; Farewell——” INDEX. Ablodon grunniens, 122. Adamson, Dr., 244. Address to Reader, 7, 601. Adirondacks, 547, 668. Adshead, J. E., 612, 640. Agassiz, Prof., 39. Agnel, Prof. H. R., 688. Alexandria Bay, on the St. Lawrence, 106. Allen, Billy, of Culpepper C. H., Va., 186. Alosa preestabilis, 171. Anchovy, 166. Angler’s Sabbath, 589. Angler, What and who is an angler? 29. The Fussy Angler, 30. The Snob Angler, 30. The Greedy Pushing Angler, 30. The Spick and Span Angler, 30. The Rough and Ready Angler, 30. The Literary Angler, 30. The Pretentious Angler, 31. The Shad-roe Fisherman, 31. The English Admiral an Angler, 33. The True Angler, 33. His happy memories of the past summer, 34. His pleasures on the stream, 34. The Nervous Angler, 581. The Angler’s Retreat, 659. Angling, its harmonizing influences, 27. Recollections of, in boyhood, 28. Its after influences on manhood, 29. _ Its social tendencies, 29. An incentive to the love and study of nature, 35. Anguilla communis, 186. Anticosti Island, Salmon Rivers on, 615. Aquarium, 483. Most convenient size and shape of, 483. Arthur N. Edwards’s book on, 483. Best materials for, 484. Situation, exposure, and plants for, 484, © : Suitable fish for, 485. Artificial Fish-breeding, 459, 464. Its discovery by Gehin and Remy, 466. Previous discovery of, by Jacobi, 466, W. H. Fry’s book on, 464. Used as a means of replenishing barren waters, 481-686. Successful experiment in Niagara county, New York, 677. Hatching Troughs, 461, 468, 679. Expressing the spawn, 469, 679. Securing the breeding fish, 679. Treatment of fecundated eggs, 475, 680. Phenomenon of fecundation, 680. Incubation, 680. Sustenance, food, and growth, 479, 681. Ponds for rearing Trout, 479. Stocking ponds in Niagara county, New York, and results, 682. On Long Island, 686, 687. Notes on impregnation of the ova, by a microscopist, 683. Owen Desh’s Trout troughs at Hel- lertown, Pennsylvania, 481. Artificial Flies for Trout, 312. for Salmon, 350, Ashby, Turner, 583. Au Sable River, 550. Bacon, C. and W., of Boston, 612. Baird, 60, 165. Baker’s Chronicles, 129. Barb, or Kingfish, 286. “ Barnwell,” 242, 271, 578. Basin on the Nipissiguit, 246, 637, 650. (693) 694 INDEX. Black, of the Lakes, 103. Stocking ponds with, ny Prof. H. R. Agnel, 688. Trolling for, 105. Fresh Water, of the West, 99. Oswego, 110. Striped, or Rockfish, 81. Striped, of the Ohio, 108. Short Striped, 109. White, of the Lakes, 107. Sea, 300. Striped-Bass fishing at Narragan- sett Bay, 672. On the Lower Rappahannock, 87. Bathurst, 390, 651. Bayou Lebranch, 119. Beaver Breok, 520. Beaverkill, 158, 579. Bethune, 8, 9, 27, 31, 128, 129, 157, 314, 459. Book of the Salmon, 214. Bose, 59. Bothrolomceus pampanus, 298. Blackfish, 300. Bloch, 59. ° Bluefish, or Snapping Mackerel, 294, Brandywine, 159. Bream, 118. Brook Trout, scientific description, 194. Habits and manner of breeding, 195. Growth of, 196. Difference in the size of, 196. Effect of light and water on, 199. Errors in regard to new species, 199. Food of, 200. Geographic range of, 202. Large sizes of, in some waters, 204. Former abundance, and cause of decrease of, 202. Brown, J. J., 86, 124, 199, 200, 271. Bruin, Lake, 80. Brundage, 503. Buffalo Fish, 155. Its large size, 156. -Rafinesque’s error in regard to its food, 155. Recollections of a man who was fond of eating of it, 156. Buffalo Perch—not a Perch, 122. Rafinesque’s description of, 122. Finding its way into Lake Ponchar- train, by crevasse, 124. J. J. Brown’s error concerning it, 124, Bass. South and Bugs, 518. Bull, Mr., of New Orloans, 282. Cadwalader, W., 633. Caleb, Dr., 509. Camping on the River, 363. Law and custom when, 374. Camp equipage, 368. Protection against mosquitoes, &c., 369. Clothing, &c., 371. Cooking utensils, 371. Stores, 371. Cooking Salmon, 372. Canadian or Sea Trout, 238. Not the same as the Sea or Salmon Trout of Europe, 238. Mr. Perley’s and Frank Forester’s error in regard to species and habits of, 239, 649. Compared with Brook Trout, 240-1. Account of fishing for, by Perley, 243. Dr. Adamson, 244. The Author, 246, 649. Annoyance to Salmon-fishers, 246. Capelin, 267. Their great abundance, and how taken, 267, 268. ; Cape Vincent, on the St. Lawrence, 106. Carp Family, 153. Characteristics of, 154. Casting the fly— For Trout, 327. For Salmon, 356. Catfish and Eels, 177. Catfish. Extract from Iconographie Magazine, 177. Ejected from craters of volcanoes, 179. Electric Catfish, 179. Catfish of Atlantic and Western States, 180. Care for their young, 182. Anecdote about Catfishing, 181. Catostomus bubalus, 155. ee communis, 154. Chamberlain, John, 392, 646. Chatham, N. B., 391, 551. Chilton, Sam., reply to Henry A. Wise, 559 Chippewa Indians, 537. Chitty, 349, 416. Chub or Fall Fish, 157. Errors in regard to size of, 157. An annoyance to fly-fishers, 158. INDEX. Chub-fishing on the Brandywine, 159. Umbrella invented by o veteran Chub-fisher, 160. Clark, Billy, 156. Clinton De Witt, 60. Clupeidee, 165. Codfish, reference to, 41, 44. Cogswell, Squire, 113. Cold Brook, 560. Collingwood, Capt., his fishing in the St. John in 1863, 617-625. Conclusion, 599, 692. Conroy, his distinction between an angler and fisherman, 557. Cooking fish. See conclusion of article on each fish described. Cooking Salmon on the river, 372. To boil and broil, 372. Cold, 372. Soused, 373. Kippered, 373. Smoked, 374. To bake Grilse, 373. Cooking Trout on the stream, 497. Cooper, Captain, 399. Cooper, Dick, banjo player, 505, 542-3. Coregonus albus, 269. Corégonus. The species of this genus referred to, 269. A small species in Saranac Lake, 562. Corvina ocellata, 293. Country school-house, 591. Croaker, 291. Cut-off in the Mississippi, 80. Cuvier, 56, 127. Cybium maculatum, 296. Cyprinide, remarks on, 153. Dade, Major Jack, of Virginia, 555, 557, 558, 559. Darby, Chester, 497. Davy, Sir Humphrey, 237, 573, 578. Deer.—Noosing deer, 508. Yarding of deer, 509. Shining deer, 556. De Kay, 60, 91, 97. Detroit River, 98. Diamond River, 517. Dies PiscaTori, 487. Introduction to, 489. Houseless Anglers, 490. Introductory remarks, 491, Noonday Roast, 497. First Nooning—an account of Trout- 695 fishing in Hamilton county, New York, 503. Second Nooning—an account of Trout-fishing in New Hampshire, 513, Third Nooning—an account of Trout-fishing in the regions of Lake Superior, 531. Fourth Nooning--an account of Trout-fishing in the Adirondacks, 547. Fly-fishing alone, 567. The Angler’s Sabbath, 589. Conclusion, 599. Dining on the stream—treatment of guests, 576. Dipsey, 73. Dog “ Trent,” anecdote concerning, 618. Droppers, or Drop Flies, 321. Knot for fastening on, 409. Drum-Fish, 299. Duff, Dr., journalist of party to River St. John, 615-25. Dwarf Salmon of the St. Croix, 248. Dyeing Feathers and Dubbing, 411. Dyeing Gut, 410. Edisto River, Bass-Fishing on, 100. Edwards, Arthur N,’s book on the Aqua- rium, 483. Eels, observations on, 183. The Lamprey Eel, 183. The Electric Eel, 184. The power of its battery, 185. Manner of capturing, 185. The Common Eel, 186. Upward migration of its young, 187. Used as bait, 187. Bobbing for Eels, 187. Eggs of Fish—see Ova. Ephemera, 437. “ Ephemera” (soubriquet), 212, 235. Ephemeride, 436. Esocide, observations on, 127. Esox estor, 135. Esox lucioides, 131. “ Hsox osseus,” 128. Esox vittatus, 148. Fairmount, on Schuylkill River, 94. Fall Fish, 157. Fauna Boreali Americana, 59, 306, 259, 269. Feathers for Artificial Flies, 425, 427. 696 Ferguson, John, 393. Fish—General Remarks on, 39. Definition of, 39. Origin and order in Creation, 40. Natural mode of propagation, 41, Habits as regards maternity, 43. Their fecundity, 44. Migrations, 45, 47. Migration of surplus production, 46, 79, 112. Vitality of, 47. External organs of, 51. Internal organization, 52. Their fins, and their use for them, 51, 57. Their teeth, and use of them, 54. Digestion, 50. Organs and senses, 53, 54. Mucous secretion on, and its use, 54. Fish-Breeding, by natural propagation, 459. In ponds, 461-4, 679-88. Artificially —see ‘“ Artificial Fish- Breeding.” Fishing on the Prairies, 533, Fish Ponds. Manner of stocking them, 461, 688. By ova left in the soil, 48. Fish-roe, 41. Fish Stories, 128, 129, 130, 149. Fiske, Dr. C. K., 629. Furies For SAuyon. For the Nipissiguit, Brown Fly, 353. Nicholson, Silver Gray, Chamber-. lain, 354, For Canadian Rivers, Louise, Ed- win, Forsythe, Stevens, Ross, Parson, 355. Strachan, Langevin, 356. Fuiies For Trout, 314. Hackles and Palmers—Soldier, Red, 314. Brown, Ginger, 315. Grizzly, Mottled, White, Dotterel, Lead Color, Grouse, 316. Winged Flies—Great Red Spinner, 317. Brown Spinner, March Brown, Cow- dung, Stone Fly, 318. Flies described by Ronalds, 318. Tron-Blue Dun, Grannom, Jenny Spinner, 318, Black Gnat, Yellow Sally, Fern Fly, Alder Fly, Mackerel Fly, May Flies, and a Fancy Fly, 319. | | INDEX. Scarlet Ibis, Governor, Brown Hen, Coachman, 320. Deer Fly (humbug), 437. Conroy’s “ Journal” Flies, 314, 576. Widow, and Girl with a Calico Dress, 582, Flounder, 299. Fly-Fishing for Trout. See “Trout Fly- Fishing.” Fly-Making, 419. Implements for—Hand-vice, spring- pliers, scissors, &c., 420. Materials—Hooks, gut, tinsel, dub- bing, hackles, wings, 423-8. To make Hackles, 429. « «Palmers, 431, A Fly with wings, 433. Tails, 435. Forester, Frank, 86, 128, 157, 173, 198, 239, 200, 322. Frost Fish, 301. Fry, W. H., 225, 464. “ 66 “6 Gang of hooks for trolling, 409. Gar-Fish—Frank Forester’s error con- cerning, 128. How taken, 128. Gay, 417, 423. George—Fly-maker, 416, 656. Gesner’s Pike, 129. Gill, 60, 120. Gin, 514. Girard, 60. Glenn’s Falls, 550. Goodbout River, 628. Goody, Spot, or Pig Fish, 283. Graham (of Bell’s Life in London), 214. Grand Falls on the Nipissiguit. Description of, and its pools, 396-9. Diary of sojourn there, 637-642. Grayling, Back’s, 259. Dr. Richardson’s aceount of its game qualities, 260. Great Lake Pickerel, 131. Great Lake Trout, 250, Manner of taking it, 251. Great Natashquan, description of, 629. Grilse (Young Salmon), 229. The sport they give, 647. Grouse Canadian, 658. Grystes Nigricans, 103. Grystes Salmoides, 99. Gymnotide, 184, Hackles, 425. INDEX. Haldeman, 60. Hans Breitman’s Barty, 527. Hendrick Hudson, 207. Henry, Jim, 577, 580. Hermaphrodite Fish, 45. ae Locomotive, 656. Herrings—Remarks on Family of, 165. Migrations of, 167. Great numbers, and commercial im- portance of, 168. Great haul of on the Potomac, 170. Taken with artificial fly, 171. Hofland, 316, 582. Holbrook, 60, 99, 115, 118. Hooked foul, 573. Hooks, 63. Kirby, Limerick, Weak Trout, 63. O’Shaughnessy, Sneck bend, Vir- ginia, 64. Salmon hooks, 67. First tempered by Prince Rapert, 67. To tie on a hook, 406. Horse traps, 516. Houseless Anglers, account of, 490. Dedication to, 5. Preamble and Address setting forth objects of association, 491. Howitt, William, extract from his Rural Life in England, 584. Humboldt, 178. Ichthyology, 56. Ichthyologists, 59, 60. Irish Anecdotes, 623, 624. Iron-wood for rods, 442. Jackfish, 130. Jackfishing on the Rappahannock, 144. James River Chub, 99 James River, 100. Jones, Billy, 92. Kingfish, 286. Kippered Salmon, 373, Knots. The Angler’s Single Knot, 408. ee “ Double Knot, 408. The Water Knot, for fastening on drop flies, 408. Krider, John, 67, 312. Labrax albidus, 97. Labrax chrysops, 108. Labrax Lineatus, 81. Labrax pallidus, 90, Lacepede, 59. 697 Lake Bruin, Mississippi, 80. Lake George, 106. Lake Pleasant, 504. Lake Ponchartrain, 108, 109. Lake St. Clair, 107. Lake Umbagog, 654. Lake Mollychunkamunk, 654. z Leaders, 69. Leiostomus obliquus, 289. Len, baiter at Narragansett, 675, Lepidosteus, 40, 128. Leponts, Louie, 538. Lesser Lake Trout, 255. Trolling for, 256. .| Leacosomus rhotheus, 157. Le Val River, 653. : Lewis, Dr. Elisha J., article by, 654. Lilly, Mr., Salmon-fisher, 632. Lines, 70, 312, 349. Long Beach, 278. Long Lake, Illinois, 113. Long Lake, New York, 668. Loops, 406. Louie Lake, 508. Lucioperca Americana, 120. Mackerel, breeding places unknown, 46. Mackinaw, 424. Maguire, Father Tom, 508, 638. Major, The, 145. Mallotus villosus, 267. Manitouline Islands, 532. Marryatt, Captain, 573. Martin, Bill, Saranac Lake, 553. Mascalonge, 135. Incorrectly pictured by Cuvier, 128. Matlack, George’s boys, 113. Megalloway River, 517, 660- Micropogon undulatus, 291. Miller, Hugh, 40, 41. Mingan River, 386, 609, 612. Mirimichi River, 388. Miskind, Sam, Indian, 622. Mississippi, lakes and ponds fed by, 79, 112. Cut off in, 80, 10]. Sauve crevasse in, 124. Mitchil, 59. Moisie River, 384, 385, 609, 610, 612. Bacon, and Williams’s score on, in 1862-3, 627. Mollychunkamunk, Lake, 654. Mosquitoes, protection against, 369. Mullet, 300. Murdock Lake, Illinois, 113. 698 Muriniday, 183. Narragansett Bay, 671. Natashquan. Diary of trip to, 629. Naymacush, 250. Neshamony River, allusion to, 551. Nettle, 209. New Brunswick, Rivers of, 386. Nicholson, J. W., 640, 642, 651. Nigger Gineral, The, 505, 541. Nipissiguit River, 390. Diary of trip to, 632, 647. Noonday Roast, The, 497. Noonings :— First—Trout-fishing in Hamilton County, New York, 503. Second—Trout-fishing in Hampshire, 511. Third—Trout-fishing in the regions of Lake Superior, 529. Fourth—Trout-fishing in the Adi- rondacks, 545. New Ohio River and tributaries, 100, Ohio Salmon, 120. Old Sturgis, 507. Osmerus viridescens, 263. Species found in the Schuylkill, 263. Oswego Bass, 110. Otolithus regalis, 283. Ova of fish :— Improvidence concerning, 43. Care for it, by the Red Fin, 43. Number found in the Carp, Pike, Perch, Codfish, and Salmon, 44. Of viviparous fishes, 45,* Incubation of, after remaining be- neath the soil, 41, 481. Of Pelagian fish, floating, 44. Impregnated ova an article of com- merce in China, 48, 481. Packard, Bela, 390, 640. Pagrus agyrops, 301. Perca flavescens, 114. Perch Family, 77. Yellow barred, 114. Buffalo, 122. Fishing for, 92. Chinkapin, 111. Percidx, remarks on, 77. Great numbers of American species, 77. Paucity of European species, 78. Distinguishing marks of, 78. INDEX. Percidx, migratory habits, 79. Percing, sub family, 120. Perley, 239, 243. Petromyzontide, 183, Philips, Clement S., article by, 671. Pickerel, Great Northern, 131. Trolling for, 133. Pickering’s Piscatorial Reminiscences, 129, Piconeau, 148, 155. Pigfish, 289. Pike Family, remarks on, 127. Pond Pike, 138. Trolling for, 139. Fishing for, in Virginia, 143. Great Blue, 147. Streaked, of the Ohio, 148. Story concerning, 149. Pliny’s Pike, 129. Gesner’s Pike, 129. Pike Perch, 120. Pipe, The, its soothing influences, 581. Piseco Club, 503. Pliny, Pike taken in the Rhine, 129. Pocomoka River, 176. Pogonias chromis, 299. Pomotis vulgaris, 115. _Pomoxis hexacanthus, 111. Pork, uses of, 515. Potiphar’s wife, 433. Prince Edward’s Island, 651. Push-mut-ta-ha, his last words, 568. Rafinesque, 59, 122. Rapid River, in Maine, 658, Rappahannock River, 87. Raquette River, 561. Receipts—Dyeing gut, 410. Feathers and dubbing, 411. Preparing Salmon lines in oil, 349. | Redfield, 60. | Red Fish of the Gulf of Mexico, 293. Reels generally, 71. For Trout-fishing, 312. For Salmon-fishing, 348. Repairs—to tie on hooks, 406, Loops, 407. | I To splice a line, 407. To splice a rod, 408. Knots, 409. i Gang of hooks, 409. | Reynolds, Reuben, 564. Reynolds, Sir Joshua, 28. . Richardson, Dr., 59, 206, 259, 269. ‘ Rintoul, 612, 640. INDEX. Roach and Roach-fishing, 161. Rockfish, 81. Rock-fishing on the Lower Rappahan- nock, 87. At Narragansett Bay, 671. Rock, Major, 633. Rock River, 102. Rod-making. Wood and cane used for, 442. Tools used in, 443. To make a fly-rod, 444, To make a tip, 445, To stain, oil, and varnish, 445. To wrap, splice, &e., 447. To make a rent and glued tip, 448. To make a fly-rod adjusted for light or heavy fishing, 452. To make ferules, 452. Rods, generally, 72. Fly-rods for Trout, 308. ee for Salmon, 345. Ronalds, 53, 318. Rouse’s Point, on Lake Champlain, 104. Sac 4 lai, 111. Saguenay River, 652. Salmon-Fishing. Tackle for, 345. Rods, 345. . Reels, 348. Reel lines, 349. To prepare reel lines in oil, 349. Casting lines, 350. Flies for rivers of New Brunswick, 353. Flies for rivers of Canada, 355. Casting the fly. Theory and prac- tice, 356. Compared with Trout-fishing, 357. The straightforward cast described, 358. Casting in difficult places, 361. Casting in an unfavorable wind, 362. Striking a Salmon, 363. Playing a Salmon, 364. What a Salmon may or will do, 367. Camping on the River, 368. Salmon-Fishing in Canada. Letter concerning, from D. A. P. Watt, Esq , 609. Average of fish per day in the St. John, Moisie, Goodbout, and Mingan, 610. Score of rods on the same for year 1863, 611. 699 Extract from “ All about Fishing,” 613. Account of the fishing in St. John for year 1863, 615-625. Account of the fishing in the Moisie by Bacon and Williams for years 1862, 1863, 626, 628. Account of fishing in the Goodbout for year 1864, by R. H. Powel, 628. Account of fishing in the Great Na- tashquan for year 1864, by Dr. C. K. Fiske, 629-632. Account of fishing in the Nipissi- guit, N. B., for the years 1863 and 1865, by the author, 632-650. Salmon. Former abundance in the United States, 206. Great numbers in California, Ore- gon, and British Possessions, 208, Decline of Salnfon Fisheries, 209. Scientific description of, 211. Natural process of propagation, 212. Growth of the young, 222. Grilse, 229. Mature Salmon, 2381. Size of, 232, 233. Instinct of, 233. . Migration of, 234. Leaps of, 235. Food of, 234, 236. Dwarf Salmon of the St. Croix, 248. Cooking Salmon on the river, 372. Home of, in Canadian waters, 607. Thackera’s error concerning, 206. Hendrick Hudson’s account of, 207. Salmon Rivers of Canada, 280, 608-632. Salmon Rivers of New Brunswick, 386, 632. Law and custom on, 374, Salmonide, Remarks on, 191. Salmo salar, 206. Canadensis, 238. Gloveri, 248. Naymacush, 250. Adirondacus, 255. Fontinalis, 194, Salt Water Fish and Fishing, 277, 302, Introductory remarks, 277. The Sheepshead, 279. The Weakfish, or Salt-Water Trout, 283. The Barb, or Kingfish, 286. The Spot, Pigfish, or Goody, 289. The Croaker, 291. , 700 The Redfish, 293. The Bluefish, 294. The Spanish Mackerel, 296. The Pompano, or Crevalle, 298. The Drumfish, 299. The Flounder, 299. The Sea-Bass, 300. The Blackfish, 300. The Mullet, 300. The Tom Cod, or Frostfish, 301. The Porgy, 301. Sand Pipers, 586. Sandre, 121. Sargus ovis, 279. Sarinac Lakes, 548. Sault, St. Mary, 536. Sauve Crevasse, in the Mississippi, 124. Savary, Captain, 616. Schoef, 59. Schoodic Trout, 248. Fishing for, 2 Scienoids, 124. Scientific Angling, 522. Scientific terms— Acanthopterygii, 56. Ctenoids, 40. Cycloids, 40. Malactpterygii, 56. Thoracic, 57. Abdominal, 57. Placoids, 40. Ganoids, 40. Scott, Captain Martin, 535. Scouring earth worms, 273. Sea-Bass, 300. Sebattis, Mitchell (Indian), 668. Sea Trout—See Canadian Trout, 238. Sea-Trout fishing, account of— By Mr. Perley, 243. By Dr. Adamson, 244. By the Author, 649. Extract from a letter from D. A. P. Watt, Esq., of Montreal, describ- ing, 652. Shad—delicacy as food, 171. Migratory habits, 172. Taken with a minnow, 173. Sheepshead, 279. An emigrant from the South, 280. Shipley, 415. Shourds, Sammy, of Long Beach, 278. Sinkers, 68. Skillet—uses for in the woods, 523, Smelt—great numbers of on northern coast, 265. INDEX. In Schuylkill and Raritan, 263. Great quantities sent South from Boston, 265. Used as a fertilizer, 265. Observation on species found in the Schuylkill, by the anthor, 263. Cooking Smelt, 266. Snapping Mackerel, 294. Snoods, 68. Southern Trout—not a trout, 284, Spanish Mackerel, 296. Sparrowgrass, Mr., 489. Splicing line and rod, 408. Spot, Pigfish, or Goody, 289. Spurr, J. D. W., 630. St. John, N. B., 390, 651. St. Margaret, 653. Storer, 60. Stores for camping out, 371. Stretcher-fly, 321. Striped Bass—See Rockfish. Striped-Bass Fishing— In the Rappahannock, 87. | At Naragansett Bay—the “mode peculiar,” 671. Sucker, 154. Sunfish, or Sunny, 115, Swivels, 68. Tabasintac River, N. B., 242, 651. Tackle in general, 63. Tadousac, 652. Taggard’s Hotel, Keysville, 549. Ta-ha-wus, 551. Temnodon Saltator, 294, Tent, 368. Thackera, 206. The Stream—Casting the Fly, 327. Theory of strict imitation, 334. Striking and killing a fish, 335. Likely places, and how to fish them, 337. Thousand Islands, 106, 107. Thymallus signifer, 259. Tom Cod, 301. Trexler, Reuben, 591. Trolling for Pickerel, 131. “« Pike, 139. « Muscalonge, 137. “ Lake Trout, 256. « Black Bass, 105. Trout, the Brook, 194. “— Great Lake, 250. “Lesser Lake, 255. « Canadian, or Sea Trout, 238. INDEX. Trout—the Schoodic Trout, 248. Trout Fishing in Hamilton County, New York, 503. In New Hampshire, 513. In the regions of Lake Superior, 531. In the Adirondacks, 547. In Oxford County, Maine, 654. In Rapid River, Maine, 656. With bait, 272. Trout Fly-Fshing—Outfit and Tackle. Wading Jacket, 305. Trowsers, 305. Boots, 305. Creel, or Basket, 306. Landing Net, 306. Rods, 308. Reels, 311. Lines, 312. Leaders, 312. Flies, 312. The Whip, 321. Tupper’s Lake, 561. Tyeing on hooks, 406. Umbagog Lake, 654. Umbrina nebulosa, 286. Uncle Gable, 505, 642, 701 Uncle Ickey Price, 514, 547. Unele Lot, 544, Uncle Peter Stewart, 158, 497, 579. Uncle Rolly, 89. Walton, Isaac, 11, 26, 27, 62, 76. His discourse on thankfulness, 592. Wax, 415. Waxing silk and thread, 405. Weakfish, 283. West, Sir Benjamin, 528, Whip, The, 321. Whitcher, W. F., 607. Whitefish, variety of species, 269. Their value as food, 270. How taken, 270. Habits—not a game fish, 271. Whittaker Lake, 508, Williams, of Boston, 612. Wilson, Philip, 147, 416, 532. Wolf River, 281. Wood, 69. Yarrell, 54. Yates, D. Gordon, 9. Young, of Invershin, Scotland, 214, 219. THE END. HBR Tee AIUI ABE MD LE) Ee ENG Ta a AE Hi } ea i ae pire SESS ESSA AS ide ih a ie Caprese rN 6 Oe si Zh i Ane aon As a ) (es a ale qi ey ee, Beane LAist ii ny Hite i yp ti fe Sea a HBS Leae ye iif i SCA ae ae nore Rae MUNI GIRI eT